Fiba Guide To Basketball Facilities PDF

FIBA GUIDE TO
BASKETBALL FACILITIES
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › Table of C ontents
2
12 14 26 56
Chapter 3
Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Subdivision of Sports Floor types and game

General Aspects facilities into areas equipment
Demand for Basketball Facilities 17 Sports A ctivities A rea 28 P laying F loor 58
Use of Sports Facilities 17 Support Services A rea 32 F loor R equirements for Basketball 62
L ocation of Basketball Facilities 20 P ublic A rea 48 Sub-F loors 65
C lassifications of competitions and
23 M ass Media A rea 53 Various Types of F loors 68
types of S ports Facilities
E lastic Substructures for all Types
VIP A rea 54 72
of F loors
A ncillary Services 54 G ame E quipment for Basketball 80
Technical E quipment 90
96 140 150 166

Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7
Technological Management of Use and maintenance Safety and security
installations sports facilities in sports facilities
A ir C onditioning S ystems 98 E lements of M anagement 143 Use and U tilisation of F ire P revention 170
152
Basketball Facilities
E lectrical Power Supply 101 C ost/ Benefits A nalysis 144 A ccess to Facilities 153 P ublic S afety 178
The A rtificial L ighting of C riteria to E valuate the S tate of
111 M anagement P lanning 146 153 S afety Signs 182
Basketball C ourts P reservation of a Facility
A coustics in Sports Facilities 123 M aintenance 155
Technological Video
134
Surveillance S ystems
3 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › Table of C ontents
186 210 222 234

Elimination of Special technological The approval procedure Outdoor basketball

architectural barriers installations and for basketball facilities
A ccess 188 security system equipment P roject of an Outdoor
236
Basketball C ourt
Horizontal C orrection S ystems 196 C ontrol S ystems for Technological Q uestionnaire for New A pplicants 228
215 M ain F eatures of an Outdoor C ourt 237
Installations
Vertical C orrection S ystems 200 Q uestionnaire for New A pplicants E valuation of the E ffects of
Special S afety and Security S ystems 215 231
(Basketball C ompanies) C onstruction on the E nvironment,
Surfaces 203 237
the General E nvironmental Impact,
and A rea S pecifications
F urniture - F ixtures and F ittings 205
M aintenance 240
E mergency M anagement 209 C onstructing the P laying A rea :
242
Technology and M aterials
M aterials and Technologies for 245
Outdoor Basketball Facilities
Basketball E quipment 247
Important R eminders for Basketball
249
C ourt C onstruction
250 262 272 282

Sports facilities and the FIBA & NBA Basketball and A multifunctional
organisation of international comparing basketball variations of the game hall project
basketball events facilities
E xternal A reas 255 FIBA 264 FIBA- R ecognised Disciplines 274
Indoor A reas 255 NBA 264 Variations not R ecognised by FIBA 277
R equirements for Hospitality
261 FIBA and Sports Facilities 266
S tructures
NBA and Sports Facilities 266
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › Table of C ontents
4
FIBA RESEARCH and Study Centre Director: Aldo Vitale Acknowledgments: Roberto Fiorucci, Mariella Bonsangue,
Avenue Louis Casai, 53
1216 Cointrin / Geneva Study Centre Manager: Karen Strahl Truc Nguyen Hoang, Mauro Barducci, Matteo Schiavone, Gilles Page
Switzerland Technical consultant: Mauro Schiavone-Architect (Philips Lighting), Erminio Ravasio-Architect
Phone: +41 (0)22 545 00 00 Artwork: Oiko Service Srl - Italy - oikoservice.com Special thanks to: Shaheen Haunschild who contributed deeply in
Fax: +41 (0)22 545 00 99
Printed by: Publish Srl - Italy translating all the Italian content into English. Thank you very much
[email protected] - [email protected]
Printed in: Pescara, October 2009 Shaheen for your hard work!
Saitama Super Arena - Saitama Japan
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › F orewords
6
Dear Friends,
FIBA and the FIBA Research and Study Centre is very honoured
to edit the new FIBA Guide to Basketball Facilities with the
prime objective to assist in promoting the construction and
refurbishment of sports halls around the world.
The two versions dedicated respectively to small and high-level
competitions were issued in 1997 and 1998. From there on, we
believed that it was time to edit a new book useful to everyone.
FIBA has always been aware of the need to raise the issue of
basketball facilities in particular the need of giving requirements
on specific standards where international competitions take
place.
The present guide is not the first contribution provided by the
FIBA Research and Study Centre, yet it should be one of the
most complete ones where technical aspects are taken into
account in details.
I am again very grateful to all of you who have contributed to
this wonderful production which I deeply recommend.
Bob Elphinston
President
7 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › F orewords
Dear FIBA Family,

Dear Reader,
We are very proud to present to you one of the most detailed
and up-to-date Guide on Basketball Facilities, published by
FIBA. We are certain that it will be useful to all readers who wish
to make the world of basketball a better one.
When building or refurbishing an arena, nothing should be
neglected. Effectiveness, professionalism, safety, security,
management aspects are only a few aspects among many
others that need to be analyzed and understood regularly in
order to optimize the basketball venue.
It is the role of the FIBA Study Centre to work on these objectives
every day and ensure that best practices and know how are
used and transmitted through its partners and its publications
worldwide. The recommendation contained in this Guide are
thus based upon years of experience in the construction,
refurbishment and management of sport facilities of the Study
Centre. Importantly, this Guide is not addressed only to the
FIBA family, but also to municipalities, to sports ministries, to
investors, to architects, etc. that need to construct or refurbish
a basketball venue.
All over the world, outdoor or multipurpose indoor courts are
the places where the young players have their first contact with
basketball; the courts where all the great champions of the past
and present began. Therefore we really believe that to spread
the basketball religion, our venues must be state of the art,
functional and affordable to every community and environment.
These venues can then only foster the development of future
champions and enhance the pleasure of playing for everyone.
I sincerely hope that you will find every chapter useful in your
endeavour to improve the standards of the basketball facilities
in your country and cities.
Patrick Baumann
Secretary General
IOC Member
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › F orewords
8
Dear Fiends of the FIBA Study Centre,

For the 15th Anniversary of the creation of the FIBA Research &
Study Centre, I am very proud to witness the publication of this
important book which confirms once again the legitimacy of the
FIBA Study Centre “concept” and its important development
throughout the world.
I sincerely hope that in the years to come this entity will keep
on growing as it has so far and that it will remain a wonderful
example for all the existing sports around the world.
Borislav Stankovic
Secretary General Emeritus
9 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › F orewords
Dear Basketball Amateurs,

The FIBA Research and Study Centre was the initiative of
Borislav Stankovic, FIBA’s former Secretary General. Founded
in 1993, its aim was to equip and increase the number of sports
facilities throughout the world.
The Study Centre encourages the construction of basic facilities
and the refurbishment of older ones, coordinates research
initiatives and offers consulting services for materials, equipment
design and construction. The objective is to reach a high
standard of quality, safety and technology for the athletes, the
public and the media.
At the Study Centre’s inception, this entity was created in
a great meeting place to see our partners. FSB generates
Munich. In the spring of 1994, we acquired our first three
new business and networking opportunities for all and allows
partners. In fifteen years, we have grown to more than 65
us to see all our partners reunited.
partners and associates.
Finally by establishing constant communication with
In the past few years, the Study Centre has been extensively
international sport federations regarding common studies for
involved in different projects for the basketball venues. The
sport facilities, we manage with no doubt, to make indoor
following are only a very few examples of our past, present and
and outdoor basketball an exceptional world!
future achievements.
At last, I would like to thank very warmly the incredible people
Starting with the Adriatic arena in Pesaro (Italy) in 1996, the
who have been working by my side during the past 15 years.
Study Centre was also widely implicated in the construction of
Starting with Nicole Appleby and followed by Josephine
the Hellenikon arena in Athens (Greece) in 2004. That same
Leicher, Marie Beneux, Marina Arlati, Stefan Gebhard, Nora
year, the Study Centre got involved in the refurbishing of the
Szanto, Santi Wibowo and in the end Karen Strahl our current
Belgrade Arena, the location for the 2004 Diamond Ball
Study Centre Manager who has greatly contributed to the
Tournament and the 2005 European Championship.
realization of this book.
Our contribution was also brought to the beautiful Saitama
Aldo Vitale
arena in Japan in 2006 and later to the Wukesong Cultural and
Director of the Study Centre
Sports Centre, in agreement with the International Olympic
Committee’s Sport Department, when preparing guidelines for
the basketball facility for the 2008 Olympics in Beijing.
Recently, the Bulgarian Basketball Federation invited the FIBA
Study Centre to consult on the large government project of
building 3 basketball facilities throughout Bulgaria.
Last but not least, the biennial FSB fair (International Trade Fair
for Amenity Areas, Sports and Pool Facilities) always represents
Wukesong Indoor Arena Beijing
Preface
13 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › P reface
T
his new revised GUIDE to Basketball Facilities appears an open-air facility. The guide also includes an introduction to
just over ten years after the publication of the first the FIBA and NBA systems.
edition. The major difficulty, however, lay in limiting the subject matter,
At the invitation of FIBA, and in particular Mr. Aldo for each chapter sparked an impulse to delve even deeper.
Vitale, I have undertaken to revise the texts, focusing on FIBA’s I would like to thank the partners of FIBA who contributed with
objective to ensure that this second edition remains a GUIDE valued input, information and experience, and in particular Mr.
which provides recommendations and specifications useful Gilles Page at Philips, who assisted with the editing of the texts
to all those involved in basketball and/or the organisation of on facilities.
international events, from managers and organisers, planners Thanks also go to my colleagues, architects Roberto Fiorucci,
and developers, to clubs and players. Mariella Bonsangue, Than Truc Nguyen Hoang, and Mauro
My approach was, first and foremost, to review the details Barducci, engineer and specialist in acoustics, and Matteo
presented in the first edition, in the light of the current needs Schiavone, bachelor of sports science and scholar in event
of the sporting world and in particular basketball, a sport which management, who, apart from revising the texts, elaborating
has seen a significant change over the last ten years, in terms the graphics and conducting research for new chapters, all
of popularity and calibre. contributed actively and professionally with their critical
Consequently, I found it necessary to focus on aspects observations on new phenomena in basketball... a discipline
which affect the planning of basketball facilities, given that which is always receptive and responsive to the phenomena
facilities today must satisfy new needs for comfort, safety and affecting modern sport.
multifunctionality. Editor
Mauro Schiavone, Architect
A simple revision of the texts soon transformed the book into
newly worded chapters, incorporating the latest recommenda-
tions and requirements. Particular attention was paid to issues
such as the environment, safety, the elimination of architectural
barriers, facility maintenance and energy containment, all of
which have undergone significant development over the past
decade, not only culturally but also technologically, with new
technological advances also having an impact on the sports
facilities themselves.
This entire guide follows a precise format, starting with a stricter
analysis of the game equipment on and around the court, and
ending with the management and maintenance of the equipment
in relation to the entire facility. References are made not only to
management and technological installations, but also to “new”
topics such as the association between the facility itself and
the
events held in the facility, or the typical basic requirements of
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › Chapter 1
Gaeneral
spects
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 1 › General Aspects
16
T
he popularity of basketball, reflected by its worldwide International basketball activities are governed by the Official
appeal, rising number of competitions and growing Basketball Rules adopted by the International Basketball
interest shown by the public and mass media in basketball Federation (FIBA).
events, has prompted FIBA, the International Basketball The rules are updated on regular basis and guarantee total
Federation, to review the Guide to Basketball Facilities for High- fairness in team competitions, having been tried and tested in
Level Competitions published a few years ago. many high-level competitions.
There is a clear need not only to provide a modern concept They include the basic guidelines for the construction of
of indoor sports facilities but also to establish standards and basketball facilities with regard to size and space, as well as
requirements which offer guidelines and support to organisers, details on equipment, as specified in the chapters that follow.
whether they be hosting indoor and outdoor basketball events In other words, this guide is not intended merely as a theoretical
or merely setting up a temporary court. In order to keep pace tool but rather as a contribution towards standardising facility
with this development and be in line with new trends, FIBA has requirements and regulations in order to facilitate and accelerate
decided to extend the guide to include the non-conventional the organisational and decision-making process for everyone
sectors, such as streetball or playground basketball, which have involved in basketball events.
seen recent significant growth. Technical and constructional requirements related to today’s
The main aim of this guide, therefore, is to provide firm planning criteria of sports facilities must take into account the
guidelines for the planning, construction and homologation of delicate issues of global interest and respect the following
basketball sports facilities and/or the restoration of existing principles:
basketball halls. The criteria adopted meet today’s needs in the ·· Attention to the environment;
organisation of sporting events, with the objective of targeting
·· Structural safety;
all the organisations and operators involved: government
·· Personal safety;
organisations, national sports federations, sports associations,
·· Elimination of architectural barriers;
clubs, sport managers, and professionals.
·· Attention to energy requirements;
In other words, the guide studies the most important aspects,
·· Rational use of water;
determines parameters, and provides a defined evaluation
and implementation process for every element that can be ·· Achievement of environmental welfare standards;
standardised, yet without touching on the actual formal design ·· Attention to technological innovation.
of sports facilities, as this could inhibit the planners’ freedom of It is important to note that each part, each component, every
creative expression. planning aspect and every piece of equipment must be
More precisely, sports facilities designed to host international considered and evaluated according to international technical
competitions must meet the requirements included in this standards. These standards, issued by universally recognised
guide. international bodies, are currently incorporated and implemented
Compliance with the requirements must be shown by following into most national regulations, and affect the construction of
a standardisation procedure based on special certification buildings that will house sports facilities with or without a public
specifying the type and category of the sports facilities, with presence.
particular consideration given to the capacity of a facility and Moreover, all new projects for sports facilities, including
player and spectator safety. restoration projects for existing facilities, must always conform
17 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 1 › General Aspects
to the regulations of the country in which a facility is to be built. Streetball is now a thriving sector, enjoying worldwide success
and popularity thanks to the growing interest shown by young
Demand for Basketball Facilities
players and the influence that this has on the mass media.
“Demand” is a fundamental element when planning the
Other ways of playing basketball are continually developing and
construction of basketball facilities. It is a good idea to promote
as interest in these new ways of playing grows, so their exposure
a concerted agreement between all the prospective parties to
to the public also increases.
be involved in the development of the construction plan and
operational management from the onset, from service suppliers Use of Sports Facilities
to end users. The use of existing and future facilities depends very much on
·· Demand for sports facilities generally depends on the the original conception of the structure and whether or not the
following; facilities are included in a management plan that takes into
Diagram 1.1
·· The desire to promote the opportunity for sports activities; account all the factors concerning the use of the facility.
Use of Sports
facilities ·· General public interest in sport; (Diagram 1.1)
·· The promotion of local sports events; Economy Aspects Communication
·· The need to add prestige to existing sports facilities.
Over the past few years, there has been a significant increase in Sport Facility Management
the demand for sports in many countries, thanks to the influence
of the mass media and the modern concept of sport as a means Event Management
to promoting health and well-being, with the result that sports Safety & Security Merchandising
events have now become great social happenings. diagram 1.1
In fact, in terms of quality, demand has been influenced by

The only way to assess the feasibility of sports facilities is to
people’s desire to keep in shape, feel fit and healthy, relax, forge
conduct a complete management analysis.
social contacts and actively take part in events. This latest trend
The economic life of a facility starts in the planning phase when
is backed by the growing interest of youngsters and teenagers
consideration is given to the rooms, halls, equipment and all other
during training sessions at international competitions.
materials necessary for management executives to implement
The demand for sports activities is also influenced by factors
activity planning and realise economic growth.
such as people’s age, profession, and financial situation, as well
Nowadays, planning represents a true investment cost as the
as the possibility and ability to organise sporting events.
planning and forecast phase has a direct impact on the future
Thanks to its defining characteristics and growing interest
life of the facility; for this reason, planning must be developed in
amongst youngsters, basketball, in particular, has seen a
close collaboration with the facilities’ managers.
significant increase in popularity which, in turn, has given rise to
Diagram 1.2 summarises the relationship between the
a flourishing number of initiatives.
owner commissioning the sports facility, the planner and the
Adults are usually inclined to play basketball because of their
future manager of the facility. The column on the left shows
fascination for the game as a whole, whilst youngsters tend to
the requirements that the structure must meet, and the right
express their enthusiasm for the sport through their choice of
hand column shows the performances it must deliver from a
clothing, not only influencing basketball fashion, but also ways
management point of view. It is the planner’s task to create
of playing the game.
18
diagram 1.2 regarding location, maintenance, energy consumption, safety

measures for spectators, mass media and various other
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN: OWNER - PLANNER - MANAGER
services.
By studying the potential use of a facility in the preliminary
phase, energy costs can be forecast early on, thus allowing
OWNER PLANNER MANAGER
energy-saving measures to be explored in advance. Energy
consumption could be reduced merely by virtue of specific Diagram 1.2
equipment (for example, sports equipment approved according Relationship
between
GENERAL PURPOSES to international rules) or by installing mobile partition walls which the owner
enable a space to be divided into a number of areas so that commissioning
AIMS BUSINESS PLAN the sports facility,
several activities can take place at the same time. the planner
WHAT SPORTS ? and the future
At present, the most important requirement of a sports complex manager
of the facility.
ENTERTAINMENT ? EVENT MANAGEMENT PLAN
is multifunctionality: facilities must be able to cater for events
COMMERCIAL SERVICES?
and purposes other than just sports competitions, for example:
SAFETY PLAN
conferences, exhibitions, theatre shows, concerts, trade fairs,
SECURITY RESPECT? SECURITY PLAN etc. In this way managers can programme a constant use of the
sports facilities, thus guaranteeing continuity in technical and
WHAT TYPE OF MAINTENANCE ? MAINTENANCE PLAN
economic terms. (Diagram 1.3)
Furthermore, over the last ten years, the concept of facilities with
a sports facility that meets the requirements of both these Diagram 1.3
columns.
RELATIONSHIP Planning of a
constant use
Unfortunately, the management question is often ignored or of the sports
FINANCIAL PLAN facilities.
given little consideration. This often results in managers finding
themselves confronted with negative consequences which
can arise when formally beautiful facilities become ultimately
CHECK
TECHNICAL
unmanageable due to complicated maintenance, and the
MANAGEMENT
excessive administrative and personnel costs involved.
The type of use of sports facilities should be foreseen in the diagram 1.3
conception phase and be based on the specific requirements of
the region, as defined by a sport trend, organisation or club. It
is imperative that those involved in promoting the construction a multifunctional purpose has expanded to cover aspects which
or restoration of a sports facility have a clear idea, right from the were once considered marginal and of secondary importance,
start, of its intended use, or rather its potential use: should it be such as reception and exhibition areas, merchandising and
used only for national or international sports competitions or for hospitality areas, which today represent one of the main sources
other types of events as well? of income in the organisation of events.
This decision will determine a series of important factors Multifunctional requirements should be the driving force in
the redevelopment or restoration of existing facilities. Recent
THE EVOLUTION OF THE DIFFERENT SECTIONS IN A SPORT FACILITY BASED ON THE ACTUAL DEMAND OF DEDICATED SPACES
infrastructures
spectactors spectactors
hospitality - services
merchandising
infrastructures
infrastructures
infrastructures
infrastructures
spectactors
spectactors
spectactors
spectactors
media
media
court court
Diagram 1.4
Increase in the
areas required spectactors spectactors
when building
sports facilities infrastructures infrastructures
today
Plan Plan
Section Section
diagram 1.4
surveys have shown that in various countries both government satisfy three main requirements:
bodies and sports organisations support political strategies for ·· Rapid transformation of space;
the redevelopment and restoration of existing sports facilities ·· Maintenance of safety levels;
and halls suitable for hosting sports activities, based on a ·· Simplified maintenance of functional units.
programme with the following main objectives:
The advantages of this approach include the increase in
·· Full exploitation of existing facilities; direct revenue, not only from the facilities themselves but also
·· Restoration of abandoned or inadequate facilities; from ancillary services (bars, cloakroom, car parks, etc) and
·· Flexibility in the use of the structures; advertising which can reach a wider target.
·· Application of integrated and open management strategies; These aspects will be examined in more detail in the chapter on
·· Identification of specific profitable interventions that will management.
bring economic benefits to the management of the facility. With regard to basketball, FIBA has been trying for many
Considering the new concept of sport that is emerging in modern years to establish common standards for the planning of
society, multifunctional requirements of this kind must also be sports facilities and to promote the standardisation of basic
taken into account for all new facilities, regardless of their size. basketball equipment (balls, backboards, game clocks, etc),
Diagram 1.4 illustrates the increase in the areas required when to allow managers, athletes, experts, consultants, referees,
building sports facilities today. commissioners, etc to carry out their respective activities in the
In order to be considered multifunctional, sports facilities must best possible way, irrespective of the geographical location of
20
the facilities. Therefore, setting aside the geographical position, the location
Quite often, promoting plans for sports facilities will help to of a sports facility, be it on a national or local scale, must be
bring basketball to areas where it tends not to be played for the foreseen as part of an accurate sustainability plan that takes
simple reason that facilities are not available or there is not an into account the territory in which it is to be built.
active interest in the game in that region. It is also worth noting The construction and alteration of sports facilities must be
that the creation of sports facilities is often closely related to in harmony with the local environment, by conforming to the
the need to promote and instruct experts to improve basketball existing character of the natural and built surroundings. Not only
organisation in general. must the building be well integrated, in order not to affect the
primary function of the area, there are a number of factors to
Location of Basketball Facilities
take into consideration, in particular:
To determine in which geographical area a basketball facility
·· Health and safety of workers, staff and residents in the area
would be most beneficial, it would be necessary to estimate the
concerned;
annual growth trend of sport in general. An evaluation of this kind,
carried out on a worldwide scale, is undoubtedly a delicate and ·· Waste management (excavation and site waste, as well as
difficult task as there are certain geographical areas that have waste produced during events and competitions);
urgent needs and basic requirements, and other areas where ·· Rational use of energy aimed at reducing energy
basketball is more common and well-organised, and demands consumption;
more or less satisfied. ·· Sustainable mobility;
The starting point of any type of process lies in being aware of ·· Water management aimed at reducing water consumption;
the present situation. An assessment of the present situation ·· Prevention of natural risks;
provides an estimate of the balance between supply and ·· Preservation of the landscape;
demand, which in turn gives an idea of the level of satisfaction ·· Sustainable architecture;
regarding equipment, and the use and condition of existing ·· Mitigation measures to minimise environmental impact;
facilities. Scheduling of “new” facilities or planning of existing
·· Control of greenhouse gas emissions;
ones can be started on the basis of these elements.
·· Sustainable use of the facilities when not used for events.
The planning process must follow on a large geographical area
The construction of sports facilities has a fundamental role in an
in order to achieve a balanced development of sports facilities
international cooperation project for sustainable development,
-otherwise influenced by local vocations and basketball traditions
the objective of which is to combat social alienation, encourage
-and to avoid duplication, for example two facilities with the same
new consumer habits, contribute to health protection, promote
characteristics in close proximity.
an increased social use of sports structures, and favour the
Sports facilities that host international events or competitions
integration of environmental themes and the development of
have a great environmental impact for various reasons: they
sports policies.
involve the travel of a great number of people, the production
One important aspect concerning the location of sport facilities,
of waste, power consumption for lighting indoor areas, meeting
which influences the optimisation of its use, is the infrastructure
areas and large outdoor areas, noise pollution, and general high
of public and private transport, and of car parks. This aspect
energy consumption, not to mention the repercussions caused
is not only important in the case of large events but also in
by the actual construction in the case of new facilities.
improving long-term management of the facility, in order to
avoid major problems in the future. Diagram 5
Over the last few years, the organisers of basketball events

have paid particular attention to this aspect, seeking solutions
particularly in terms of public transport networks and urban
management of parking areas for sports facilities. Parameters
used to study such solutions include the age of the facility users,
travel time, the schedule of sports events in relation to the total
events organised in the town, and the ordinary use of the sports
structure.
Sports facility users (players, staff and spectators) usually reach
the complex in the following ways:
·· On foot;
·· By public transport (train, bus, underground);
·· By private or collective transport i.e. coach (supporters,
players, etc.);
·· By private vehicle (bicycle, motorbike or car).
Therefore, in order to calculate the number of users, a special
study must be carried out that not only takes into account the
Diagram 5
Oaka Arena -
mode of transport used to reach the facility, but also the potential
Athens appeal that an event or sports activity may have in the area.
For this reason, sports facilities must have car parks for both
public and private transport. The size of the parking areas should
vary according to the purpose and use of the facilities, and be
planned according to the respective provisions in force in each
country. The layout of the car parks shall depend on the location
of the sports facility and on the availability of areas for use.
In the absence of specific regulations, the following standards
may be applied, on the basis of 1m² per spectator:
·· 1 person per bicycle or motorbike;
·· 3 people per car;
·· 60 people per coach;
·· Adequate parking spaces for differently abled persons.
Service car parks in close proximity to the sports facility are
also essential for:
·· Ambulances;
·· Emergency services;
22
Olympic Tournaments
Preliminary Round 7,500 seats
Final Round 12,000 seats
Olympic Qualifying Tournaments for Men and Women

World Championship for Men

World Championship for Women

U-21 World Championships for Men and Women

U-19 World Championship for Men

U-19 World Championship for Women

Continental or Zone Championships including all qualifying games and tournaments for these championships
Preliminary Round 5,000 - 8,000 seats
Final Round 10,000 - 15,000 seats

Diagram 6 ·· Television and radio broadcast technical services;

·· Team coaches (for players, technical commissioners and
referees).
Classifications of Competitions and Types of Sports

Facilities
Over the years, international events have seen a constant
increase in quantity, so now particular attention is being paid to
aspects of quality.
To establish common criteria, official FIBA regulations describe
the types of competitions that must be governed by the said
regulations, and the technical requirements that must be met
by the sports facilities in order to be able to host national and
international competitions.
The first distinction is made by classifying the official international
competitions governed by FIBA regulations:
Main official competitions:
·· Olympic Tournaments (IOC Regulations);
Diagram 6 ·· Olympic Qualifying Tournaments for Men and Women;
Saitama Super ·· World Championships for Men and Women;
Arena - Saitama
Japan ·· U-19 World Championships for Men and Women;
·· U-17 World Championships for Men and Women;
·· Continental or Zone Championships (including all qualifying
games and tournaments for these championships).
Official competitions:
·· Official cups and tournaments of FIBA;
·· International cups and tournaments sanctioned and officially
recognised by FIBA;
·· International competitions or tournaments.
The second type of classification, without taking into account
the technical specifications of the sports activity area (which are
the same for all facilities and are described in the next chapter),
is made on the basis of the minimum seating space required for
each type of event:
The seating capacity determines the number of spectators and
minimum number of service providers intended for a specific
24
type of event; however, as we will see later in the guide, other

aspects are required to qualify a sports facility, such as its
location, safety measures, absence of architectural barriers,
technological systems, and general meeting facilities.
In fact, it is important to remember that during the second half
of the 90s, basketball experienced a significant increase in
public interest, in terms of both paying spectators and television
audience, and consequently there has been a growing interest
of commercial partners who link their own corporate image to
FIBA.
These partners have increased the potential of basketball, forcing
organisers, in the planning and construction phase, to create
spaces and services within the facilities which are apt to meet
these new needs, to adopt innovative technological equipment
and any other elements necessary to cater to public preferences,
the needs of mass media operators and the requirements of
commercial partners.
In short, all events organised by FIBA should be held in facilities
suitable for high-level competitions. A difference in seating
capacity (for example 3,000 seats as opposed to 15,000) must
not, however, affect performance and technical standards.
Seating capacity should only determine what type of competition
can be held in a certain facility.
FIBA selects facilities for international basketball events on the
basis of their compliance with the standards required for the
homologation of facilities; in accordance with the homologation
request forms submitted by the associations that take part
in international competitions; and finally on the basis of the
characteristics accurately described in this Guide.
During the bid procedure for candidates wishing to host an
event, absolute priority will be given to those who are best able
to meet FIBA’s requirements.
25
SF ubdivision of Sports
acilities Into Areas
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES› C hapter 2 › Subdivision of Sports Facilities Into Areas
28
Sports Activities Area the mid-points of the sidelines and shall extend 15 cm beyond
T
he heart of any sports complex is the actual playing each sideline.
area itself; the arena or central playing court with its pe- The centre circle shall be marked in the centre of the playing
rimeter area and, ideally, an additional area for training court and have a radius of 1.80m measured to the outer edge
purposes and pre-game warm-ups. of the circumference. If the inside of the centre circle is painted,
Facilities hosting high-level competitions, in particular, should it must be the same colour as the restricted areas.
include a second playing area with a minimum seating capacity The semicircles shall be marked on the playing court with a
of 200-300 seats, which can be used for training purposes when radius of 1.80m measured to the outer edge of the semi-
the central court is occupied during games, or as a warm-up circumference and with their centres at the mid-points of the
area before competitions. Depending on the size and purpose free-throw lines (Diagram 2.2).
of a sports complex, the playing area and/or related premises Free throw lines and restricted areas 1
can be fully exploited to optimise the facility’s overall use by A free-throw line shall be drawn parallel to each endline. It shall
organising other activities such as aerobics, physiotherapy, have its furthest edge 5.80m from the inner edge of the endline
squash, bowling, etc. and shall be 3.60m long. Its mid-point shall lie on the imaginary
Playing court and playing area line joining the mid-points of the two endlines.
The playing court must have a rectangular, flat, hard surface, The restricted areas shall be the floor areas marked on the
free from obstructions (Diagram 2.1a). playing court, limited by the endlines, the free-throw lines and
The dimensions of court must be 28m in length and 15m in the lines which originate at the endlines, their outer edges
width, measured from the inside edge of the boundary line. being 3m from the mid-points of the endlines and terminating
The height of the ceiling or the lowest obstruction above the at the outer edge of the free-throw lines. These lines, excluding
playing floor must be at least 7m from the ground. The court the endlines, are part of the restricted three-second area. The
surface must be uniformly and adequately lit. The lights must inside of the restricted areas may be painted but must be the
be positioned so they do not hinder the players’ and officials’ same colour as the centre circle.
vision. Free-throw rebound places along the restricted areas, reserved
Court lines for players during free throws, shall be marked as in Diagram
All lines must be drawn in the same colour (preferably white), 2.2:
5cm in width and clearly visible. Three-point field goal area
Boundary lines For all national and international competitions and for all
The playing court must be limited by boundary lines, consisting categories, a team’s three-point field goal area shall be the
of the endlines (on the short sides) and the sidelines (on the entire floor area of the playing court, except for the area near the
long sides). These lines are not part of the playing court. opponents’ basket, limited by and including (Diagram 2.3):
Any obstruction, including seated team bench personnel, Two parallel lines extending from and perpendicular to the
must be at least 2m from the advertising boards or any other endline with the furthest edge at 6.252 m from the point on the
obstruction. floor directly perpendicular to the exact centre of the opponents’
Centre line, centre circle and semicircles basket. The distance of this point from the inside edge of the
1 Changes valid as per Oct. 2010: The resticted areas shall be the floor rectangle areas marked on the
The centre line shall be marked parallel to the endlines from playing court, The restricted (three second) area shall be of the rectangle (not anymore of trapezoid).
2 Change valid as per Oct. 2010 : The distance of the three-point line shall be 6.75m.
29 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES› C hapter 2 › Subdivision of Sports Facilities Into Areas
EXTERNAL SAFETY AREA
SAFETY AREA INTENDED
2.00m
FOR COMMISSIONER
28.00m
REPRESENTATIVE
AND/OR FIBA
1.575m
Sidelines
SAFETY AREA AROUND THE PLAYING AREA

Endlines
(measured from the inside of the boundary line)
COURT PLAYING 28.00mx15.00m
3.60m

FOR PHOTOGRAFERS
2.00m
“RULE 2010”
15.00m
1.575m
FOR PHOTOGRAFERS
Centre circle
Centre line
6.
25
m
Endlines
Sidelines
Diagram 2.1a
0.15m
Playing Court 2.00m
1.25m
2.00m
2.00m
3.00m
TEAM BENCH AREA RESERVED AREA FOR OFFICIALS TEAM BENCH AREA
9.00m 10.00m 9.00m
diagram 2.1a
mid-point of the endline is 1.575m; 2. Each area shall be limited by a line extending from the
1. A semicircle with a radius of 6.25m measured to the outer endline, at least two (2) m in length, and by another line at least
edge of the circumference from the centre (which is the same two (2) m in length, drawn five (5) m from the centre line and
point defined above) which meets the parallel lines. perpendicular to the sideline;
2. Throw-in side lines 3 3. There must be fourteen (14) seats available in the team bench
No-charge semicircles 4 area for the coaches, assistant coaches, substitutes and team
Team bench areas followers. Any other people shall be at least two (2) m behind
The team bench areas shall be marked as follows: the team bench.
(Diagram 2.4): Safety areas
1. The team bench areas shall be marked outside the playing The area immediately surrounding the playing area is known as
court, on the same side as the scorer’s table and the team the “safety area” and is particularly important.
benches; The safety area around the playing area is marked by four lines
3 Changes valid as per Oct. 2010: The two (2) small lines shall be marked outside the court, on the opposite
side of the scorer’s table and the team bench areas, with the outer edge at the distance of 8.325m from the parallel to the perimeter of the court at a distance of two (2)
inside edge of the end lines, in other words, level to the top of the three-point line.
During the last two minutes of the game and of the extra period, following the time-out granted to the team m. The area is reserved for the two playing teams; only the
that has been entitled to the possession of the ball from its backcourt, the subsequent throw-in will be taken
on the opposite side of the scorer’s table from the “throw-in side line” and not as presently from the centre referees and the two coaches can stay in bench areas of their
line extended.
4 Changes valid as per Oct. 2010: The no-charge semicircles shall be marked on the playing court, under respective teams. The colour of the safety area shall be the
the baskets. The distance of the inner edge of the semicircles shall be 1.25m from the centre of the basket
(on the floor). A charging (offensive) foul should never be called if the contract by the offensive player is with same colour as the centre circle and the restricted areas.
the defensive player standing within the no-charge semicircle.
30
1.80m
Outer edge
3.60m
0.85m
0.10 m 0.85m Diagram 2.2

Neutral zone Free-Throw Lines
0.40m 5.80m
0.85m
90°m 1.75m
Mid-points of 1.575m 1.20m

the endlines
3.00m 3.00m
6.00m
REGULATION FREE THROW LANE (all lines 0.05m wide)
diagram 2.2
diagram 2.3
1.25m
Two-point field
DIRECTION OF PLAY
goald area
Three-point field
Two-point field
goald area
goald area
Opponents’
basket
Diagram 2.3
Three-point field
goal area
Three-point field
goald area
6. 2
5m
1.575m
1.25m
Diagram 2.4
Team bench areas
2.00m
2.00m
5.00m 5.00m
3.00m
TEAM BENCH AREA RESERVED AREA FOR OFFICIALS TEAM BENCH AREA
3.00m
Team Bench (14 seats) Team Bench (14 seats)
Table officials
9.00m 9.00m
diagram 2.4
New facilities shall include an additional safety area of three (3) The officials’ table shall be at least 6 m long and placed on a
m, however in no case less than 1.80m in width, which will be platform at least 20cm above floor level
off-limits to the public and reserved solely for: Five chairs must be placed at the officials’ table plus two sets of
a. Officials; two chairs at the sides for player substitutions (Diagram 2.5).
b. Commissioners and/or FIBA representatives; If possible, for high-level competitions, one table with five
c. Team members; chairs for the commissioners and/or FIBA representatives
d. Photographers. should be placed along one of the endlines, in the corner
Advertising boards around the court must not be higher than opposite the players’ benches and officials’ table. The Jury of
80 cm and must be placed at least two (2) m from the endlines Appeal and technical officials shall stay in this area. In high-
and sidelines. They may be fixed or free-standing and shall be level competitions, team benches shall be placed 3m from the
adequately padded around the top with rubber or similar, at safety area in a 3x9m rectangle formed by the extension of
least five (5) cm thick and with an indentation factor of 50% in the endline and another perpendicular line drawn 5m from the
order to prevent injury to players or referees. centre line. During a game, the photographers must stay behind
the advertising boards, in the 3m wide safety area beyond the
Officials
endlines, near the area intended for commissioners and/or FIBA
Officials shall be seated in the areas reserved for them along
representatives.
one of the sidelines, where the benches shall be placed at least
2m from the edge of the line.
32
diagram 2.5 accessible to people with reduced physical or sensory abilities

and must include the following rooms in particular:
e. Changing rooms for players, referees and other officials;
f. Areas for Commissioners and/or FIBA representatives;
COURT PLAYING
g. A doping control station;
h. A first-aid room for the players and the public;
2.00m
FURTHER BOUNDARY LINE i. A storage room; Diagram 2.5
j. Administrative offices. Officials table

TEAM Substitution Substitution TEAM
BENCH chairs chairs BENCH
AREA 6.00m (min) AREA
a) Changing Rooms
X X X X
0.80m (min) Officials Table Sports facilities must include changing rooms for the following
1 2 3 4 5
users:
1= Twenty-four second operator 4= Scorer Scorer’s table placed on a platform
2= Timer 5= Assistant scorer
3= Commissioner
(minimum 0.20 in height)
1. Players;
2. Referees and staff;
Training Area 3. Game officials.
For high-level competitions, a training area with body-building
The changing room area shall be accessible from the main
equipment must be provided. The area must measure at least
entrance and the playing hall.
50m², but the size may vary depending on the type of equipment
provided. The training area should be located in close proximity Players’ changing rooms (Diagrams 2.6 to 2.11)
to the changing rooms to give athletes easy access. The players’ changing room area shall include the following:
Warm-up Area a. The actual changing rooms where the athletes get changed;
Sports facilities that intend to host high-level competitions b. An access room adjoining the changing rooms and separating
such as Olympic tournaments, or World and Intercontinental them from the toilets and showers;
championships, must have a second court for athletes to warm c. A shower area with a number of showers proportionate to the
up and exercise prior to a game. If possible, this practice court actual number of changing rooms, and possibly without
should meet the same conditions as the central court (lighting, internal partitions;
colour, air conditioning, flooring, baskets, etc.). d. Toilets and washbasins;
Support Services Area e. Possibly a hydrotherapy area.
General Aspects The following environmental specifications should be met:
The support service areas are those areas in which activities ·· The temperature inside the changing rooms shall be between
intrinsically linked to the sports activities themselves are carried 20°C and 24°C (optimum temperature is 22°C);
out, such as the entrance and exit areas of the complex, the ·· A natural or forced ventilation system must be provided to
changing rooms,; toilets and showers, cloakrooms for both purify the air, ventilation ducts must be placed near sources
teams and spectators, first aid, equipment maintenance, of odours or humidity or other appropriate areas (changing
administration and other services. rooms, entrances, showers, toilets); the air must be changed
These areas shall be free from obstructions in order to be 5 times per hour;
Storage
34
Warm up area
4.00m 1.80m
Cupboard
1.50m
Bench
Shower
Blackboard
Refrigerator
Diagram 2.6
5.00m
1.80m
Changing Room 12 -“A”
Massage
table
0.90
2.30
2.40x0.60m
Changing room WC
1.50m
for 12 users
Shower Legend
H
H=
4.00m 1.80m
diagram 2.6
diagram 2.7
Blackboard
1.80m 1.10m
Changing room
for 12 users
Grates
2.40m
Refrigerator
Shower Bench
Diagram 2.7
Massage
4.00m
Changing Room 12 -“B”
Shower table
H 2.40x0.60m
WC
0.90
2.30
1.50m
Cupboard
Legend
H=
1.80m 4.00m
36
5.00m 4.00m
Shower
Cupboard Grates
1.90m
Refrigerator
Shower
Massage
table Diagram 2.8
Blackboard 2.40x0.60m
5.00m
0.90
2.30
Bench
3.00m
0.80
2.30
Toilets H
Toilets Legend
Changing room
H=
for 15 users
5.00m 1.80m 1.00m 1.00m
diagram 2.8
·· Average natural lighting should be provided (at least 200 lux if In order to assure good organisation, an adequate number of
artificial ) and at least 30 lux for emergency lighting; changing rooms should be provided (a minimum of 4) which
·· The noise level from all possible external sources which may comply with the following standards:
reach the changing rooms must not be higher than 50dB (A). When determining the size of the area required, calculations
It is advisable to build different types of changing rooms should be based on a variable number of users, ranging between
according to the various uses. a minimum of 10 and a maximum of 20. A good compromise,
The changing room area should allow users adequate space to both functional and economic, would be to estimate 15 athletes
change in front of a bench, and hang their clothes on hooks or per changing room. For practical reasons, the rooms should be
in lockers, as well as provide access to the toilets and showers sufficiently spacious (i.e. 3-4m wide).
through the access room. Screens should be positioned in front of the changing room
The changing room area must be located next to the playing hall entrances to safeguard the privacy of the players when the
so that athletes, referees and officials can have direct access to doors are open.
the sports area when they are wearing their sports clothes. The The following building specifications serve as a guideline:
minimum space required for an athlete in a changing room, the ·· The flooring shall be placed on a structure (specific floor or
so-called “changing room unit”, is equal to 0.80mx2m. foundation) to prevent rising damp, and shall be made of non-
The players’ changing rooms should be planned according slip tiles; the flooring shall slope towards the runoff grids used
to their proposed use and the type of the activities envisaged. to collect the wash water. Drainage outlets should not be
3.10m Blackboard
Refrigerator
Shower
2.00m
Grates
Shower H
Changing room
Bench
Diagram 2.9
for 15 users
1.70m
6.50m
Changing Room 15 -“B”
0.90
1.50m 2.30 Massage
Toilets H table
2.40x0.60m
Cupboard Legend
1.00m
0.80
2.30 H=
Toilets
1.50m 1.50m
diagram 2.9
diagram 2.10
7.00m 5.10m
Shower
Massage
1.80m
table Cupboard
2.40x0.60m Cupboard
Diagram 2.10 Changing room

5.00m

for 20 users
0.90
2.30
3.00m
Bench
0.80
2.30
0.80
2.30
Toilets
Legend
Toilets Toilets
Blackboard
H=
Refrigerator 1.80m 1.00m 1.00m 1.00m

38
Diagram 2.10a
Changing Room 20 -“A”- 3D
diagram 2.10a
diagram 2.11
Shower H Massage
table Refrigerator
Shower 2.40x0.60m
3.00m
Grates
Blackboard Cupboard
Diagram 2.11
6.80m
Changing room Changing Room 20 -“B”

0.90 for 20 users
1.50m
2.30
Toilets H
1.00m
0.80
Toilets 2.30
Bench Legend
1.00m
0.80
2.30 H=
Toilets
1.50m 2.50m 7.00m

located in transit areas or underneath equipment so that the installations. The components must be easy to assemble to
area can be hosed down easily with running water; facilitate mounting and dismounting, but must be tamper-
·· The walls shall be smooth and possibly treated with resin or resistant to prevent unauthorised removal;
painted, but not plastered, particularly not with non-washable ·· External openings shall be positioned at least 2m from the
plaster. For practical and safety reasons, the walls shall be ground and fitted with window grilles for privacy and security.
smooth, with no protrusions or sharp corners; ceramic tile The openings shall be transom-type windows with a transom
coverings or other coverings must extend to a minimum operator appropriately positioned at least 1.10-1.20m off
height of 2m; the ground. Skylights shall have the same opening system
·· For the ceilings, only smooth materials shall be used; (Diagram 2.12).
·· If false ceilings are installed, they shall be made of washable ·· The doors leading to the corridor shall be fitted with a ventilation
materials to enable easy maintenance of equipment and system. Double doors must have a minimum clearance span
of 1.20m (90+30cm) and single doors a clearance span of
90cm and a net clearance of 80cm. All doors must, without
diagram 2.12
fail, be fitted with a panic bar mounted at a height of 80cm
and a lock; this system is not necessary for doors leading to
the access rooms (Diagram 2.13);
·· The benches shall be made of wood if possible and equipped
with coat hooks and shoe shelves if lockers are not available;
alternatively, they can be made of very resistant materials that
can be hosed down and do not require particular maintenance.
Any metal parts must be corrosion-resistant. All parts must
be fixed together onto a main frame to prevent gradual
distortion, or even damage due to sudden strain. Whenever
Diagram 2.12 diagram 2.13

Window Frame
Diagram 2.13
Internal Doors
40
possible, the use of nails, screws and bolts should be avoided. in the same manner as the bench components, as described
The components shall be assembled to the frame in such a above (Diagram 2.14);
manner that the frame can withstand a minimum force of 120 ·· If possible, hairdryers shall also be provided in the changing
kgf, emanating from the most unfavourable direction. Unsafe rooms. The number of hairdryers shall be the same as the
protrusions must be avoided and all corners and edges must number of showers. They shall be mounted to the wall at least
be rounded. Plastic plugs, gaskets and all parts which may jut 1.70m above the floor and have a thermostat with control
out or are prone to gradual wear and tear must be avoided as button; the mounting fixture must bear the weight of the
they may give rise to sharp and dangerous edges; hairdryer plus a minimum additional load of 80 kgf. They must
·· An adequate number of benches must be planned on the basis be corrosion-resistant and comply with safety and prevention
of 80cm of bench per changing room unit; standards. They may be placed in the access room provided
·· Lockers (two tier) shall measure approx. 30x50x90cm, and be that all safety and functional requirements are respected.
fixed to each other at the sides at least 25cm from the floor for PLAYERS’ CHANGING ROOM
cleaning purposes. They must be lockable with a key and be
Min: 30-35 m²
made of corrosion-resistant material that can be hosed down Dimensions Ceiling height: 2.70/2.80 m
Door height: 2.30 m
easily for cleaning purposes. The locker components should
No. of athletes 12-20
be assembled in the same manner as the bench components,
Flooring: Synthetic or non-slip tiles
as described above. Lockers may be replaced by coat racks Coverings
Walls: Washable surface
above the benches, with at least 2 per changing room unit; Benches for 12 to 20 people, coat racks and/or lockers, a
massage table, a blackboard with markers and possibly a video
and must be made of metal or the same material as the Equipment player, a refrigerator, an ice box with ice, rubbish bins, 12 to 20
benches. The coat rack components should be assembled towels, soap, bottled water for 12 to 20 people, paper cups, a
mirror, toilet paper.
diagram 2.14 The size of the access room separating the changing rooms,
toilets and showers, shall depend on the functional requirements
related to the use of the toilets and other equipment. The
following building specifications serve as a guideline:
·· Floors, ceilings, doors and windows shall have the same

characteristics as the changing rooms. To ensure easy
Washable surface
cleaning of the areas, the floor must slope towards a siphon
drain or channel to collect the water;
Diagram 2.14
·· The walls shall be totally covered with non-porous, washable
Cupboard
material. The materials used for coverings should have similar
qualities to ceramic tiles, but under no circumstances be of
inferior quality. The access room shall include the following
elements:
-- Washbasins without central pedestal, minimum size
50cmx60cm; they shall be hung on the wall 80 cm from the
floor;
-- 1 wall-mounted drinking fountain without pedestal; diagram 2.15
-- Urinals.
The number of urinals and wash basins shall depend on the size
of the changing rooms and number of toilets.
ACCESS ROOM
Min: 5-8 m²
Dimensions Ceiling height: 2.80/2.70 m
Door height: 2.30 m
Diagram 2.15 Flooring: Easy to clean waterproof non-slip material

Coverings
Walls: Washable surface and/or tiles
Shower Equipment
Equipment Mirrors, hairdryers, coat hooks.
The shower area shall be safe and comfortable; therefore,

the space for each user (“shower unit”) should be at least
90cmx90cm.
In front of each shower there shall be a free space of at least
90cmx90cm, a space which is preferably common to all
showers. Changing rooms with more than 10 units shall have at
least 2 showers, whilst changing rooms with 15 units shall have should be flush with the floor in order not to obstruct differently-
at least 4 showers and those with 20 units at least 5 showers. abled persons/wheelchair users (except in the case of floor
In short, there should be at least 1 shower for every 4 units. gradients necessary for the collection of the water).
Every changing room must have shower facilities suitable for A shower for differently-abled persons/wheelchair users shall
differently-abled persons and wheelchairs. be situated in one of the corners of the room and shall include:
According to the type of structure the following standards shall -- A folding shower seat measuring 0.50x1.00m;
apply: -- A fixed showerhead installed 1.50m from the floor, operated
·· The shower floors shall be non-slip and slope towards a water- by a tap mounted 0.85-1.10m above the floor;
collecting channel or gutter fitted with a removable grate (the -- A handset showerhead hung 0.90m above the floor, with a
use of shower trays is recommended); separate tap fixed to the shorter side of the seat;
All other specifications regarding walls, ceilings, doors and -- A handrail made of steel or other corrosion-resistant material,
windows, are the same as those applicable to the access room. installed around the entire shower area, 0.80m from the floor
Each shower shall include the following (Diagram 2.15): and cm from the wall;
-- A showerhead installed 2.40 m from the floor which can be easily
-- A vertical grab-rail, made of steel or other corrosion-resistant
dismounted and opened to clean and remove limescale;
material, placed at a distance of 0.70m from the wall parallel
-- A tap to regulate water flow (both water pressure and flow to the short side of the seat, extending to a height ranging
duration) installed at least 1.40 m from the floor; between 0.50m and 1.30m from the floor. The handrails, single
-- A grid made of plastic or other material, with the exception mixer tap and adjustable handset shower shall be installed on
of wood, which can be easily removed for cleaning. The grid the side wall next to the seat within easy reach.
42
SHOWERS walls and ceilings see the access room section.

Dimensions Min: 6-10 m² -New facilities may wish to provide a hydrotherapy area measuring
- Showers Qty: 4/5 at least 7-10m² .
Size 0.90 x 0.90 m Changing rooms for referees and staff (Diagram 2.16)
- Showerhead Height 2.40 m
Changing rooms for referees and staff shall be planned
- Shower tap Height 1.30 m
according to the size and use of the sports facility, that is to
Flooring: Waterproof non-slip material that allows the water to
say: two units for the referees and one or two units for staff,
Coverings drain easily
Walls: Washable surface and tiles with the same internal dimensions, finishes and equipment as
Equipment Coat hooks, soap, (towels).
the players’ changing rooms.
Differences in size and layout shall be based on the various
Changing rooms of up to 10 units shall have a toilet area large requirements. The changing rooms should contain 4-6 changing
enough to cater for wheelchair users/differently-abled persons. room units and also be suitable for use by players if necessary.
Changing rooms of up to 15 units shall have 2 toilets including Therefore, there should be one shower for every 3-4 users and
one toilet for differently-abled persons and changing rooms of one toilet for every 4-6 users. Disabled showers and toilets are
more than 15 units shall have at least 3 toilets including one normally not provided in this area, however if staff includes
for differently-abled persons. The size of the toilets must be differently-abled persons, such facilities may be included.
tailored to meet user requirements and should not, under any There must be at least one changing room for officials.
circumstance, be smaller than 1.00x1.20m. The toilets may be
CHANGING ROOMS FOR REFEREES AND STAFF
alaturka (squat) toilets or alafranga (flush) toilets with a push-
button or metal chain flushing system. Min: 9 m²
Dimensions Ceiling height: 2.70/2.80 m
Door height: 2.30 m
Toilets for differently-abled persons shall measure at least
1.50x1.50m, and have a door with a clearance of at least 0.85m, No. of referees 4
(preferably 0.90m). They shall be equipped with a ventilation Floor: Tiles or synthetic
Coverings
system, handrail and a toilet suitable for use by wheelchair users Benches, coat racks and/or lockers, table, four chairs and a
and the differently-abled persons. Equipment blackboard with markers, refrigerator, rubbish bin, towels, bottled
water, paper cups, mirror.
In order to be able to clean the area with running water, the
floor shall slope towards a trapped outlet, siphon drain or grid ACCESS ROOM
to collect the water or directly towards the squat toilet if installed Min: 4 m²
flush with the floor. Dimensions Ceiling height: 2.70m/2.80 m
Door height: 2.30 m
The doors must be raised 10 cm from the floor. Furthermore, the
toilet area shall be fitted with toilet roll holders fixed to the walls, Coverings drain easily during cleaning
toilet brush holders also fixed to the wall and clothes hooks on Walls: Washable surface and tiles
the inside of each door. For safety reasons, the door shall open Equipment Mirrors, hairdryers, and coat hooks.
outwards and must have a lock which can be locked from the
inside using a lever and from the outside using a special square
or hexagonal tubular key. For other specifications concerning
Grates
1.80m
Shower
Diagram 2.16
5.00m
Officials Changing Room
1.50m
Bench
Toilets H
Cupboard
1.50m
0.80
2.30 Legend
H=
1.50m 1.50m 2.50m

diagram 2.16
TOILETS CHANGING ROOMS FOR OFFICIALS

Dimensions Min: 1.00 x 1.20m -1.50 x 1.50 m (disabled) Min: 9 m²
- Toilets Qty: 2 - Height: 0.52 m Dimensions Ceiling height: 2.70/2.80 m
Door height: 2.30 m
- Urinals Qty: 2 - Height: 0.67 m
N° officials 4
- Wash basins Qty: 2 - Height: 0.80 m
Flooring: Waterproof non-slip material that allows the water to Floor: Tiles or synthetic material
Coverings
Coverings drain easily Walls: Washable surface
Walls: Washable surface and tiles
Benches, coat hooks and/or lockers, table, four chairsand
Equipment Mirrors, toilet paper. Equipment blackboard with markers, refrigerator, rubbish bin, towels, bottled
water, paper cups, mirror.
SHOWERS ACCESS ROOM

Dimensions Min: 4 m² Min: 4 m²
- Showers Qty: 2 - 0.90 x 0.90 m
Size Ceiling height: 2.70/2.80 m
- Showerheads Height 2.40 m
- Tap Height 1.30 m Door height: 2.30 m
Flooring: Waterproof non-slip material that allows the water
Coverings drain easily during cleaning
Coverings to drain easily during cleaning Walls: Washable surface
and tiles Walls: Washable surface and tiles
Equipment Coat hooks, soap, (towels). Equipment Mirrors, hairdryers, and coat hooks.
44
TOILETS Facilities designed to host international events: the changing

room area shall include a suitable room for commissioners and/
Size Min: 1.00 x 1.20 m -1.50 x 1.50 m (disabled)
- Toilet Qty: 2 -height: 0.52 m or FIBA representatives (min. 5 people) and shall be equipped
- Urinals Qty: 2 -height 0.67 m
with:
- Wash basins Qty: 2 -height 0.80 m
one table, four chairs, coat hooks, and a locker (an additional
Flooring: Waterproof non-slip material that allows the water to table close to a power socket is recommended for a
Coverings drain easily during cleaning
Walls: Washable surface and tiles computer).
The minimum surface area of the room shall be 12-15m² ; the
Equipment Mirrors, toilet paper. room shall be well aired and well lit with natural and/or artificial
light.
diagram 2.17 c) Doping Control Station (Diagram 2.18 -2.18a)
The Doping Control Station (DCS) must be located inside the
competition venue, close to the playing hall, athletes’ changing
rooms and the athletes’ medical care room. To ensure athlete
Commissioners privacy, the Doping Control Station must be inaccessible to the
Room public, located away from the media and spectator areas and
guarded by a security officer who may only grant access to
3.00m
authorised persons. Doping control signs must be hung on the

door of the Doping Control Station as well as in the corridors to
indicate the way to the doping control area. The signs should be
in English and French (“Doping Control/Contrôle de dopage”) Diagram 2.17
Sanitary and sterile conditions must prevail at all times, therefore Commissioners &
FIBA Representatives Room
4.00m the Doping Control Station must have easily cleanable walls
and floors made of hygienic materials, and the room must not
SHOWERS be used for any other purpose (storage, office, medical room,
toilets, etc.). It should be well-lit and air-conditioned.
Size Min: 4 m²
A secure route must be ensured from the Doping Control Station
- Showers Qty: 2 - 0.90 x 0.90 m
to the parking spaces to ensure safe transport of the samples.
- Shower head Height 2.40 m
The doping control area must contain the following areas:
- Shower tap Height 1.30 m
WAITING AREA
Coverings drain easily during cleaning Min: 15-24 m²
Walls: Washable surface and tiles Dimensions Ceiling height: 2.70-2.80 m
Door height: 2.30 m
Equipment Coat hooks, soap, (towels). Floor: Tiles or synthetic material
Coverings
b) Rooms for Commissioners and/or FIBA representatives
At least 10 comfortable seats, tables, a fridge with drinks and
(Diagram 2.17) Equipment
refreshments, satellite TV and sufficient reading material.
Reception desk
Refrigerator Refrigerator Table with
Mirror Cupboard Armchair reading materials
Rubbish bin TV
2.00m 4.00m 4.00m
2.50m
Toilet
Sample - Taking Area

Diagram 2.18
Antidoping Control Station
1.50m
Toilet Reception &
Sample - Taking Area Waiting Room
Shower
2.00m
2.00m 4.00m Entrance 4.00m
diagram 2.18
diagram 2.18a
Diagram 2.18a
Antidoping Control Station - 3D
46
SAMPLE-TAKING AREA blood samples;

Qty: Preferably two -- Armbands for Doping Control Officers;
Min: 19 m²
Dimensions
Ceiling height: 2.70-2.80 m -- Cool packs;
Door height: 2.30 m
-- Lots and bags for the selection of the players to be tested;
Floor: Tiles or synthetic material
Coverings -- Secure transport bag for doping control samples;
One desk, 5 chairs, a table for the samples, one cupboard, a -- Security seals for the secure transport bag;
small refrigerator for the samples, a large rubbish bin and an
Equipment
armchair. -- Disposable cover roll, 50cm width, for the examining table;
A reclining armchair, if blood samples are to be taken.
-- Sterile disinfectant wipes or swabs;
TOILETS
-- Latex surgical gloves;
Qty. 2 -- (*) Pasteur pipettes (for blood sampling only);
Dimensions
Min: 1.00 x 1.50 m (preferably 1.50 x 1.5 0m)
-- (*) Water for injection;
Floor: Tiles or synthetic material -- Individually sealed caffeine-free and non-alcoholic beverages.
Coverings
Walls: easy to clean tiles or washable surface (*) These items only concern the collection of blood samples if FIBA decides so.
Front-facing mirror or mirror with a ¾ reflection positioned at

Equipment d) First-aid area for athletes and spectators (Diagram 2.19)
toilet-seat level, wash basin, toilet paper and soap.
For functional and safety reasons, facilities must include two
BATHROOM medical stations for first-aid purposes, one for athletes and one
for the public.
Qty: 1, if possible accessible only from sample-taking area
Size
Min: 4 m² These areas should be used to administer first-aid as well as
offer normal preventive medical consultations; they must be
Coverings drain easily during cleaning within easy reach of all the other areas of the facility.
Walls: Washable surface and tiles The first-aid area should meet the standard requirements
Shower, toilet, wash basin, soap, front-facing mirror or mirror regarding size, access and internal partitioning, and must be
Equipment
with a ¾ reflection positioned at toilet
adequately equipped, with the necessary sanitary devices and
Mandatory list of equipment/ consumables useful for a doping a stretcher.
control procedure A first-aid area must have a waiting room or access room
-- Portable refractometer; adjoining the medical examination room, with toilets and a
wash basin outside (and possibly a shower).
-- pH meter or pH sticks;
Furniture and equipment must mainly include:
-- Full doping control kit of urine sampling;
-- A bed for medical examinations, approx.2.40m in length and
-- Doping control set for partial urine samples;
0.60m wide with a maximum weight bearing load of 150 Kg,
-- Urine collection vessels 175ml; with a swivel stool and flexible-arm lamp;
-- (*) Doping-control blood-kit for blood collection (tourniquet, -- A folding stretcher;
venipuncture tubes etc);
-- A desk, minimum size 0.90x1.60m, with three chairs;
-- Centrifuge, centrifuge tubes and phials for doping control
-- A wardrobe with mirror, measuring at least 0.60x1.60m;
Cupboard
0.90
2.30
2.50m
Waiting area
Diagram 2.19
Refrigerator
0.90
2.30
First Aid
Toilets
1.50m
Small bed
2.40x0.60m
1.80m 4.00m 4.00m
diagram 2.19
-- A coat rack with at least three hooks; as the first-aid room for athletes but should be located in a
-- An oxygen cylinder with equipment for resuscitation bag; different part of the facility to provide direct and easy access
from the tribunes. It should be close to an emergency exit to
-- A defibrillator for first-aid treatment of cardiac arrest;
be accessible to ambulances outside the hall. The emergency
-- A cabinet to store medicines and medical equipment;
access route and exit must be appropriately marked with special
-- A fridge. signs and always be free of obstacles.
Note: The detailed needed medical furniture, equipment and medications are available on the
FIBA website www.fiba.com under Experts/Medical Corner/Anti-Doping/Facilities.
ENTRANCE AREA TO FIRST AID ROOM
The first-aid room for players must be suitable for administering
Min. 10-15 m²
first-aid in the event of accidents or sudden illness. It must be
Dimensions Ceiling height: 2.70-2.80 m
situated on the ground floor, as close to the playing court as Door height: 2.30 m
possible, and with a direct and clear passage to the outside for
Floor: Tiles or synthetic material
easy access by the emergency service vehicles (ambulance). Coverings
Walls: tiles or washable surface
The emergency access route and exit should be appropriately
Equipment Chair, benches and coat racks.
marked with special signs and must always be free of
obstacles.
The public first-aid room must be suitable for administering first-
aid to spectators. It must have the same functional elements
48
MEDICAL EXAMINATION ROOM be paid to the storage room for these panels. The entrance to
the storage room must be wide enough (min 2.40m) and high
Min. 15 m²
Dimensions Ceiling height: 2.70-2.80 m enough (min 3.50m) to accommodate vehicles transporting the
Door height: 2.30 m wooden floor panels and equipment. Obviously, the doors also
Floor: Tiles or synthetic material have to be of an appropriate size, depending on the equipment
Coverings
Walls: tiles or washable surface and furniture to be stored in the rooms. The room must have
Equipment
A desk, 2 chairs, an examination bed 2.20m long, a first-aid the correct temperature and humidity levels to prevent warping
cabinet, fridge and locker.
of the wood and damage to other materials in general. The
TOILETS storage room can be divided into separate areas according
Dimensions Min: 1.50 x 1.50 m to constructional and functional requirements, with each area
-Toilet Qty: 1 meeting respective specifications.
-Wash basins Qty: 1 The corridors leading to the storage rooms must be of an
Flooring: Waterproof non-slip material that allows the water to appropriate width and height.
drain easily during cleaning
Coverings f) Administrative Offices (Diagram 2.21)
Walls: Washable surface and tiles
There shall be office rooms for the staff overseeing the
management and technical running of the facility.
diagram 2.20 The rooms shall vary in size according to management
requirements, but must be at least 20/25m² and, if possible have
8.00m
adjacent men’s and women’s toilets which are also suitable for
Storage Room differently-abled persons. Large facilities should have more
(minimum 40m2) Diagram 2.20
Number of storage rooms to be decided than one office, namely one for management staff and one or
on the base of facilities dimensions and sports activities Storage Room
more for the secretariat, plus a meeting room and a hospitality
5.00m
room.
2.40 2.40
(minimum) (minimum)
3.00 3.00
Public Area
The doors should open This is the area reserved for visitors and spectators to sports
with a sliding system or
have the possibility to be opened wide events or competitions. This area encompasses many
interconnected functions such as entering the hall, buying
a ticket, going to one’s seat in the tribune, and watching the
e) Storage rooms (Diagram 2.20)
event.
Storage rooms shall be large enough to hold all the equipment
The number of paying spectators, which is the key factor in
necessary for the various sports. This area shall enable easy
management terms, can be influenced by what the area has to
access to all equipment from outside the hall and must not
offer and by the composition of the spaces available.
hinder the transfer of equipment within the building. Storage
This area includes all the spaces and routes necessary to involve
and transfer of equipment shall be planned according to the
spectators in the sports activities or other support activities that
maintenance requirements, size and weight of the equipment
may be foreseen. The area’s dimensions may vary according
itself. For example, if the floor of the basketball court is made
to the facility’s structure, if the complex already exists, or to the
of removable wooden panels then particular attention must
0.90
Administration
2.90m
2.30
Office
Diagram 2.21
5.00m
Administrative Official
2.30
0.90
Toilets
2.00m
5.00m 1.80m
diagram 2.21
diagram 2.22
Box Office
Diagram 2.22
Box Office
1.20m
Separators
1.20m 1.20m 1.20m 1.20m
50
activities foreseen in the planning phase or to the dimensions Depending on the type of facility and flow of public, entrances
necessary for the optimal management of activities. may be located in different areas to channel the spectators into
As a rule, the public area shall include: the relative sectors.
·· An entrance hall; The different sectors may be subdivided according to their
·· Ticket offices which may be located in the entrance hall or function or purpose.
elsewhere; Standard safety requirements shall also apply to the entrance
·· Tribunes; area, so that entrances can be used by the public as an
·· Toilets; emergency exit in the event of a fire or other hazardous incident.
Doors shall therefore open outwards and automatically remain
·· Ancillary services.
open until manually closed. The doors shall be resistant,
Entrance hall
preferably made entirely or partially of safety glass and marked
The entrance hall shall be clear and spacious to allow the public
with clearly visible signs.
to enter and exit freely and safely; it shall have information
The dimensions of the entrances and exits shall be decided in
desks, screens with details on the sports services and the
the planning phase, according to the size of the sports facility,
game in progress, supervisory staff, public telephones and a
and taking into account regulations pertaining to the elimination
ticket office. This area must be free from architectural barriers
of architectural barriers.
to also enable differently-abled persons easy access into the
heart of the building.
Diagram 2.23a Diagram 2.23b
b
h = 800 mm
d > 100 mm
100
c
h d
limit line of visibility 40 Diagram 2.23a - b
24
a Prefabricated and
limit of hall 24
186 24 telescopic tribunes
24
24
26
x 50 80 80 80 80 80 80
a*b
x= 530
c-d SECTION
diagram 2.23c office. The queue control barrier separating the path to the
ticket office and the exit path shall be placed 1.20m from the
edge of the ticket-office area. The barriers shall be at least 4m
long and 0.90m high and fixed to the floor.
Tribunes
The area for the tribunes must ensure easy access for the public,
circulation of spectators in the different sectors, visibility of the
entire court, access to toilets and an unhindered exit route from
the central hall. The size of this area may vary according to
Diagram 2.23c
the estimated number of spectators and on the basis of the
Prefabricated and
telescopic tribunes following criteria:
-- The maximum capacity of the tribunes shall be calculated on
the basis of the total length of the rows in metres divided by
186 0.48m (minimum space occupied by a spectator);
-- The steps leading to the various sectors shall be at least 1.20m
Diagram 2.23c
wide and must serve no more than 20 seats on each side and
50 row;
SECTION 130
-- The step of each seat row shall have tread of at least 0.60m
and a riser of between 0.40m and 0.50m depending on the
Ticket office (Diagram 2.22) curve of visibility, the shape and layout of the facility.
The ticket office, which may be inside the complex or outside, Tribunes must be easily accessible and comply with the same
must be positioned so as not to obstruct the normal flow of standards for access routes, corridors and doors pertaining to
people. If the ticket office is built outside the complex, it must the entrance to the halls. More specifically, the paths diverting
comply with the safety standards applicable to the construction spectators to the various sectors shall be straight; the steps
of public buildings. leading down to the rows in each sector shall be rectangular,
In compliance with current regulations, outdoor facilities must with a riser of no more than 0.25m and a tread of at least 0.23m;
have a ticket office located in an area separate from the main the tread/riser ratio must be at least 1.3. A change in gradient
building and at least 10 m from the entrance. The standard between two consecutive tribune sectors is permitted as long
requirement is one ticket office for every 2,000 spectators; ticket as there is a gangway between the two tiers; the gangway shall
offices shall be located in the service area within the facility’s be the same width as the steps, at least 1.20m deep, and shall
perimeter. If there are no service areas or if such areas are comply with the size restrictions for steps and the tread/riser
restricted by temporary structures then the ticket offices shall ratio.
be located inside the building. For safety and security reasons, Prefabricated and telescopic tribunes (Diagram.23a-b-c)
the ticket office windows shall be fitted with barriers made To ensure optimum use of the tribunes, these should be situated
of resistant material or grilles placed 4 cm from the counter. close to the basketball court and be prefabricated or, even
Queue control systems shall be installed in front of each ticket better, telescopic.
52
Both types of tribunes allow quick assembly and disassembly, one wash basin in the entrance room.
however the telescopic type offers more advantages as it can The number of toilets/bathrooms and their location may vary
be rolled manually (on wheels) or electronically (using a remote according to the size of the facility and consequently the number
control). of visitors expected.
The use of telescopic stands allows the playing area to also The size of both the men’s and women’s bathrooms must
be used for sports requiring more space or for entertainment comply with the following parameters:
events which require a particular emphasis on safety. Moreover, -- Two urinals and one toilet for every 500 men and two toilets every
with a larger playing area, mobile partitioning walls can be used 500 women, upholding a 1-to-1 ratio of men to women ratio;
to divide the area into two or more basketball courts for training
-- A minimum of 2 toilets (1 for men and 1 for women) for
purposes.
differently-abled persons;
Public bathrooms (Diagram 2.24) -- One wash basin in the entrance room for every toilet and
The public area shall have at least two bathrooms, each with urinal;
one set of toilet stalls for men, one set of toilet stalls for women,
The following must also be taken into account:
and at least one toilet for the differently-abled persons. The
-- The layout of the bathrooms must guarantee privacy even
bathrooms should be located no more than 50m from the exits
when the entrance doors are open;
of the spectators’ area, and each bathroom should provide
toilets, as well as urinals in the men’s bathroom, and at least -- Access to the bathrooms must be generous enough to cater
diagram 2.24
1.20m 1.50m 2.30m 2.30m 2.80m

1.00m
0.80
2.30
Toilets
1.00m
0.80 0.80
2.30 2.30
Toilets Toilets Diagram 2.24
Toilets Public bathrooms

0.80
1.00m
0.80
2.30 2.30
Toilets
Toilets H Men’s Toilets H Legend
1.50m
0.90 Toilets 0.90

2.30 H=
2.30
0.90
2.30
0.90
2.30
for people entering and exiting at the same time; players and other people involved in the sporting event;
-- The bathrooms should have natural ventilation, however -- A storage area for equipment and materials;
where this is not possible, they must be fitted with an artificial -- Ducts and raceways for cables and metal wires for connecting
ventilation system. mobile television stations.
Mass Media Area An area outside the complex shall be reserved for at least
It is essential to carry out a study on how radio and three television trucks and five cars; this area shall be easily
television commentators, photographers and all other media accessible and well connected to the building.
representatives move and work within the area in order to be Journalists
able to offer them the best working conditions and materials. An area shall be reserved in the hall for journalists, in the lower
Before considering individual requirements, it is important to central part of the tribunes, along the endlines, behind the team
look at the collective areas: benches and the scorer’s table.
-- An area reserved for the above mentioned media representatives This area shall be equipped with at least 50 working positions,
with a smaller adjacent area for those with accreditation; each with a chair, small table, electrical multi socket and at least
-- A refreshment area for those who must often continue to work 1 telephone/ADSL line. If the area does not have the necessary
after the competition has finished. computer and Internet connections, the workstations shall be
Numerous prime positions shall be allocated for permanent equipped with traditional fax machines. This area shall be
television cameras in order to ensure high quality images of easily accessible and separated from the rest of the tribunes
the event. The number of cameras and the exact position shall by security barriers.
be determined by the event’s host broadcaster depending on The following areas shall be provided within the facility to allow
the type of building and the importance attached to the event, journalists to work efficiently:
however cameras are usually placed high up in the hall, along ·· A press room adjacent to the tribune with at least 40
the endlines behind the team benches and the officials’ table, workstations, including, desks, chairs, electrical multi sockets
possibly in a central position to the right of the baskets and and at least one telephone/ADSL line or fax per working
pointing towards the centre of the court. position;
A minimum of four places shall be available for radio and ·· A press conference room for at least 50 people for interviews
television; they shall be placed in the upper part of the hall, with those involved in the event; the room shall be equipped
along the endlines behind the team benches and the officials’ with a good sound diffusion system and adequate auxiliary
table, possibly in a central position. Commentators notably lighting to ensure television images suitable for broadcasting.
prefer to work from commentary booths or cabins located in an Parking spaces for at least 50 cars shall be reserved in an easily
area which provides the best view, without any visual obstacles, accessible area well connected to the building.
separated from other accredited media and protected from the Photographers
public. An area in the hall shall be reserved for up to 50 photographers;
To enable the media representatives to work quickly and photographer positions shall be at court-level, along the
efficiently, the basketball hall shall include the following endlines, in the area between the advertising boards (2m
spaces: from the endlines) and the spectator barriers (5 m from the
-- A room to be used as a television studio in which to interview endlines).
54
A number of working positions shall be provided to enable the ·· A reception area at the entrance for accreditation inspection
photographers to work efficiently and transmit images. These and information;
working positions shall be located in the press tribune or in a ·· A minimum of two hospitality areas (to hold at least 150
press room equipped appropriately according to the number of people);
accredited photographers. ·· A minimum of two small private rooms;
Parking spaces for at least 20 cars shall be reserved in an easily ·· A refreshment area with service also available in the lounge
accessible area well connected to the building. areas; (the refreshment area should not be located in close
Telematics Office proximity to normal telephone connections;) lounge areas
The transmission of data, results and images to mass media shall be fitted with wall-mounted screens and monitors;
operators is achieved through telematics using internet and ·· An adequate number of toilets;
intranet networks. This technological resource can only be ·· A cloakroom.
implemented if telematic infrastructures are available in the
These areas shall all be connected by a common private area
region; furthermore, an internal architecture must be planned
located in front of the VIP tribunes. This shall be examined in
defining the function and purpose of the facility and necessary
detail in the chapter on event organisation.
equipment.
Reserved parking areas shall be provided according to the
Therefore, when planning a new sports facility or the restoration
importance of the event; these areas shall be easily accessible
of existing facilities, a space or room must be envisaged for
and well connected to the building.
a telematic transmission office with the task of coordinating,
controlling, managing and maintaining the internal telematics Ancillary Services
network including the control system units for the entire In addition to the support services areas listed above, a sports
complex. facility may also accommodate other spaces to cater for
The planning project shall provide for cabling and equipment; activities which are not essential to the actual running of the
in this way, cable raceways, transmission bridges, aerials, and facility but which increase the quality of the services offered.
other equipment may be planned in advance, with particular Activities related to wellness, relaxation, exhibitions, cultural
emphasis on safety, considering the intended use. and commercial events all require bars, refreshment points,
The equipment and size of such resources shall be related to the catering rooms, meeting rooms and offices, exhibition areas,
type of facility and importance of an event. Telematic resources etc.
represent an added value in which organisers of international The decision whether or not to include such areas in the
events must strive to invest. planning of a new facility or restoration of an existing structure
depends entirely on the management’s strategic objectives and
Vip Area
its management objectives.
The facility must accommodate hospitality areas suitable for
The provision of certain ancillary services depends very much
receiving and entertaining VIPs, eminent figures, representatives
on the type of sports facility and its location, as well as the type
of government organisations, and national public authorities.
of sporting event and its importance.
Special VIP areas shall be located in the hall, and directly
connected to the reserved VIP-tribunes. The VIP-areas shall
include:
NEW FIBA COURT MARKINGS 2010
New FIBA Court Markings 2010

see also pag. 252
loor types
and ame Equipment
FG
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 3 › Floor Types and Game Equipment
58
T
he constant evolution of basketball and growing interest The competitions are divided into three levels:
shown by the public have generated an increased ·· High level competitions (Level 1):
exposure of all aspects involved in this sport, which Main FIBA official competitions, as defined in Art. 1.1.1 of the
has consequently led athletes to train and practice with FIBA Internal Regulations governing the FIBA Competitions.
greater regularity, not least because of the growing number of The facilities and equipment required for the following main
demanding competitions. FIBA official competitions are subject to FIBA approval (Levels
The heavy physical stress to which players are subjected is often 1 and 2): Olympic Tournaments; World Championships for Men,
the cause of accidents and injuries. It is therefore important to Women, U-19 and U-17; Zone Championships for Men and
pay particular attention to accident prevention, and a first step in Women.
this direction is to improve the quality of all the equipment used All equipment at these competitions must be FIBA approved and
in basketball facilities, in particular the equipment with which must display the FIBA Study Centre logo in the FIBA approved
athletes are in direct contact, such as floors and baskets. layout.
FIBA, together with its Study Centre, has therefore decided ·· Medium level competitions (Level 2):
to constantly monitor the evolution of the game in terms of
All other FIBA official competitions as defined in Art. 1.1.2
materials and equipment manufactured by specialist companies
and 1.1.3 of the FIBA Internal Regulations governing the FIBA
with the aim of protecting player safety by contributing to the
Competitions, and high level competitions of the national
improvement of the materials.
federations.
In line with these principles, FIBA has studied and approved
·· Other competitions (Level 3):
special regulations that establish the dimensions and
All other competitions not included in the above.
characteristics of equipment and court surfaces suitable for
official events, both men’s and women’s. Playing Floor
The provisions contained in the Official Basketball Rules must The playing floor is one of the most important components
be followed in their entirety by all parties directly involved in of a sports facility, not only because it provides the stage for
the game, including basketball equipment manufacturers, local entertainment, but also because of the role it plays in the cause
organisers and FIBA, in order to implement the equipment and/or prevention of injuries to players and the effect it has on
approval programme and establish national and international their performance. Incorrect or defective flooring is often the
standards. main cause of injuries to players’ ankles, knees, etc.; For this
Below are some excerpts from the Official Basketball Rules reason, the International Sports Federations, and in particular
listing all the equipment necessary to play basketball, together FIBA, have shown a great interest in studies on bio-mechanics
with FIBA’s requirements for the different levels of competition, and the safety of athletes, contributing to the compilation of a
as stipulated in the Regulations: set of regulations which is recognised by most countries.
The choice of flooring is based on three main aspects:
·· Financial
·· Technical
·· Sporting functionality
59 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 3 › Floor Types and Game Equipment
Diagram 3.1
Characteristics of
sports floors
Under elastic structure
deformation
diagram 3.1
1. Financial aspect possibility of installing removable flooring or supplying special

From a financial point of view, it is important to remember that matting to cover the floor.
a sports floor has a significant impact on the overall cost of d) Usage time: extent of floor use, as intended by the
a sports facility. In terms of costs, thought must be given to management, bearing in mind that a multifunctional floor
the following factors which may influence the ultimate choice in means that the structure can be used all the time. This factor is
flooring: influenced by the average lifespan of the entire flooring system
a) Complete cost of flooring and sub-floor: it may vary which itself depends on the type and wear of the selected
depending on the prevailing conditions; material.
b) Cost of playing surface: this may vary a great deal depending 2. Technical aspect
on the quality of the material as the overall cost includes the Detailed technical specifications of the material and installation
cost of the surface layer and any sub-structure or additional conditions can be determined in the planning phase, based on
work required, such as supports and anchorage for equipment, the primary use and multifunctional nature of the floor.
scoreboards etc.; To make sure that the project requirements are met, it is important
c) Maintenance cost: to be foreseen and evaluated for all in the execution phase to contact companies with experience in
types of floors. Additional maintenance costs must also be this sector.
anticipated for extra floor protection if the facility is also used for 3. Sporting functionality aspect
public events. In this case, the management should consider the To safeguard the sporting functionality and guarantee that sports
60
programmes can be carried out, the flooring must be certified and area elasticity.
as suitable for use in the foreseen competitions. Point-elasticity is the elasticity of the materials comprising the
The characteristics of sports floors overlay flooring. These materials are usually synthetic, soft and
The characteristics of sports flooring vary very much according flexible surfaces which provide cushioning and shock absorption,
to the type of sport practised; the quality of the flooring generally and almost no impact energy return. The point-elasticity value
depends on the purpose for which the hall is to be used. must be the same over the entire floor, thus, where synthetic
The parameters applicable to all types of flooring in order to surfaces are concerned, the materials must have a consistent
comply with the principles above are as follows: thickness and create a homogenous layer. (Diagram 3.1).
·· Elasticity Area-elasticity is the elasticity of the possible foundation
Elasticity is a fundamental property by means of which floors (sub-floor), generally made up of a network of wooden joists,
can elastically deaden the impact force of the body during rendering a stiff yet flexible layer which provides energy return
jumping and running, thereby providing a feeling of comfort to but little cushioning. Excessive deflection is to be avoided and
players. Optimum values of elasticity provide for rapid action and elasticity must be constant over the entire surface (for example,
reduced muscular stress, whereas excessive elasticity values elasticity must have the same value on the joists and in the area
lead to a slowing down of action. Floors that are too hard floors between the joists) (Diagram 3.2).
cause muscles to tire quickly, thus increasing the risk of injury ·· Uniformity
to ligaments. There are two types of elasticity: point elasticity The surface of the playing area must be perfectly level, as
unevenness may cause irregular bouncing of the ball and disturb
diagram 3.2
Diagram 3.2
Characteristics of
sports floors -
Under elastic
structure
deformation
the practising of fast sports. In fact, if the foot senses superficial

waviness, it may move less securely, impeding performance.
·· Shock absorption properties
Shock absorption is the non-elastic absorbency of the impact
forces of the body, due to the inner viscosity of materials. It
Diagram 3.3
measures the impact force absorbed by the floor as opposed to
Characteristics of returning the energy force to the athlete. The more impact energy
sports floors -
Superficial Friction the floor absorbs, the less impact the athlete must absorb, thus
providing greater comfort for the feet. This parameter therefore
ensures the greatest comfort to the foot. Excessive shock
absorption levels may render sporting action more difficult. diagram 3.3
·· Deformation diagram 3.4
The buckling capacity depends on the elasticity, viscosity and
thickness of the elastic layer and defines the overall deformation
of the floor under a dynamic load. An excessive value reduces
safety when putting down the foot, increasing the risk of
sprains.
·· Superficial friction
Diagram 3.4
Characteristics of Superficial friction is extremely important and has optimum
sports floors -
Superficial Friction
values which vary according to the different sports. In running,
for example, maximum adherence between the foot and the
floor is needed, whereas tennis requires a controlled slide. In
any case, however, the foot must be able to rotate easily on
the point of support without blocking or risk of spraining. To
improve superficial friction, synthetic materials are embossed diagram 3.5
on the surface (Diagrams 3.3-3.4).

·· Ball bounce
The rebound of the ball is a very important factor in ball sports.
The bounce must be uniform and regular over the entire surface.
What is more, the flooring should not absorb the bounce to such
Diagram 3.5
Characteristics
an extent that it is impossible to play regular competitions on that
of sports floors - surface. The International Basketball Federation’s regulations
Test of bounce of the ball
stipulate that the rebound height of a ball dropped onto the
playing surface from a height of 1.80m must be at least 90% of
the rebound height when dropped on a cement surface (1.20-
1.40m) (Diagram 3.5).
62
·· Colour The playing floor shall:

The colour of the playing area must be dull, but not dark (with a ·· Be a minimum length of 32m (28m+4m perimeter) and a
factor of light reflection ranging between 0.25 and 0.50) so that minimum width of 19m (15m+4m perimeter);
the marks on the playing court are clearly visible. ·· Have an antiglare surface.
·· Thermal insulation For level 1 and 2, permanent wooden flooring and synthetic
Thermal insulation is important when the playing area is flooring, the following parameters shall be taken into account:
predominantly used for exercises on the floor, because ·· Sport functional requirements:
it increases comfort and contributes to reducing energy -- Force reduction (shock absorption)
consumption (the floor being a major cause of heat loss). -- Vertical deformation
·· Acoustic insulation -- Vertical ball behaviour
Acoustic insulation is a fundamental parameter for sports -- Area deflection
halls. Although acoustic characteristics depend on the whole -- Sliding properties
environment of the hall, the floor itself should not be allowed
The requirements for the above properties must be fulfilled at
to cause excessive vibration as a result of running, jumping
each system testing point.
or bouncing of the ball. Floors built on elastic foundations, in
·· Uniformity requirements:
particular, will require an appropriate solution to ensure the
-- Force Reduction
necessary acoustic insulation (use of deadening material).
-- Vertical deformation
·· Safety
-- Vertical ball behaviour
In addition to the above requirements, floors must also comply
NB: Norms and results to be viewed in the latest edition of the Official Basketball Rules & Basketball
with safety standards, and therefore be fire-resistant (EN 13501) Equipment. To this day, the FIBA Study Centre relies essentially on tests done according to DIN
18032-2 and EN 14904
and not release toxic substances. Wooden surfaces must be
For Level 1 and 2, portable wooden flooring, the following
splinter-free.
parameters shall be taken into account:
An important factor is the overall resistance of the floor which
·· Sport Functional requirements:
defines the fixed and mobile loads that the floor can withstand
-- Force Reduction (shock absorption)
without the danger of being permanently deformed; loads
include sports equipment, other equipment, telescopic tribunes,
cleaning machines and scaffolding. -- Vertical ball behaviour
-- Sliding properties
Floor Requirements for Basketball
The requirements for the above properties must be fulfilled at
Upon publication of this Guide, all floor materials or systems
each system testing point.
intended for installation must comply, according to the level
·· Uniformity requirements:
of competition, with the requirements stipulated in the latest
-- Force Reduction
Official Basketball Rules-Basketball Equipment, namely:
The playing floor surfaces shall be made of:
·· Permanent wooden flooring (levels 1 and 2); -- Vertical ball behaviour
NB: Norms and results to be viewed in the latest edition of the Official Basketball Rules & Basketball
·· Permanent synthetic flooring (levels 2 and 3); Equipment. To this day, the FIBA Study Centre relies essentially on tests done according to DIN
18032-2 and EN 14904
·· Mobile synthetic flooring (levels 2 and 3).
63
64
HARO SPORTS FLOORS

Dominating the Game
Setting New Standards in Sports Flooring

Athletic Performance
Lowest Life Cycle and Annual Costs
Fastest Job Site Installation
Engineered Performance
Environmentally Responsible
Palacio Vistalegre
Madrid, SPAIN
Halkapinar Arena, Izmir, TURKEY (FIBA World Championship 2010)

Palacio Vistalegre (Madrid, Spain)
Base Naval (Cartagena, Colombia)
American Sports Centre
Pavlihao de Gondomar (Gondomar, Portugal)
Anaheim, USA
Club de Regatas (Lima, Peru)
Al Wasl Club (Dubai, U.A.E.)
DJS Mila (Mila, Algeria)
African Union Hall (Tripoli, Lybia - AfroBaskets 2009)
Bonyadshahid Arena (Tabriz, Iran)
Logan Metro Indoor Sports Centre (Queensland, Australia)
National University of Ireland (Galway, Ireland)
Arena Gradski Vrt (Osijek, Croatia)
Hala Wielofunkcyjna (Lodz, Poland - EuroBaskets 2009)
Sportsarena Halkapinar Arena (Izmir, Turkey - World Championship 2010)
Lyubertsy, RUSSIAN FEDERATION Alverberg (Hasselt, Belgium)
Sportsarena (Utena, Lithuania)
Volleyball development centre (Kaliningrad city, Russian Federation)
Messu- ja Urheilukeskus (Tampere, Finland)
University of Southern California (Los Angeles, USA)
PISA Penang (Penang, Malaysia)
A sports floor is an important, long-term investment.

Make an informed decision. Talk to your HARO Sports flooring expert.
Logan Metro Indoor Sports Centre Contact:
Queensland, AUSTRALIA Hamberger Flooring GmbH & Co. KG
- HARO Sports Flooring - Phone +49 8031 700 500
Stefan Kuner Fax +49 8031 700 463
P.O. Box 10 03 53 [email protected]
83003 Rosenheim / Germany www.haro-sports.com
The manufacturer, together with the flooring installation company, be perfectly flat before laying the floor. The foundation ground
shall be obliged to produce documentation for each customer must not be liable to subsidence or ground settling.
comprising at least the following: results of the prototype test, a Sub-floors for indoor flooring do not have the drainage problems
description of the installation procedure, maintenance advice, which outdoor surfaces may have, however, being installed
results of the inspection and approval of existing installation directly on the ground, they may be prone to rising damp. This
carried out by approved inspection officials. problem can be avoided by installing waterproofing barriers and
The height of the ceiling or the lowest obstruction above the ensuring that the sub-floor has an adequate ventilation system.
playing floor shall be at least seven (7) m. The choice of sub-floor depends on the location, financial factors,
The playing floor shall carry mobile or floor-fixed backboard structure of the building and construction regulations in force in
support structures without degrading the characteristics of the the different countries. Some of the most common types of sub-
backboard support structure. floor systems are described below:
Furthermore, floors shall be fire-resistant and subject to a. sub-floor on loose stone foundation;
examination within the framework of the fire protection system b. sub-floor on brick piers and hollow flooring blocks;
applicable for the building and the local area; the floors shall not c. sub-floor on floor;
release toxic substances. d. Loose stone sub-floor (Diagram 3.6).
Since every sports floor coating has a different composition, This type of sub-floor is installed directly on filled and flattened
structure or superficial layer, each floor should undergo individual ground. A bottom-up vertical section will show the parts
testing. described below.
Usually in composed flooring, the elements to be tested are: Creation of a loose stone foundation: this is made up of loose
-- Composition stones of various sizes and a squat shape with non hygroscopic
-- Thickness properties. A well-constructed loose stone foundation should
-- Surface or volume mass include a network of air passages with a 15/20 cm section,
-- Surface structure placed at a centre-to-centre distance of 1.5m, interconnecting,
-- Fabric colour and type. that run along the walls and have sufficient outlets. The loose
stone foundation must be built using stones that decrease
Sub-Floors
in size the closer they are to the surface, ending with a level
Before describing the types of floors required for basketball it is
surface of fine pebble 30-40cm thick. At no point must the
important to bear in mind that generally the playing surface is
surface be more than 2cm higher than the nominal height and,
installed on a sub-floor and there are numerous ways in which
when verifying flatness using a 4m rule, the width of the fissure
this can be done.
must not be more than 3cm.
The sub-floor is fundamental for correct flooring. It must support
The loose stone foundation must be covered with an 8-10cm
and distribute load force on the floor. These loads are not
thick concrete screed made of lean concrete. The surface must
usually very heavy and include the athletes as well as the game
be flat and even and the deviation when tested with a 4m rule
equipment and other equipment. Nevertheless, load capacity
must not be more than 1cm.
must also take into account the weight of small service vehicles
To avoid the problem of rising damp, a waterproof layer must
and the telescopic tribunes for the spectators.
be created using two layers of heat setting bitumen mortar for
The sub-floor must be even, rigid and not deformable. It must
66
Diagram 3.6
Sub-floor on loose
stone
diagram 3.6
diagram 3.7
Diagram 3.7
Sub-floor on brick
piers and hollow
flooring bricks
a minimum thickness of 1.2mm or alternatively using suitable at least 3cm, laid with the rule or using specific levelling material.
waterproof sheets with overlapping and sealed joints. The During the setting process the screed must be well watered/
waterproof layer must continue 10-15cm up the walls and must kept wet and then allowed to dry until the level of humidity is
be correctly overlapped and joined to the wall. less than 25%.
A drainage layer made of sand or plastic sheeting is usually c) Sub-floor on floor (Diagram 3.8)
placed on top. Here, the support structure is a cast and/or prefabricated
The finishing layer is made up of a screed of cement and sand floor laid down to form a network of parallel interconnecting
mortar using a 3:4 ratio of cement type 325 per 3m of thickness air passages at a centre-to-centre distance of maximum 1.50
according to the type of flooring. This is laid on the waterproofing
layer or self-levelling material to prepare the floor base.
The surface of the screed must be laid using a rule. After a
few hours, cement and fine sand mortar must be spread on
the surface using a plastering trowel. The final surface must be
perfectly level and flat. During the setting process the screed
Diagram 3.8
must be well watered/kept wet and then allowed to dry until the
Sub-floor on hollow level of humidity is less than 25%.
block floor
b) Sub-floor on brick piers and hollow flooring bricks
(Diagram 3.7)
The structure is made up of piers built from full bricks and
cement mortar, laid down in parallel lines at a centre-to-centre
distance equal to the maximum size of a hollow brick (1 m). The
height of the walls is of about 40cm. The passages must be
interconnecting and have air exchange outlets. The structure of diagram 3.8
the sub-floor may be as follows:
and with a section of no more than 15x20cm maximum. The
The surface must be covered with 8-10cm thick concrete slabs
application of a layer of waterproof material is recommended to
with metal mesh to stiffen the sub-floor; a finishing layer is
avoid rising damp which may damage the playing floor.
placed on top, made up of a screed of cement and sand mortar
using a 3:4 ratio of cement type 325 per 3m of thickness. The sub-floor structure is very simple, and is completed with a
layer of cement and sand mortar (as described above) on top of
A waterproof layer must be placed on top of the surface,
the finished supporting floor.
comprising two layers of heat-setting bitumen mortar for a
Note: The thicknesses of the layers mentioned correspond to the thicknesses usually used for these
minimum thickness of 1.2mm or, alternatively, suitable waterproof types of sub-floors. The thickness of the final layer of the sub-floors depends on the type of playing
floor (fixed or portable), use of the sports facility and recommended maintenance; on the basis of
covers with overlapping and sealed joints. The waterproof layer these factors, the finishing layer shall be made of civil or industrial material according to project
specifications or local resources for the supply of materials.
must continue 10-15cm up the walls and must be correctly
overlapped and joined to the wall.
The finishing layer is made up of a screed of cement and sand
mortar using a 3:4 ratio of cement type 325 per 3m of thickness of
68
Diagram 3.9a
Wooden flooring -
wooden joists details
diagram 3.9a
Various Types of Floors wooden floors require regular maintenance, they can be easily
The use of permanent or portable floors allows the practice restored by sanding and levelling the surface layer.
of sports other than basketball, such as fencing, gymnastics, The choice of wood type depends in particular on factors such
volleyball and futsal. as durability, temperature and sensitivity to humidity, but it must
The most common types of flooring are the following: also assure adequate insulation.
Wooden flooring The structural elements of wooden sports flooring do vary, yet
Dismountable wooden flooring their different systems of assembly each guarantee the fulfilment
PVC flooring of FIBA’s technical requirements. With regard to fixed wooden
floors, some of the most common structures are described
Rubber flooring
below.
Polyurethane-coated flooring
Wooden floors may be laid on either joists or stringers. Joists
Linoleum flooring
are buried directly in the sub-floor screed, whilst stringers are
Cement flooring
placed on top of the sub-floor screed, with elastic strips or pads
Note: All high-level competitions of FIBA (Level 1 competitions) must be played on a wooden floor.
inserted if necessary.
Wooden flooring Wooden joists are prismatic joists with a trapezoidal section;
Wooden floors continue to be the most common type of flooring, they must be 40-50mm thick with a width from the shortest
particularly those built on an elastic foundation. Although base of at least 30mm, an angle of inclination of at least 15° and
diagram 3.9 The thickness of the screed between the bottom side of the
joists and the waterproofing layer must be at least 30mm.
Particular attention must be paid to the humidity level of the
screed before laying the final surface (boards, strips, planks).
Diagram 3.9
Stringers must be at least 40mm thick with a width one and a
Wooden flooring - half times the thickness; they must be installed parallel to one
on wooden joists
another at a centre-to-centre distance of 25-30cm, with a gap
of at least 5mm between adjoining ends. The top surface of the
stringers must be completely flat with no protrusions. Stringers
must be dry set, with elastic strips inserted if necessary. We
recommend filling the space between the squared timbers with
Wooden joist
acoustic insulation material (Diagram 3.10).
The following can be anchored to a surface prepared with
Slab joists:
·· panel boarding covered with parquet made of nailed planks
a length of at least 300mm.
(Diagram 3.11);
The joists must be installed parallel to one another at a centre-
·· spruce boarding at 45° to the underlayment and covered with
to-centre distance of 25-30cm, with a gap of at least 5mm
parquet made of nailed planks (Diagram 3.12);
between adjoining ends. (Diagrams 3.9-3.9.a)
·· panel boarding covered with parquet made of nailed strips
The top side of the joists must be completely flat with no
(Diagram 3.13).
protrusions. Joists must be installed level and fixed with quick
The following can be anchored to a surface prepared with
setting binders compatible with the screed in which the joists
stringers:
are buried.
diagram 3.10
(Diagram 3.14) ;
·· spruce boarding at 45° to the underlayment and covered with
parquet made of nailed planks (Diagram 3.15);
(Diagram 3.16).
Boarding is the anchorage surface for parquet: it must be
Diagram 3.10
at least 20mm thick and can be made of boarding panels or
Wooden flooring -
on stringers plywood. It must be installed at right angles or, even better, at
45° to the axis of the joists and fixed to the hoists with stainless
steel nails or screws. The distance between the boards must not
be greater than the thickness of the parquet. Panels, plywood
Stringers
or particleboard (chipboard) usually have the following minimum
dimensions:
70
Diagram 3.11
Wooden flooring - on
Block floor wooden joists - nailed
planks on panel
boarding
Panel boarding
Panel boarding
Wooden joist Wooden joist

Diagram 3.12
Block floor Wooden flooring - on
wooden joists - nailed
planks on spruce
boarding at 45°
diagram 3.11 diagram 3.12
Diagram 3.13
wooden joists - glued
strips on panel
boarding
Wooden joist Stringers Diagram 3.14

Nailed planks Wooden flooring - on
Panel boarding stringers - nailed
planks on panel
Panel boarding
Block floor boarding
Diagram 3.15
wooden flooring - on
stringers - nailed Block floor
planks on spruce
boarding at 45°
Block floor
Panel boarding
Stringers Stringers
Diagram 3.16
stringers - glued strips Panel boarding
on panel boarding
-- Width: minimum 200mm, maximum 400mm; Strips also have a shape similar to a parallelepiped, with slightly
-- Length: minimum 1000mm, maximum 1500mm. slanted ends and sides so they can be fitted close together, as
Use metal fasters on the four sides to join the panels. The the elements are installed individually. Strips must be glued to
boarding must have a gap of at least 2mm from walls, pipes or a suitable support. Adhesives must be specific for this use and
other fixed elements. have a low water-content. Strips must be at least 10mm thick,
Parquet is available in various types and forms. Planks and 50mm wide and 30mm long.
strips are usually used for sports floors and the dimensions are The dimensions are only indicative and depend on the type
as follows: of wood used. The wood type must always comply with FIBA
The planks are made of solid wood and shaped like a playing floor requirements.
parallelepiped, with slightly slanted ends and sides so they can Parquet is usually installed in the shiplap manner where the
be fitted close together as the elements are installed individually. single elements are laid lengthwise so that the ends of the joints
The planks have male and female tongue-and-groove profiles are staggered irregularly. When laying the parquet, the humidity
on the four vertical sides. The profiles must be flawless so that of the wood should be between 9% ± 2%. Installation must be
the planks can be perfectly interlocked. Planks must be nailed carried out at an ambient temperature higher than 12°C with
onto a suitable support or fixed with metal clips. Planks used for 60%± 5% humidity. Once the parquet has been laid, it should
sports floors must be at least 17mm thick, 60mm wide and 400 be allowed to rest for 10-15 days before treating the surface.
mm long. It is important to remember that the types of wooden floors
72
described above do not have any particular elasticity properties.

If a wooden floor needs to be highly elastic, it has to be laid on a
substructure made of a double-crossed structure of stringers.
The construction features of substructures for wooden floors
and other floors are described below.
Elastic Substructures for all Types of Floors

Diagram 3.17
All basketball surfaces require a good level of elasticity to enable
Wood or resilient
the ball to bounce. For this reason, it is advisable to install material
an elastic substructure made up of double stringers covered
by boarding on which to install the floor (wood or resilient
materials).
The elasticity obtained in this way is different to the one provided
Block floor
by material compliance as it is an “area elasticity” resulting from
the flexibility of the structure; this type of structure provides Elastic
Panel boarding substructure
comfort to the players and does not affect the rebound of the
ball. However, elasticity must not be excessive as this would
slow down the game and create problems for the players.
The installation of the elastic substructure usually represents a diagram 3.17
significant part of the cost of the flooring (about 30%); furthermore, diagram 3.18
because it is made mainly of wood, it is also rather delicate both

from a mechanical point of view and in terms of resistance to
ambient conditions (humidity, mould, woodworm, etc.).
An elastic substructure cannot withstand heavy loads, such as Diagram 3.18
telescopic tribunes, for a long period of time, as the floor may Elastic subfloor
framing - on stringers
give way or be permanently deformed; for this reason, surfaces with plank flooring
without boarding
with such a substructure cannot be used to host public events
such as concerts, shows, etc.
What is more, any repairs to the substructures would be
complicated and costly.
Simplified substructures are often proposed to reduce costs;
however, they do not provide a uniform elastic response over
the entire surface. (Diagram 3.17)
Elastic Block floor
The elastic substructure is generally built using a double frame substructure
of stringers (spruce or similar). The substructure is then covered
with boarding onto which the chosen floor (wood or resilient
material) is laid.
In the case of a wooden floor, the boarding is not necessary as

diagram 3.19
the parquet can be directly laid on the secondary stringer frame
to avoid a non uniform elasticity (in particular where the two
stringer frames intersect). (Diagram 3.18)
Three solutions to completing the most common and correct
substructures are described here below, from the simplest to
the most complex:
- First solution: the primary frame stringers are laid on a perfectly
even screed at a centre-to-centre distance of 50-60cm; they are
nailed onto supports placed at 50-60cm intervals. A secondary
frame is placed orthogonally on top of the first one at a centre-to-
centre distance of 25-30cm. The supports of the second frame
must be staggered in relation to the first ones. Chipboard or
laminboard panels are then laid on top using galvanised screws
or nails. The panels can be interlocked, if possible leaving a 2mm
slit along the joint. Stringers of the same structures are joined
Diagram 3.19
together end to end leaving a 5mm slit. This solution lends itself
to glued floors (wood or synthetic). (Diagram 3.19)
- The second solution is the same as the first, as regards the
primary and secondary frames, however the difference is that
boards are laid on top instead of panels. The boards are about
8cm wide and placed at a centre-to-centre distance of 15cm.
Planks can then be nailed onto the boarding. The same technical
recommendations adopted in the first solution are applicable
here. (Diagram 3.20)
- Third solution: here, a double primary frame is nailed onto
the supports placed at a centre-to-centre distance of 50-60cm;
the frame is made of nailed spacers placed at the same centre-
to centre distance as the supports, but staggered. The frame
elements are joined in the same ways as in the first solution;
they must be in line with the supports but staggered. Boarding
is placed on top, as in the second solution, and then parquet
planks can be installed on the boarding. (Diagram 3.21)
The structural components must be all fixed together securely
using galvanised nails so that any vibrations do not subvert the
structure.
74
The centre-to centre-distances and the sections of the structural

diagram 3.20
components must be attested according to the mechanical
stress anticipated (telescopic tribunes etc.) and the elasticity
required.
Full strips must be installed along door thresholds. Special
reinforcements must be foreseen to secure equipment. Supports
and anchorage elements must be foreseen for mobile equipment
and must be inserted in the screed and not connected in any
way to the substructure so they do not alter the elasticity.
Special flush covers, comprising the same material as the floor,
shall create a concealed, even surface when the equipment is
not in use.
These covers must be perfectly level with the floor and firmly
secured so they do not move or come out accidentally. Their
diameter should not be more than 20cm.
The flooring must be approximately 2cm from walls, piping, etc.
Diagram 3.20
Consequently, as the flooring tends to stir a little, the substructure
of the flooring must be interrupted at a distance of about 3 cm.
There must be a slit of a few millimetres between the skirting
and the finished floor.
It is important to protect the elastic substructure and the floor
against humidity. (Diagrams 3.22 a, b and c)
Rising damp must not reach the wooden substructure or
condense under the floor surface.
For this reason, if the concrete screed has not been waterproofed,
a duly welded or glued plastic sheet should be placed under the
substructure supports.
More Moreover, in order to ensure air circulation, the hollow
space is usually fitted with a forced ventilation system with
a pipe installed along one of the walls of the hall or along an
external wall, at right angles to the stringers; external air outlets
should be created along the centre line between two stringers.
Openings in the skirting on the wall opposite the pipe function
as air inlets.
A suitably powered extractor fan (500m³/hour per 700-1000m²
of flooring) shall be connected to the pipe to guarantee the
necessary air exchange and convey the air outside.

diagram 3.21
Elastic substructures tend to produce a certain amount of noise
caused by the hollow structure or by the joints of the boards.
Thin cushions of elastic material (polyethylene, rubber, etc) are
used to solve this problem; they are placed where the stringers
meet. Acoustic insulation panels are also used to fill the hollow
parts of the structure. Obviously these panels limit the ventilation
of the substructure so the latter must be well insulated by the
sub-floor.
Removable wooden flooring
The requirements of multifunctionality, together with the
constructional characteristics and functional features of
permanent wooden flooring, have led planners to prefer the
use of portable flooring. This type of floor guarantees the
material performances required by FIBA and allows the sports
facility to be used for different purposes, thus satisfying the
Diagram 3.21
multifunctionality objective.
Obviously, when portable flooring is used, there needs to be
a suitable storeroom close to the playing area for the flooring
when not in use, and personnel must be trained to assemble
and disassemble the floor.
One particularly interesting type of removable wooden flooring
is prefabricated multilayer engineered wood flooring.
Continuous research has led to the development of a specific
product for these types of floors: coloured engineered wood, in
a range of colours that can vary according to the type of lighting
(artificial or natural). In the case of natural lighting, exposure to
the sun is an important factor: for example, facilities close to
the Equator, where sunlight is strong and intense, will require
darker colours to absorb the light, while facilities located near
the North or South Poles will require lighter colours.
Types of flooring
Removable wooden floors are usually made of prefabricated,
varnished wooden panels comprising numerous assembled
elements. The panels currently available on the market measure
between 800-1200x2000-2400mm, varying in thickness,
76
and weigh between 40 and 70 kg per panel depending on

Block Flooring or
Synthetic Flooring
the composition. To create the final flooring, the panels are
interlocked and/or fixed with hooks.
The panels are supplied ready for use and include the playing
surface finish and elastic substructure which can be made of:
Diagram 3.22a
·· elastic matting, which is at least as thick as the panels
Elastic understructure
·· a single or double wooden frame
Playing surface or wear layer
The superficial layer of the panel, and therefore of the structure,
represents the actual flooring itself.
diagram 3.22a It usually consists of planks made from different types of wood
diagram 3.22b veneers, varying in thickness between 2-4-8mm. The floor can
Skirting be laid in the shiplap design or another layout.
Cover Skirting
The veneers that make up the surface must be free from toxic
List
Block Flooring
or Synthetic
Flooring
substances and must be manufactured in compliance with
Spacer
international laws. The colour of the flooring shall meet local
Waterproofing requirements.
Secondary
frame Elastic substructure Diagram 3.22b
The flooring substructure represents the panel frame and must Elastic understructure
be prepared in accordance with the technical requirements of

FIBA. It can be made of one or two wooden frames placed on
top of each other; the first one is usually 40-50mm thick and the
second one (laid at right angles to the first) is 20-40mm thick;
both structures are 60-80mm wide.
diagram 3.22c
When the substructure is made of two structures, one of the
Skirting two, usually the second, is sometimes made of engineered
List
panels to distribute the loads over the entire surface of the panel.
Synthetic Flooring (Diagram 3.23)
Spacer The single or double frames often need to be installed on rubber
Waterproofing
cushions of different shapes and sizes or on elastic matting in
Diagram 3.22c
order to reach the required elasticity. (Diagram 3.24)
Secondary Elastic understructure
frame
There are different methods of joining panels together and these
systems tend to be patented by the respective manufacturing
companies. Bracket fasteners, tongue and groove, and
interlock snap are the most common systems used by leading
manufacturers.
The advantages of this type of floor compared to a traditional cannot be exposed to direct sunlight.
floor with nailed boards or boards glued onto cement are The sheets must be installed on a perfectly smooth and even
significant and include: sub-floor with no irregularities or defects. The sub-floor must
·· Ideal for physical resistance; be totally dry and impervious to damp.
·· Easy to assemble and disassemble; The sub-floor can be made of concrete or bitumen; an already
·· Can be used on any type of sub-floor; existing rigid floor may also be used if it exhibits the correct floor
·· Excellent stability; flatness requirements.
·· Long lifecycle; It can be installed on loose stone or ventilated slabs. In both
·· Fast restoration of the surface; cases, the top screed must be protected against rising damp
which may cause bubbles to form or the floor to lift.
·· Quick to expand if the required surface size varies.
A solution to this problem is to create a waterproof sheath with
PVC Flooring
a thin asphalt plastic sheet laid on the reinforced screed of the
PVC, polyvinyl chloride, is a thermoplastic resin produced by
sub-floor. A final screed is then laid on top of the waterproof
the polymerisation of vinyl chloride. It is usually combined with
layer; the screed must be made up of cement, sand or gravel,
different types of plasticisers to improve pliability. The quality and
using 350 kg cement per 3m. The screed should be at least
quantity of plasticisers determines the elasticity and hardness
3-5m thick, applied with a trowel and accurately levelled with a
of PVC, as well as its resistance to chemical agents.
rule.
Stabilisers, lubricants, fillers and pigments are also added to
Cementing work should be direct and continuous, avoiding a
PVC.
number of different castings. Within 24 hours of casting the
The fillers are inert substances added to the resin. They provide
surface, it must be finished with a 1:1 mixture of cement and
the material with particular characteristics such as increased
fine sand, to create a smooth surface. For the first 4-5 days the
resistance to abrasion. The most common fillers are calcium
surface must be kept wet to prevent shrinkage, especially in the
carbonate and quartz powder; sometimes asbestos fibres are
warm season. The surface must then be left to dry for at least
also used.
60 days.
PVC is produced in sheets, available in various colours, which
Before laying the flooring, the screed must be perfectly dry
are made by the calendar manufacturing process of pressing
and clean. If the screed is not smoothed immediately (within
several layers of material together. The sheets are generally 2-5
24 hours), resins must be added to the mortar to guarantee
mm thick.
adhesion to the layer below.
To improve elasticity, the sheets may be installed on 6-12 mm
Prior to installation, the PVC sheets and adhesives must be
thick elastic layers (cellular resins, rubber granules, or cork).
stored in a closed room for 48 hours at 24°C.
The surface can be smooth, rough or embossed in various
The material must be installed at an ambient temperature of at
designs to improve surface grip and prevent possible optic
least 16°C and the same temperature must be maintained for 5
reflections.
days after the installation.
PVC flooring offers several advantages: resistance to wear,
A thin layer of adhesive must be spread evenly using a special
thermal insulation, resistance to chemical agents, low
spatula, applying no more than strictly necessary. The PVC
maintenance and multi-purpose. PVC can only be used for
sheets must be unrolled slowly. The adhesive must not seep
indoor facilities as it is sensitive to changes in temperature and
78
Panel to Boarding
Diagram 3.23
Movable flooring
diagram 3.23
diagram 3.24
Panel boarding
Diagram 3.24
Movable flooring
out of the joints. The sheets must be installed continuously from Rubber floors are usually made of homogeneous elastomers.
wall to wall. The floor must not be used for 24 hours after the They consist of natural or synthetic rubber. The composition
installation. of synthetic rubber may vary as it may sometimes be mixed
Once the sheets have been installed, it is important to go over with mineral fillers (calcium carbonate, barite, kaolin, very fine
the joints with a roller to ensure secure adhesion. With certain silicates) or these may be used as additives. The fillers affect
types of floor, the edges of the sheets can be welded together the hardness of the material and its resistance to wear.
chemically or thermally. This depends on the characteristics of Elastomer granules or cork may also be added to the mixture as
the PVC, for example homogeneous PVC has a high percentage fillers to provide elasticity and grip. According to the type of floor,
of mineral filler and is not suitable for hot welding. the material may be homogeneous and compact, homogeneous
The markings on the floor can be made using special paints or with a cellular structure or comprising different layers.
by applying different colour adhesive floor strips during painting Elastomers provide optimum elasticity and resistance to wear
and prior to sealing. Adhesive markings must be applied and to chemical agents.
perfectly to prevent them from peeling up. Vinyl floors must Rubber floors are made of 3-8mm thick uninterrupted sheets
have a uniform colour and thickness, they must not bear any which are made by the calendar manufacturing process and
marks from mobile loads (equipment stands, telescopic tribune subsequent vulcanisation process.
supports, etc); they must exhibit suitable hardness and flexibility The surface covering can also be smooth, hard or both to
values as well as good surface friction. improve surface grip. The surface underneath can be fixed to
The floor must adhere well to the sub-floor and must not bubble, the base using adhesives or cement.
buckle or peel up. Sheets are available in various colours and the markings are
Overall, the floor must be a uniform colour, and perfectly even painted on.
with uninterrupted overlapping and almost invisible joints. In Regardless whether cement or adhesive is used to fix the floor,
the case of interchangeable floors, the sheets must be simply particular attention must be paid to fitting to avoid bubbles,
laid down and the joints welded for an uninterrupted surface. lifting or rupture.
Particular care must be taken when hot welding the joint to
Adhesives should be avoided in humid environments and when
avoid stretching or deforming the material.
the cement base is still fresh.
PVC floors are only suitable for indoor use. They must not be
Unlike PVC sheets, rubber ones cannot be welded. Rubber floors
exposed to direct sunlight as the heat may cause the material’s
do not require any special maintenance, only standard cleaning.
characteristics to deteriorate.
Rubber floors are generally low-maintenance, however friction
PVC floors are very low-maintenance, requiring only standard marks are difficult to remove.
cleaning with readily available products. PVC is very durable,
Multi-layer polyurethane floors
however, durability does vary according to the types of fillers
The base is made of prefabricated rubber matting composed
contained in the material.
of selected granules of recycled SBR rubber and MDI-based
Rubber floors polyurethane binders.
The term rubber includes a wide range of natural or synthetic
Matting is available in various densities and thicknesses, thus
polymers. Rubbers have excellent elasticity, resistance to wear
ensuring that the physical property requirements of the floor
and to chemical agents.
are appropriate for its intended use, and that the flooring meets
80
the requirements of national and international sports floors different substances; the main ingredient is linseed oil which is
standards. combined with different resins (e.g. colophony) so that it oxidises
The prefabricated rubber matting is then fixed to an approved and then polymerises. The final components, known as “fillers”,
sub-layer which is made of concrete, bitumen or wood. include cork powder and other organic compounds, pigments
The matting is fixed using two-component polyurethane and dyes. This mixture can be pressed onto a continuous roll
adhesives or any other adhesive substance recommended by of jute backing to make the linoleum sheets. Linoleum floors,
the manufacturer. particularly cork linoleum (“cork wood”), are characterised by
The different layers of the self-levelling polyurethane mix are their elasticity, resistance to wear, acoustic insulation and friction.
applied on top of the matting to bond sealing fissures and Linoleum is produced in sheets, 4-4.5mm thick, in different
permanently seal the joints. The floor surface must be 2mm colours. The surface of the sheets can be even or slightly rough,
thick and applied with a special two-component polyurethane but not abrasive. Floor markings are applied using floor marking
adhesive with a particular composition. paints. Linoleum joints cannot be heat-sealed; it is imperative
that the foundation is kept free from humidity. Maintenance
Before work can begin, the area must be clean and dry, and a
will require some attention as linoleum is sensitive to water,
level and homogenous wall-to-wall surface is imperative.
inorganic acids, concentrated alkalis and solutions of sodium
A special two-component polyurethane finish shall be applied
hypochlorite (bleach). Cleaning should be carried out using a
to the final floor surface with a roller, to leave a slight “orange
damp cloth and then dry sawdust.
skin” type texture; this finish is available in various colours.
Polyurethane paint is used to make permanent markings on Industrial or cement flooring
the playing area, in compliance with international standards. Renowned for their “hardness”, cement floors are not really
This type of floor is low maintenance, suitable for basketball, suitable for sports facilities. However, because of their low
other sports, meetings and exhibitions. Polyurethane floors are cost, they can be used as a foundation or sub-floor for wooden
smooth, resistant to humidity and to deposits from various acid floors or floors of another resilient material. In short, they are
agents, food, drinks and even cigarette ends. industrial floors, comprising a mix of different aggregates and
compounds (such as quartz powder and other mineral powders,
Any marks can be easily removed with standard cleaning products,
slag, magnesite, oxides and pigments, and sometimes sawdust)
thanks to the resilient materials used in the prefabricated
and cement in quantities determined by the suppliers.
matting base, and the extremely hard polyurethane covering
which makes this type of flooring extremely durable and very Game Equipment for Basketball
low-maintenance. Game equipment is essential for basketball, and the precision
Unlike other systems, this type of floor will not need polishing or and standardisation of the materials used are fundamental in
refinishing for several years. Depending on the use of the floor, ensuring correct and impartial competitions. For this reason,
after several years it may be necessary to add another layer of allplaying equipment used in competitions organised under
polyurethane covering to the existing surface. In this way the the aegis of the International Basketball Federation must be
floor will remain as good as new, without affecting the physical provided by companies whose products have been approved
properties of the prefabricated recycled rubber matting. by the FIBA Study Centre.
Linoleum flooring The following is an excerpt from the latest Official Basketball
Linoleum floors are made from a homogeneous mixture of Rules-Game Equipment1, approved by the FIBA Central Board.
1 The Official Basketball Rules- Game Equipment is revised on a regular basis.
It lists the provisions which stipulate the number, dimensions of the backboard.
and characteristics of the equipment required for official FIBA For Level 1, each backboard shall be equipped with lighting
competitions: around its perimeter, mounted on the inside borders of the
Backstop unit backboards and which lights up in red when the game clock
There will be two (2) backstop units (Diagram 3.25), one placed signal sounds for the end of a period. This is also recommended
at each end of the playing court and each consisting of the for Level 2. The lighting shall be at least 10 mm in width and
following parts: cover a minimum of 90% along the edge of the backboard glass
·· One (1) backboard. area.
·· One (1) basket ring with a ring mounting plate. The backboards shall be firmly mounted on the backboard
·· One (1) basket net. support structures at each end of the playing court at right
·· One (1) basket support structure. angles to the floor, parallel to the endlines. The central vertical
line on their front surfaces, extended down to the floor, shall
·· Padding.
touch the point on the floor which lies 1,200mm from the centre
Backboard
point of the inner edge of each endline, on an imaginary line
The backboards (Diagram 3.26) shall be made of a suitable
drawn at right angles to this endline.
transparent material (for Level 1 and 2, of a tempered safety
Test of the rigidity of backboard tempered safety glass:
glass), made in one piece, non-reflective, with a flat front-surface
·· When a square-shaped weight of 50 kg (250mm wide and high,
and shall:
and 1,100mm long) is applied along the centre of the backboard
·· Have a protective framework of the backboard support
glass (without its frame), which is placed horizontally on two
structure around the outside edge;
parallel wooden bars at a distance of 1,200mm from each
·· Be manufactured such that, if broken, the pieces of glass do
other (Diagram 3.27), the maximum vertical deformation
not split off.
shall be 3mm;
For Level 3, the backboards may be made of other material(s)
·· When a basketball is dropped onto the backboard, it shall
painted white, but must meet the other specifications above.
rebound from it with a minimum rebounding height of 50%.
The backboards shall measure 1,800mm (+ a maximum of 30mm)
Basket ring
horizontally and 1,050mm (+ a maximum of 20mm) vertically.
The rings shall be made of solid steel and shall:
All lines on the backboards shall be:
(Diagram 3.28)
·· In white, if the backboards are transparent:
·· Have an inside diameter of a minimum of 450mm and a
·· In black, if white painted backboards are non-transparent; maximum of 459mm;
·· 50mm in width. ·· Be painted orange within the following Natural Colour System
The borders of the backboards shall be marked with a boundary (NCS) FIBA-approved spectrum (see References [2]): 0080-
line and an additional rectangle behind the ring as follows: Y70R 0090-Y70R 1080-Y70R;
·· Outside dimensions: 590mm (+ a maximum of 20mm) horizon- ·· Have its metal a minimum of 16 mm and a maximum of 20mm
tally and 450mm (+ a maximum of 8mm) vertically; in diameter.
·· The top edge of the base of the rectangle shall be level with The net shall be attached to each ring in 12 places. The fittings
the top of the ring and 150mm (-2mm) above the bottom edge for the attachment shall not:
82
Game clock &

24-second device 300
Padding
(at least 25)
1.20m
Padding
(at least 100)
Diagram 3.25
Backstop units
1.05m
min40-max45cm
3050±6
2.90m
15cm
45cm
at least
2.15m
15cm
Endline 5cm
2.00m
1.20m
at least
diagram 3.25
diagram 3.26
Diagram 3.26
Backboard markings.
83
84
·· Have any sharp edges or gaps; the measurements given (Diagram 3.29b).
·· Have gaps smaller than 8 mm, to prevent fingers from Pressure release rings with the following specifications shall be
entering; used for Levels 1 and 2, and are recommended for Level 3:
·· Be designed as hooks for Level 1 and 2. ·· It shall have rebound qualities close to those of the fixed
The rings shall be fixed to the backboard support structures ring. The pressure release mechanism shall ensure these
in such a way that any force applied to the ring cannot be characteristics, but not cause any damage to either the ring
transferred to the backboard itself. or the backboard. The design of the ring and its construction
Therefore, there shall be no direct contact between the ring shall be such that the players’ safety is ensured;
mounting plate and the backboard (Diagram 3.29a). ·· The pressure release rings shall have a ‘positive-lock’
The top edge of each ring shall be positioned horizontally, 3,050 mechanism which must not disengage until a static load
mm (± a maximum of 6 mm) above the floor, equidistant from of 82 kg minimum and 105 kg maximum has been applied
the two vertical edges of the backboard. vertically to the top of the ring at the most distant point from
The point on the inside circumference of the ring nearest the the backboard. The pressure-release ring mechanism shall be
backboard shall be 151mm (± a maximum of 2mm) from the face adjustable within the given static load range.
of the backboard. ·· When the pressure release mechanism is released, the front or
For existing basket support structures, it is recommended that the side of the ring shall rotate no more than 30 degrees and
the ring mounting plate be fixed to the framework according to no less than 10 degrees below the original horizontal position.
diagram 3.27
25
Diagram 3.27
Rigidity of the
backboard glass 50kg
5
120
86
Diagram 3.28
Basket ring
diagram 3.28
·· After release, and with the load no longer applied, the ring ·· The net from rebounding up through the ring, creating possible
shall return automatically and instantly to its original position. entanglement;
No fissures and no permanent deformation of the ring should ·· The ball from becoming trapped in the net or rebounding back
be observed. out of the net.
·· Both rings must have identical rebound characteristics. Backboard support structure
For Level 1, the rebound/elasticity of the ring and support system For Level 1, only mobile or floor-fixed backboard support
should be within 35% -50% of the energy absorption range of structures shall be used. This is recommended for Level 2.
the total impact energy and with a 5% differential between both For Levels 2 and 3, ceiling or wall mounted backboard support
baskets on the same playing court. structures may also be used. Ceiling mounted backboards shall
Basket net not be used in sports halls with a suspension height exceeding
The nets shall be made of white cord and shall be: 10,000mm.
·· Suspended from the rings; The backboard support structure shall be:
·· Manufactured so that they check the ball momentarily as it ·· For Levels 1 and 2, at a distance of at least 2,000mm including
passes through the basket; padding, from the outer edge of the endline.
·· No less than 400mm and no more than 450mm in length; ·· Of a bright colour, contrasting with the background, so that it
·· Manufactured with12 loops to attach it to the ring. is clearly visible to the players.
The upper section of the net shall be semi-rigid to prevent: ·· Secured to the floor so as to prevent any movement. Should
Diagram 3.29a
Ring mounting plate
diagram 3.29a
diagram 3.29b
Diagram 3.29b
Ring mounting plate
for existing ring
90
floor anchoring be not possible, an additional weight on the Technical Equipment

basket support base must be used to prevent any movement. Basketballs
·· Adjusted such as that once the top edge of the ring is at a For Levels 1 and 2, the outer surface of the ball shall be made of
height of 3,050mm from the playing floor, this height shall not leather or artificial/-composite/synthetic leather. For Level 3, the
be changed. outer surface of the ball may be made of rubber.
The rigidity of the backboard support structure with ring shall The surface of the ball shall not contain toxic materials or any
fulfil the requirements of the EN 1270 norms. materials which may cause an allergic reaction. The ball must
The visible vibration of the backboard support unit shall end not contain heavy metals (EN 71) or AZO colours.
within a maximum of four (4) seconds after a dunk shot. The ball shall:
Padding Be spherical, with black seams not exceeding 6.35mm in width,
The backboard and backboard support structure must be and either of a single shade of orange or of the orange/light
padded. (Diagram 3.30) brown FIBA-approved colour combination.
The padding shall be of a single solid colour and shall be the Be inflated to an air pressure such that, when it is dropped
same colour on both backboards. onto the playing floor from a height of approximately 1,800mm
Bright blue is generally the colour used during FIBA measured from the bottom of the ball, it will rebound to a height
competitions. of between 1,200mm and 1,400mm, measured to the top of the
The padding shall be 20 to 27mm thick from the front, back and ball.
side surface of the backboards. The padding shall be 48 to Be marked with its respective size number.
55mm thick from the bottom edge of the backboards. For all men’s competitions in all categories, the circumference of
The padding shall cover the bottom surface of each backboard the ball shall be no less than 749mm and no more than 780mm
and the side surface to a distance of 350 to 450mm up from (size 7) and the ball shall weigh no less than 567 g and no more
the bottom. The front and back surface must be covered to than 650 g.
a minimum distance of 20 to 25mm from the bottom of each For all women’s competitions in all categories, the circumference
backboard. of the ball shall be no less than 724mm and no more than 737mm
(size 6) and the ball shall weigh no less than 510 g and no more
Additional equipment for evaluation and measurements
than 567 g.
Sports facilities shall also include the following additional
equipment for use by commissioners and/or FIBA representatives In addition to checking the specifications listed above, the
for inspection purposes: following tests shall be carried out:
-- A metre ruler with millimetre graduation, at least 4m in ·· Fatigue strength test

length; ·· Heat-storage test
-- A metal measuring tape, gauged from 0 to 50m, and/or other ·· Valve leak test
similar measuring devices; ·· Practice test (grip)
-- A dynamometer; ·· Rebound height and reflection of the basketball test
-- A manometer; Ball geometry test
-- A level gauge. Weight of the basketball
Diagram 3.30
Backboard padding
diagram 3.30
Surface material requirement. game.

Game clock For Levels 1 and 2, a whistle-controlled time system, interfaced
For Levels 1 and 2, the main game clock shall: with the connector equipped game clock may be used by the
·· Be a digital countdown clock with an automatic signal sounding officials to stop the game clock, provided that this system is
for the end of the period as soon as the display shows zero used in all the games of a given competition. The officials shall
(00:00); also start the game clock, however, this is, at the same time, also
done by the timer. All FIBA approved scoreboards may provide
·· Have the ability to indicate time remaining in minutes and
the interface with the whistle controlled system.
seconds and tenths (1/10) of seconds at least during the last
minute of the period; Scoreboard
·· Be placed so that it is clearly visible to everyone involved in For Levels 1 and 2, two (2) large scoreboards shall be:
the game, including the spectators. (Diagram 3.32)
If the main game clock is placed above the centre of the playing ·· Placed one at each end of the playing court and, if so desired,
court, there shall be a synchronised duplicate game clock at a further scoreboard (cube) placed above the centre of the
each end of the playing court, each of which must be high playing court. This does not exclude the need for the other
enough that it is clearly visible to everyone involved in the game, two scoreboards.
including the spectators. Each duplicate game clock shall ·· Clearly visible to everyone involved in the game, including the
display the score and the playing time remaining throughout the spectators.
92
In case video displays are used, it must be assured that the ·· The number of fouls committed by each player on the team
complete required information shall be visible at any time during from 1 to 5. The fifth foul shall be indicated in red or orange.
the game. The readability of the displayed information shall be The number may be shown with five (5) indicators or a number
th
the same as on a digital scoreboard. display with a minimum height of 135mm. In addition, the 5
A game clock control panel shall be provided for the timer foul may be indicated with a slow flashing display (~ 1 Hz) for
and a separate scoreboard control panel shall be provided for five (5) seconds.
the assistant scorer. The control panels cannot be computer ·· The number of team fouls from 1 to 5, stopping at 5.
keyboard panels. Each panel shall enable easy correction of ·· The number of the period from 1 to 4, and E for an extra
any incorrect data and have memory back-ups to save all game period.
data for a minimum of thirty (30) minutes. ·· The number of charged time-outs per half from 0 to 3.
The scoreboard shall include and/or indicate: ·· The team for the throw-in at the next alternating possession
·· The digital countdown game clock. jump ball situation.
·· The points scored by each team, and for Level 1 the cumulative ·· A clock for timing the time-out (optional). The game clock must
points scored by each individual player. not be used for this purpose.
·· The number of each individual player, and for Level 1 and their For Level 1 (compulsory) and Level 2 (recommended):
corresponding surnames. ·· The display on the scoreboard shall be in bright contrasting
·· The team’s names. colours.
diagram 3.32
Diagram 3.32
Scoreboard for level
1 (example of the
layout).
·· The background of the display shall be antiglare.

·· The display numbers on the game clock and game score shall
be a minimum height of 300mm (Level 1) or 250mm (Level 2)
and a minimum width of 150mm (Level 1) or 125mm (Level 2).
·· The display numbers of team fouls and periods shall be a
minimum height of 250mm and a minimum width of 125mm.
·· The display numbers of the team names, players’ surnames
Diagram 3.33
and numbers, and points scored by the players shall be a
Twenty-four second
device diplay minimum height of 150mm.
unit,duplicate
gameclock, and red ·· The scoreboard game clock, game score and the twenty-four
light for level one and
two (example of the second device should have a minimum viewing angle of 130°.
layout)
The scoreboard shall:
·· Not have any sharp edges or burrs.
·· Be mounted securely.
·· Be able to withstand severe impact from any ball.
·· Have specific protection, if necessary, which should not impair
the readability of the scoreboard.
diagram 3.33
·· Have electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the
statutory requirements of the respective country.
·· The game clock starts, it is possible to start the device
Twenty-four second device
manually.
The twenty-four second device shall have: (Diagram 3.33)
·· The device stops and sounds, the game clock count continues
·· A separate control unit provided for the twenty-four second
and may be stopped, if necessary, manually.
operator, with a very loud automatic signal to indicate the end
The twenty-four second device display unit, together with a
of the twenty-four second period when the display shows zero
duplicate game clock and a red light shall:
(0).
·· Be mounted on each backboard support structure a minimum
·· A display unit with a digital countdown, indicating the time in
of 300mm above and behind the backboard or hung from the
seconds.
ceiling.
The twenty-four second device shall have the ability to be:
·· Have the different colours of the numbers of the twenty-four
·· Started from twenty-four (24) seconds.
second device and the duplicate game clock.
·· Stopped with the display indicating the seconds remaining.
·· Have the numbers of the twenty-four second display a
·· Restarted from the time at which it was stopped.
minimum height of 230 mm and be larger than the numbers of
·· Showing no display, if necessary. the duplicate game clock.
The twenty-four second device shall be connected to the game ·· For Level 1, have three (3) or four (4) display surfaces per
clock so that when: unit (recommended for Level 2 and 3) to be clearly visible to
·· The game clock stops, the device shall also stop. everyone involved in the game, including the spectators.
94
·· Have the maximum weight of the three-sided twenty-four ·· With numbers a minimum of 200mm in length and 100mm in
second device, including the support structure, not exceeding width.
80 kg. ·· Numbered from 1 to 5 (1 to 4 in black and the number 5 in
·· Pass the test of protection against damage by balls according red).
to DIN 18032-3. Team foul markers
·· Have electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the The two (2) team foul markers provided for scorer shall be:
statutory requirements of the respective country. ·· Of red colour.
The electric light on the twenty-four second device display unit ·· A minimum of 350mm in height and of 200mm in width.
shall be: ·· Clearly visible to everyone involved in the game, including the
·· Of a bright red colour. spectators, when positioned on either side of the scorer’s
·· Synchronised with the game clock to light up when the signal table.
sounds for the end of playing time for a period. ·· Used to indicate the number of team fouls up to five (5) and to
·· Synchronised with the twenty-four second device to light up show that a team has reached the team foul situation.
when the signal sounds for the end of a twenty-four second Electrical or electronic devices may be used but they shall meet
period. the above specifications.
Signals Alternating possession arrow
There shall be at least two (2) separate sound signals, with The alternating possession arrow (Diagram3.34) provided for
distinctly different and very loud sounds: the scorer shall:
·· One (1) provided for the timer and the scorer which shall ·· Have an arrow of a minimum length of 100 mm and height 100
sound automatically to indicate the end of the playing time mm.
for a period. The timer and scorer shall be able to sound the ·· Display on the front side an arrow, illuminated in bright red
signal manually when appropriate to attract the attention of colour when switched on, showing the direction of the
the officials. alternating possession.
·· One (1) provided for the twenty-four second operator which ·· Be positioned in the centre of the scorer’s table and shall be
shall sound automatically to indicate the end of the twenty- clearly visible to everyone involved in the game, including the
four second period. spectators.
Both signals shall be sufficiently powerful to be easily heard diagram 3.34
above the most adverse or noisy conditions. The sound volume
shall be adjustable, according to the size of the sport hall and
the noise of the crowd, to a maximum sound pressure level of
120 dBA measured at a distance of one (1) m from the source of
Diagram 3.34
the sound. A connection to the public information system of the
Alternating possession
sports hall is strongly recommended. indicator (example)
Player foul markers

The five (5) player foul markers provided for scorer shall be:
·· Of white colour.
Advertising boards ·· Be in accordance with the national safety requirements for

Advertising boards may be located around the playing court electrical equipment in the respective country.
and: (Diagram 3.35) ·· Have mechanical protection for all engine driven parts.
·· Shall be located at a minimum distance of 2,000 mm from the ·· Be non-flammable.
endlines and sidelines). For Level 1, only motorised rotating advertising boards are
·· Those along the endlines must have a minimum gap of 900 permitted.
mm on each side of the mobile backstop units so that the
floor wiper(s) and portable TV camera(s) can pass through, if
necessary.
Advertising boards are permitted in front of the scorer’s table
provided that they are placed directly in front of and flush with
the table.
Advertising boards shall:
·· Not exceed a height of 1,000 mm from the playing court.
·· Be padded around the top with a minimum thickness of
20mm.
·· Have no burrs and all edges shall be rounded off.
diagram 3.35
TEAM BENCH SCORER’S TABLE TEAM BENCH

ADVERTISING IN FRONT
(VERTICAL BOARD)
ADVERTISING BOARD(S)
Diagram 3.35
Advertising in the BASKET BASKET
playing court area SUPPORT SUPPORT
I
T echnological
nstallations
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 4 › Technological Installations
98
N
owadays, when planning a new sports facility or a Air Conditioning Systems
restoration project, “the building and its technological The ideal situation would be for all areas, spaces and rooms
installations” are no longer seen as two separate to have an external wall so that the air could be exchanged by
components but rather as “one single entity”. The taking it directly from outside. However, due to the layout of
installations represent vital and functional elements which can basketball facilities and the need to maintain uniform indoor
make an event more attractive and add comfort for its users. climatic conditions, as required by FIBA for international events,
The actual building itself can also be seen as a technological air conditioning system must be installed. This is particularly
installation. necessary in locations where the temperature and thermal
This chapter deals with the technological installations necessary range strongly affect environmental comfort.
to create the ideal environmental conditions in terms of air The aim of installing an air-conditioning system in basketball
and water temperature, lighting and sound. The chapter also facilities is to maintain a constant temperature range and ensure
includes recommended specifications for storage areas for a renewal of air inside the entire facility whatever the weather
equipment and machinery. conditions outside.
General descriptions are provided of the most common systems The microclimatic parameter values in a facility will obviously
and technological installations used today, however, it must be vary from one room to another, to ensure that each room
remembered that each of these will need to be planned, sized offers the most comfortable thermal conditions possible. The
and selected in accordance with the statutory regulations in force temperature in the workout and warm-up halls should be lower
in the country of installation as well as with local geographical than the temperature in the changing rooms, and lower still in
requirements. Obviously, facilities in hot countries will require the main basketball hall where spectators sit. Furthermore, with
cooling systems rather than heating systems, whilst the reverse suitable filters to purify incoming air, the expulsion of stale air and
will be true of facilities in colder countries. the intake of fresh air from the outside will guarantee effective
Installations such as lighting and sound systems must not only ventilation and renewal of clean air. From a management point
meet comfort and safety requirements, they must also satisfy of view, basketball facilities must have high sanitary standards
FIBA’s television coverage requirements, particularly for high- and be easy to keep clean and functional. This is especially
level competitions. As such, systems of an equivalent standard important in areas where mould and harmful bacteria can
are recommended for all sports facilities. proliferate in warm and humid conditions, such as changing
The energy requirements of a sports facility will vary according rooms and showers.
to the location and type of building. The aim of this chapter, Climatic conditions
therefore, is to provide the main planning guidelines for Basketball facilities should provide the following thermal
technological installations in new basketball facilities or ones conditions, according to the purpose and use of each area:
undergoing restoration. a) Winter
The final part of this chapter will briefly focus on energy saving
Main basketball court and tribunes T + 18°C
systems; the information is merely intended to serve as a
guideline and is by no means exhaustive, thanks to ongoing Warm-up halls, workout halls, administration offices, etc. T + 20°C
scientific and technological research which is continuously Changing rooms, toilets, first aid room, etc. T + 22°C
putting forth new methods and technologies aimed at improving
N.B.: These temperatures refer to normal thermal comfort conditions.
the public environment, sports facilities included.
99 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 4 › Technological Installations
b) Summer a) Heating and cooling plants

Main basketball court and tribunes T + 28°C Two different power plants are recommended:
·· A heating plant for hot water production;
Warm-up halls, workout halls, administration offices, etc. T + 27°C
·· A refrigeration plant for cool water production.
Changing rooms, toilets, first aid room, etc. T + 26°C The heating plant should consist of two or more hot water
N.B.: These are the maximum temperatures acceptable when trying to reduce the energy costs of
the air-conditioning system.
generators supplied with liquid fuel (diesel, fuel oil, etc.) or gas
(methane), according to the temperature requirements of each
c) Air renewal from the outside throughout the year
area, and be driven by special electronic pumps. For safety
Main basketball court and tribunes 25m³/h/person
reasons, the heating plant should be installed in a building
Warm-up halls, workout halls, administration offices, etc. 5 vol./area/h detached from the sports facility.
The hot water should be conducted from the heating plant to
Changing rooms, toilets, first aid room, etc. 5 vol./area/h
the main building via insulated steel pipes, running in tunnels or
Toilets and showers 10 vol./area/h channels which are easily accessible for inspection purposes.
Description of the system Once in the main building, the pipes must be placed on
Bearing these specifications in mind, the air-conditioning distribution headers to feed the various areas.
system should be one which uses external air only, heating it in The refrigeration plant cools water by means of a cooling fluid.
winter and cooling it in summer, without controlling the humidity. This will obviously not be necessary in colder countries where
The internal temperature can be controlled by measuring the fresh external air supplies sufficient cooling energy to maintain
difference between the energy levels of the incoming air and the correct temperatures inside the facilities. In the same
the expelled air. way, another source of cold energy could be used if available,
This kind of air-conditioning system is ideal for the area occupied depending on the morphological location of the basketball
by the public, but it should be able to regulate the amount of facility, for example fresh filtered water from cold-water rivers
incoming air in proportion to the number of people inside the or lakes.
hall. This can be achieved by installing air quality sound level The type of power plant should be chosen according to the
meters that will automatically regulate the flow of both incoming environmental and ecological conditions prevalent at the
and outgoing air according to the noise level measured. building site. The plant could be one which cools by refrigerant
Electric fans should be provided with static frequency gas compression and water cooling (in a closed circuit with
converters capable of continuously varying the rotation speed cooling towers or in an open circuit with fresh water from a river
and, consequently, the flow of air. or lake), or air cooling (where water is scarce).
The recommended system should therefore have the following Refrigeration units which make use of available energy sources,
components: such as steam, hot water or low-cost gas, can also be used. The
·· Heating and cooling plants; most suitable type of refrigeration unit will obviously depend
·· An air conversion plant; on the location of the facilities, the availability and usability of
resources, and also on technical and economic analyses.
·· Air intake and supply to the various areas;
b) Air-treatment units
·· Collection and expulsion of stale air;
·· Additional systems for air heating and cooling. Air-conditioning units should be part of the power plant. They
100
will provide for the autonomous and independent treatment of These can prevent blowing air in a radial stream in the case
air in the different areas, thus also allowing a flexibility that is of cold air (refrigeration phase), or blowing in hot air during a
compatible with the varying occupancy of those areas. heating phase, for example, thus averting both annoying cold
The next step is the decentralisation of the system into three draughts and the formation of hot air strata.
different areas: -- Inside the workout halls, warm-up halls, changing rooms
-- Main hall and tribunes; and adjoining access rooms, the air should be distributed by
-- Workout halls, warm-up halls, etc.; means of waterproof materials which can blow air into the
various areas through micro-perforations set in the pipes at
-- Changing rooms, toilets, showers and annexes.
regular intervals. This solution has the following advantages:
Therefore, three air-conditioning units should be foreseen, each
-- Lightweight components that allow lightweight fastening to
one of them filtering the incoming air (according to the degree
the structure;
of air pollution outside).
-- Elimination of the usual diffusers which are large and heavy,
In order to save energy, air-to-air heat exchangers should be
and restrict the spaces along the ceilings;
installed. They can save at least 50% of the energy contained
in the expelled air by using it to precondition the incoming air, -- Enable cleaning of the pipes above, therefore maintaining
thus reducing the overall cooling or heating load. Each air- high standards of hygiene within the various areas.
conditioning unit must be equipped with air/water exchangers d) Collection and expulsion of stale air
for hot and cold water (produced by the respective power The stale air sucked in from the various areas is conveyed to the
plants); these exchangers can treat the air under the necessary air treatment unit where it transfers its energy to the incoming
conditions to regulate the internal temperature. air through special exchangers before being expelled. The
c) Supply and intake of air in the various halls incoming air then passes through a purifier before being used
The air treated by the power plant should be sent to the various in the facility.
areas and then distributed appropriately according to each The ventilation units are also located in the air-conditioning
type of area. plant and suck in and expel the stale air from the halls.
The organisation of the air intake units is suggested as follows:
-- In the main hall, the air will be distributed to all parts of the
hall through zinc-coated sheet steel pipes, isolated on the -- Main hall: a series of air-capturing units shall be connected
outside; the air pipes will lead towards the tribunes, and run to a net of zinc-coated steel pipes, both on the ceiling (20%
around the whole perimeter of the hall as well as around the of the whole air intake) and on the floor (80% of the air intake);
playing court under the telescopic tribunes. The use of long- an intake pipe will circuit the ceiling with ramifications at the
range nozzles, which automatically adjust the airstream to highest points of the structure in order to capture smoke and
balance the difference in temperature between the incoming steam which inevitably accumulate there.
air and the air already in the hall, allows for the intake of air In the same way, an intake pipe will circuit the playing court
along the perimeter area and consequently ensures a good at the base of the fixed tribunes with grates imbedded into
and steady distribution of air. the steps and connecting with the playing area. This system
improves both the air purification and the flow of air from
-- In the central area, where the air enters the hall at a
above.
considerable height (usually at least 15m), air diffusers
-- Workout and warm-up halls and similar areas: These
equipped with corrective air blowing systems should be used.
areas shall have air intake pipes circuiting the areas at floor same moment at the starting point of the system. The maximum
level or along the walls at floor level, in order to guarantee a drop in voltage of the furthest lamp in the lighting system shall
descending air flow. Pipes shall therefore be dropped into the be 3%.
floor or run along the circuiting walls on the outside with air Size of the wires and cables
intake grates inserted in the walls. Irrespective of the above values for the maximum drop in
-- Changing rooms and annexes: These areas shall have voltage, the density of electric current in the wires should not
powerful air intake pipes installed only in the toilets and exceed 90% of the respective density legally in force, taking
showers, so that the lower air pressure in the changing rooms into account the variation coefficients based on the system
will always guarantee a flow of air towards the service areas. layout.
It is recommended that the changing room lockers have vent a) The size of the wires and cables must be proportional to a
grilles for air intake and that these are connected with the coefficient of simultaneity of the loads equal to:
central air intake system. -- 100% for lighting circuits
e) Additional heating and/or refrigeration system -- 50% for plug circuits (less for service plugs)
For particularly hot or cold areas, it is advisable to provide the
-- 00% if they supply predetermined equipment
various areas with additional heating or refrigeration systems,
b) Minimum diameter of phase wires.
in order not to “overload” the main plant with an excessive flow
Copper wires for low tension systems should not have a
of air; for example, warm water radiators should be used in the
cross-section of less than 2.5mm². This value can be reduced
changing rooms and in the first aid room, and self-contained
to 1.5mm² for soft covered copper wires, provided they are
air-conditioning systems in the offices. It rests with the planners
inserted into pipes, conduits or protective sheaths, and to 1
to decide which system is most appropriate for the facility and
mm² for signal circuits and remote control devices (including
its location.
acoustic circuits).
Electrical Power Supply c) Minimum cross-sections of earth wires and protection
a. The planning and construction of electrical power supply wires.
systems is be subject to the strictest standards and In order to enforce accident prevention, all cross-sections
specifications. must conform to the strictest rules and specifications of the
b. Not only must the system itself conform to the above standards currently in force.
standards, but also all integral materials and components. Shunts and joints
c. Not only must the laws and standards appurtenant to this a) Wire shunts and joints should be connected through terminal
kind of equipment be complied with rigorously, but there will boxes which are appropriately protected according to their
also be certain general restrictive specifications to be location and in such a way that they:
followed. -- allow easy entry of the wires into the terminal;
Maximum values of the drop in voltage -- enable the joint to be made without having to reduce the
When all the components of the low voltage system are cross-section of the wires;
connected and working simultaneously, each at its respective -- maintain a constant contact pressure;
nominal load, the voltage measured at any point should not -- remain intact even under damp conditions.
have dropped by more than 4% of the voltage measured at that
102
Routing wires and cables Instructions on how to install electric supply system
a) Types of cables: all cables must be non-flammable, and not a) Instructions on how to install electric supply systems are
emit toxic gases if they do burn. listed below, according to the different types of location and
b) Laying of cables: cables must be adequately protected by installation.
tubes, channels or conduits which can be inspected. Other special instructions for the installation of such systems
can of course be used when a particular situation demands it.
c) Identification of the phase wires and terminals: all the phase
wires must be identified by special signs or tags placed at b) Systems imbedded under plaster in the walls and under the
their extremities. floor in changing room areas, toilets, showers and stairs. The
following can be used for this kind of system:
d) Identification of protection, and earth wires: all of them must
-- Wires adapted to the required tension, laid in rigid protective
be clearly identifiable from one another as well as from the
tubes made of self-extinguishable thermoplastic material.
other wires in the system.
c) Parts of the electric supply system which crosses outside
e) Crossing of fire-resistant constructions: fireproof barriers
areas of the buildings. The following can be used for this kind
must protect cables passing through fireproof constructions,
of system:
and have fire-resistant characteristics at least equal to those
-- Insulated cables with flexible wires; the cables must be
required for the constructions themselves.
flame-retardant, non-corrosive and should not emit toxic
Protection
gases if they do burn.
a) This refers to the protection of the following parts which are
-- The cables must be laid in rigid protective tubes made of
under tension:
thermoplastic materials. This is vital when input cables are
-- Protection against direct contacts.
installed outside the building - in this case, connection
-- Protection against indirect contacts.
shafts are required and the intervals between them must be
-- Protection against short circuits.
fixed according to the cross-section of the cables set into
-- Protection against thermal effects. the tubes.
Protection devices must obviously be adequate and adapted to d) Open installations in the main basketball court area for the
the characteristics of the area in which they are installed. lighting installations, in the service areas, in the areas housing
Outside electric installations technological installations and their annexed corridors. The
a) Electrical equipment and accessories installed outside must following can be used for this kind of system:
have an adequate degree of protection, compatible with where -- Insulated cables laid in metal galvanised channels of the
and how they are installed. open or closed type, fixed to the walls.
b) Where cables run the risk of being damaged mechanically, -- Single-pole cables with flexible wires, adapted to working
they should obviously be adequately protected. voltage, passed through rigid protective pipes made of
c) Part of an electricity supply system is defined as being thermoplastic self-extinguishing material and free from toxic
“outside” when it is not placed inside a room which will protect it emissions in the case of fire, or alternatively in metal
from atmospheric conditions: porches, open galleries, cavities, galvanised tubes. The tubes must be fixed together easily
grates and similar half-open spaces are considered as being and securely to be close-fitting and watertight. They must
“outside”. be fixed securely and neatly to the walls, at intervals, using
small hooks. tubes and each have its own derivation box. These tubes
e) External open installations: leading to open-air technological should be made of a plastic material that does not relay
plants or for external lighting installations. The following can be the electric current or emit toxic gases in the case of
used far this kind of installation: overheating.
-- Insulated cables laid in galvanised tubes, fixed to the walls. b) All the wires belonging to one and the same circuit must
Flexible PVC-coated steel tubes fixed together with easy-to-fit pass through the same tube. No connections are allowed
waterproof connection pieces, threaded at their ends, must be inside the tubes.
used for connecting machines to the main plant. c) The internal diameter of the tubes should never be inferior
Specifications for installations set into channels to 16mm and, once filled with wires, should be less than half
f) Each part of the service equipment and each plant (energy, full (filling coefficient = 0.5 = ratio between the total cross-
telephone, acoustic installations, interphones, data section of the cables and the internal diameter of the tubes),
transmission, etc.) should use totally independent channel however, the diameter of the tubes should always be greater
sections, in other words, the channels must have appropriate than or equal to 1.4 times the diameter of all the wires held
separators. together.
g) The cables should be laid inside the channels, side by side, d) The tubes should always be laid parallel to one another and
with a maximum of 2 layers. If more cables are necessary, must not cross or run diagonally. Any bend must have a large
other channels should be set one above the other, with a radius. The wires should be easy to remove and to replace.
minimum gap of 30cm. e) In open stretches, the tubes should be fixed by means of
h) The cables should be appropriately marked with plastic tags plastic or metal supports held by screw anchors with a
indicating the exact type of installation or service the cables maximum interval of 60cm.
belong to. f) Special devices such as flexible pipes or double-coupling
i) In vertical and inclined stretches, the cables should be pieces should be used at the expansion joints of the
adequately fixed to the channels. The channels should be at buildings.
least 20% larger than the total cables inside them. g) It is obviously prohibited to pass tubes anywhere near hot
j) The cable channels should be made of galvanised metal and water or gas pipes, or to fix them to tubing, channels or any
have a maximum width of 50cm. They must have flush joints other kind of mechanical equipment.
so that the protective coating of the cables is not damaged h) Even if tubes are to remain empty, they must always be
while they are being pulled through. provided with a pilot wire.
k) The channels must be fixed to the walls using support i) Pipes used in open installations must pass through the
brackets, positioned at intervals proportional to the weight cassettes, boxes or adequate devices which are to be kept
the channels must bear. waterproof by means of straight pipe fittings made of resin
Specifications for installations set in tubes or metal.
a) Each part of the service equipment and each plant (energy, Description of electrical power supply systems
telephone, acoustic installations, interphones, data a) The earthing should consist of a naked copper wire leading
transmission, etc.) should be put into totally independent all around the building at the deepest end of its foundation
104
and in direct contact with the earth, connected to a general medium voltage panel.
bus bar (earth rod). c) The supply equipment must be installed on the inside
b) This bus bar must be installed in the transformation room. All perimeter of the premises (medium voltage receiver cabin).
the metal parts of the structure of the building, as well as the d) This medium voltage receiver cabin should consist of:
neutral part of the secondary transformer windings, must be -- One (1) receiver cell with bus bar knife switch and earthing
connected to this earthing ring. knife switch.
c) The base of the flooring of the lower and intermediary voltage -- One (1) cell with SF6 switch (sulphur hexafluoride) with
cabins must be equipped with an adequate equipotential indirect protection relays.
net. The medium voltage receiver cabin must be certified by a
d) All the connections of all the metal parts must be equipotential; qualified laboratory.
false floors and ceilings, lighting installations, machine frames, e) A medium voltage line must start at the receiver cabin with
outside lamp posts, air-ducts, etc., must also have unwanted 3 unipolar medium tension cables and one spare conductor
equipotential connections to prevent any indirect contacts cable, pass through an underground tube and arrive at the
with live parts. transformation cabin which shall be placed at the perimeter of
e) A naked copper wire, starting at the bus bar in the transformation the building.
room, should run just below ground, all around the perimeter f) The low voltage cables must start from this cabin and feed
of the buildings, connecting the various dispersion points. the appropriate panels.
There must also be an equipotential connection net of cables, g) The rooms in which the receiving and transformation cabins
independent from that of the earthing system, used to earth are placed must have adequate protection against water
all the communication equipment. A connection should be infiltration. Ventilation in these rooms must be exceptionally
made from the bus bar to the various communication boxes good, particularly in the transformation cabins.
via their earth. All these communication earths should be h) The equipment within these cabins must be proportional
connected to one another and to the main earthing system, to the characteristics of the power supply, of the distribution
rendering it one single system. company, as follows:
Power supply at medium voltage (new receiver and -- Nominal operating voltage of present and future supply: ...
transformation cabin) KV (kilo voltage) (to be defined by the distribution
a) The electricity supply of the entire sports facility must be company);
brought to a power supply box at the boundary of the premises -- Short circuit power, no less than ...MVA (mega volt ampere)
(medium voltage reception zone) and be distributed from there. (to be defined by the company);
b) The supply (usually considered at ...KV (kilo voltage)), from -- Mono-phase breakdown current towards the earth and
the connection for medium voltage made by the distribution repair time: ...A (ampere) (to be defined by the company).
company, must be directly connected to the terminals upstream Transformation cabin
from the inbound medium voltage panel (sender side) and the a) The transformation cabin must be installed in a room
following should be provided: which should be fire-resistant for a minimum of 120 minutes.
-- One (1) medium voltage power supplier for the entire sports Access to the cabin must be in the open-air or via a well-aired
facility (in a receiver cabin as described above) containing a antechamber.
b) The supply load must be distributed over two transformation medium voltage power supply.
units, each with the same characteristics, set in parallel but -- Mechanical interblockage between the bus-bar knife
independent of each other. switches and the door-opening device.
c) On the medium voltage side, the cabin should be provided g) An equipotential earthing net should be placed underneath
with prefabricated medium voltage panels, all equipped with the floor of the transformer cabin (as well as under the input
the appropriate safety systems which exclude any possibility of cabin) and must consist of a galvanised steel rod, 10mm in
contact with live parts or unwelcome tampering. diameter, and a square mesh, the sides of which are at least
d) The transformers should have resin insulation and each be 1m long.
placed in a cell separated from the others by walls, closed h) A main earth collector should be provided, as well as a
on the front with lockable wire-net hinged doors which must perimetral collector all around the cabin. The earths of the
automatically stop the power supply as soon as they are opened cabin and those that do not belong to the cabin should be
in order to prevent any access to cells under tension. connected to the perimetral collector. The wires coming from
e) The medium voltage cabin should consist of the following: the dispersers and the equipotential earthing net should be
-- One (1) cell for the input power supply line. attached to the main earth collector.
-- One (1) general isolator cell under load. i) The cabin must be equipped with safety lighting as well as
-- One (1) output cell. with the most modern safety devices for the prevention of
-- One (1) cell for measuring voltage and amperage. accidents, in particular:
-- Two (2) cells with SF6 switch (sulphur hexafluoride) for the -- Rubber insulation mat, approved and certified by a qualified
transformers. inspection company, laid down along the length of the front
of the medium voltage panels.
The medium voltage cabin must be certified by a qualified
laboratory. -- Insulated gloves.
f) Furthermore, the following commands, signals and interblocks -- Various control signs and warning signals.
must be provided, at the least: -- A circuit diagram under glass.
-- Medium voltage quick-release switch. -- The wires should be coloured and a legend must explain the
-- Every cell must have its own voltmeter. colour codes.
-- Markings for the positions of bus-bar knife switches and -- A 10kg CO2 fire-extinguisher.
other medium voltage switches. -- A switch hook.
-- Every transformer must be equipped with an electric -- A battery-powered portable torch.
interblockage between the medium voltage automatic -- An insulated podium.
switch and the low voltage switch (so that, by opening the j) The same applies to the input cabin.
medium voltage switch, the lower voltage switch is also k) The auxiliary circuits of the cabin should be fed by direct
automatically opened). Furthermore, a mechanical medium current provided by the appropriate power station and situated
voltage blockage with a system of ringed keys should also inside the low voltage panel, of the ‘Power Centre’ type. The
be provided. power station consists of a series of stationary type accumulators
-- An electric device which, if the door to the respective designed to work autonomously for at least 60 minutes and be
transformer is opened, should immediately interrupt the kept charged by a completely automatic power rectifier which
108
is capable of completely recharging the accumulators within a -- One (1) display and control panel.
maximum of 8 hours. n) A low voltage panel, of the ‘Power Centre’ type, should also
This power rectifier should consist of two distinct rectifier be provided, with various output cables and automatic power
branches: one to feed the permanent power loads (auxiliary factor corrector.
circuits of the cabin and the main panel) and one to fully
Diesel electric power station for emergency power supply
recharge the series of accumulators and keep them charged.
a) The diesel-electric power station should be installed in a room
The power rectifier, with its series of accumulators, should
which must fire-resistant for a minimum of 120 minutes. Access
automatically feed the circuits branching off it, if there is an
must be in the open-air or via a well-aired antechamber.
alternate current power cut.
b) This power station should consist of a diesel engine which
l) To protect the wires from unwanted contact between the
starts a coaxial synchronous generator by means of a flywheel
secondary terminals of the transformers and the distribution
and an elastic joint. The engine and alternator unit should
panel, additional insulation will be provided from the secondary
be assembled onto a single chassis of structural steel and
terminals of the transformers to the input terminals of the
separated from the floor slab by vibration dampers.
machine switches on the main lower voltage panel.
c) The unit should have a continuous working power of 250KW
m) Two transformers in natural cooling resin should be provided,
and shall consist of:
with the following characteristics:
c.1. A diesel engine with a maximum speed of 1500rpm, and an
-- Each transformer must have a nominal power of
automatic starter as soon as the net voltage falls below 70%
approximately 1000 KVA (kilo volt ampere) (to be defined
of the nominal value; an automatic standstill, with adjustable
according to the site).
retarder, once normal working operations are resumed;
-- Main voltage KV (to be defined according to the site).
complete with starting battery, exhaust silencer, fuel tank and
-- Secondary voltage V (to be defined according to the site). working accessories:
-- Frequency Hz (to be defined according to the site). -- A closed circuit water cooling system with a radiator and a
-- Diagram (to be defined according to the site). ventilator powered by the engine;
-- Connections (to be defined according to the site). -- A minimum number of instruments: oil manometer and
-- Percentage of short circuit voltage (to be defined according thermometer, cooling water thermometer, speedometer and
to the site). hour counter;
Accessories: -- Safety equipment for setting off the alarm system or stopping
-- Three (3) united medium voltage insulators. the machine, should it start to function abnormally: at least
-- Four (4) united low voltage insulators. when the pressure of the lubricating oil is at a minimum, or
-- One (1) terminal for main voltage transformation. the temperature of the exhaust gases at a maximum or the
-- Four (4) adjustable rollers. cooling water temperature at a maximum.
-- Four (4) eyebolt levers. c.2. Synchronous auto-ventilating, auto-energising, auto-
-- One (1) earth terminal. regulating three-phase alternator, for variations of load
of ±2.5%, secondary voltage V at primary current (p.c.);
-- One (1) type plate indicating the electric characteristics.
connection according to standards.
-- Three (3) thermic-sounds, type PT100 for the protection of
c.3. Control and protection electrical panel of the box type,
the windings.
with an adequate degree of protection according to the site, courts or the tribunes.
assembled separately from the group and at least equipped -- Reverser for the various electric plugs for the press area
for the following: and computer input.
-- Measurement of the delta and star voltage. -- Reverser for the main data processing unit in the press
-- Measurement of the voltage on all three phases. room.
-- Measurement of the power. -- Reverser for the safety control panel and the various special
-- Measurement of the frequency. installations.
-- Calibration of the voltage. f) Soundproofing of the room must comply with the current
-- A device for fully charging the starting batteries and standards regulating airborne sounds. The construction
preserving battery life - automatic tetrapolar multiple switch company must supply and install the following:
for the protection of the input line of the main panel (its -- A soundproof door at the entrance to the room.
functioning characteristics must ensure protection against -- Devices for the elimination of unwanted sounds both
circuits and unwanted contacts for the whole plant fed by upstream and downstream of the room.
the generator-set when it is on). -- Soundproofing of the room using appropriate boards or
-- Auxiliary counters to control the network/generator exchange foam. This is to keep the noise level down to a maximum of
unit. 45dBA, measured 1m away from the room.
-- Alarm and protection units against abnormal functioning of Device to neutralise the voltage of electric power supply
the engine and of the alternator, in particular the following: unit in an emergency
-- Minimum oil pressure. a) For safety reasons, all the electric circuits of the building must
-- Hyper-temperature of the water. be neutralised in one single action, including the emergency
-- Minimum fuel level. lighting and power supplies.
-- Hyper-temperature of the exhaust gas. b) In other words, this single action must also neutralise the
emergency generator unit and the safety power supply unit.
-- Generator overload.
c) The device should be easily recognised and placed in a
-- Non-start.
position where it cannot be easily damaged or tampered with.
and any kind of safety equipment which the construction firm
d) For this reason, buttons should be strategically placed
recommends to maintain perfect functioning of the unit.
behind glass.
d) When connecting the unit to the main distribution panel, every
type of device and measure (electric and mechanical units) Main low voltage distribution panel (in the transformer cabin)
must be used to prevent the generator from working in parallel a) The panel should be of the ‘Power Centre’ type and be
with the electricity network of the distribution company. placed behind bars with segregated output cables (segregation
e) To obtain the size of the generator unit, at least the following of the functioning equipment, of the bus bars and of the output
installations have to function with the privileged electricity terminals one from the other). The panel should consist of
network, called ‘reserve’, and their percentages have to be modular cubicles, made of doors, supports, shelves and sides
calculated: in sheet metal, completely separated from the bus bar zone as
well as from the neighbouring cubicles.
-- Reverser for the security lights but not for the central playing
110
The low voltage Power Centre panel must have been tested by close to and on the panel.
a qualified laboratory and be certified. The panel must consist of several sections:
b) The equipment and instruments must be positioned so that Input
they are easy to operate and maintain; they must also be easy a) Each transformer shall be equipped with:
to reach inside the panel without, however, endangering either -- Voltage and current measuring instruments.
persons or things. -- Push button low voltage switch.
c) Particular attention should be paid to easy access without -- Automatic powered disconnecting switch with cut-off coil.
accidentally coming into contact with live components or parts
-- Flag relays on the monitoring board of the transformer.
which need frequent inspection, such as fuses and relays.
-- Alarm bell for these relays.
d) The main bus bars of the panel must be made of electrolytic
-- Earth relays with secured spring inserted into the neutral1
copper, wide enough for the current passing through them,
connected to earth.
and must be attached by means of insulated rigid mechanical
b) A push button to open the medium voltage switch must be
supports strong enough to take the electro-dynamic forces of
fixed onto the panel of the input cabin.
short circuit currents.
Commuting of the network/generator unit
e) The panel must contain measuring instruments and command
a) The following shall be installed on the input line of the
levers, signalling and shunting line protection levers and the
generator unit:
network/generator change-over switches, and, if necessary,
-- an automatic powered switch and two tetrapolar powered
also the compensating systems of the reactive energy.
switches with mechanical and electrical interblocks must
f) The automatic switches and differentials installed in the panel
be connected to each other to prevent the two current
must be omnipolar and divided into sections (or removable). Each
sources from functioning in parallel. They must be powered
one of them must be equipped with a light signal announcing
by an appropriate relay at low voltage.
an interrupted relay.
Normal energy
g) The characteristics of the automatic switches must be chosen
a) Automatic and differential powered disconnecting tetrapolar
according to the following criteria:
switches with cut-off coil, divided into sections (or removable)
-- Short circuit input current in the panel.
must protect the input lines:
-- Cross-section, type and conditions of installation of the
-- Normal energy sectors of the various secondary panels.
shunting lines, taking into consideration the continuous load
-- Air-conditioning panels.
and the energy that would pass through them in the case of
a short circuit. -- Panel for the heating and water plants.
-- Maximum length of the shunting lines in relation to their b) Each of the above switches must have its own ampere-meter,
operating time. commutators and reduction ampere-meters, according to the
project diagram.
h) Coordination between each of the maximum current relays
of the switches must assure their operating time selection. Privileged energy
i) Plates on the front of the panel must indicate the various (Can be fed by the generator unit even in the absence of network
circuits of the instruments and equipment. power supply)
j) Appropriate warning signs and circuit diagrams must be fixed 1 Neutral: circuit conductor that may carry current in normal operation. Ground and neutral are
closely related. (Wikipedia)
a) Automatic and differential powered disconnecting tetrapolar -- Air-conditioning and refrigeration units.
switches with cut-off coil, divided into sections (or removable) -- Heating system.
must protect the input lines: -- Other panels to be defined.
-- Privileged energy sectors of the various secondary panels. d) 20% of the total switches on the secondary panels should
-- Reverser for a panel for the data processing system. be reserved as spare switches for the connection of other
-- A UPS continuity unit (Uninterruptible Power Supply) for the equipment, if necessary.
various safety garter springs. The Artificial Lighting of Basketball Courts
b) Each of the above switches must be equipped with its own by Gilles Page, PHILIPS LIGHTING
ampere-meter, commutators and reduction ampere-meters, Introduction
according to the project diagram. The great interest of the media in sports events has an important
Automatic compensation of reactive energy effect on the development of the sports themselves. This,
a) This section should include the automatic compensation together with increased leisure time, has resulted in a booming
system of the reactive energy composed of static capacitors. number of active sportsmen and women all over the world,
Their number must be regulated by an automatic unit equipped either taking part in the sport as a leisure activity or in amateur
with a varmeter relay in order to maintain the power factor. and professional competitions.
b) Each power transformer must be equipped with its own Consequently, numerous sports complexes have been
power correction capacitors at a fixed value, protected by knife developed in which all kinds of sports are practised, from the
switches with fuses, upstream from each machine switch. general physical training sessions to professional activities. In
Various secondary panels the organisation of sports activities and events, the quality of
a) The panel must be fixed to the floor or the wall, and equipped the facilities available is of the utmost importance for pleasure
with shatter-proof glass doors, to prevent accidental switching in and the outcome of the competition. Space, a good playing
on or off of the instruments within. surface, heating/cooling, safety provisions, etc. are all of major
b) Each section of the panel must have its own independent importance.
input, be completely separated from the others by internal One essential contribution to a successful sports venue, which
separators and equipped with a door. General knife switches is still not always recognised as such, is the standard and
should prevent the door from being opened when in the quality of the lighting system. This, of course, is not only for TV
“closed” position, thus safeguarding against accidental contact transmissions, where lighting levels of sufficient quality are an
with live components. There must also be overload protection absolute necessity to assure an optimal television transmission,
diaphragms on the connecting terminals of the input knife but also for the general practising of the sports, guaranteeing,
switches. for example, a clear view of the components, of objects like
c) In general, in order to subdivide the zones and installation the ball and, of course, the indispensable marking of the
units served by the respective secondary panels, the following competition area itself.
sectors of use should applied: On too many occasions, sports activities and events have been
-- Main court and tribunes. allocated to indoor venues with insufficient and/or inappropriate
-- Warm-up and workout halls. lighting systems, which often necessitate costly supplements
or modifications, normally on a temporary basis. Inadequate
-- Changing rooms and other service rooms.
112
lighting spoils not only the pleasure and interest of the players, As the competence level of athletes increases so too does the
but also the comfort of the spectators in both the venue and at speed of the action, the visual task becomes more difficult,
home watching their TV. requiring more light of a higher quality.
This chapter has been prepared with the simple purpose of Sports lighting classes
providing the owners and directors of all commercial and public In general, five levels of sporting activities are recognised:
basketball venues, together with their managers of in-house international and national, regional, local, training and leisure.
corporate facilities, with basic recommendations on lighting These levels are related to the standards of play, and the viewing
systems. The information is also for the benefit of the architect, distances of the spectators. These five levels do not all require
the consultant, the engineer as well as the ultimate installer, who the same quality of lighting. Lower standards are clearly more
is employed to design and install an artificial lighting system in acceptable for leisure sport than for national competitions. To
a new venue or an existing stadium. cover all five activity levels, three lighting classes are defined:
User Requirements ·· Class I: Top-level competition such as national and interna-
The users of basketball facilities can be distinguished according tional matches, which generally involve large spectator ca-
to their activities: pacities with potentially long viewing distances. Top-level
-- the players training may also be included in this class.
-- the technical staff, referees, team officials ·· Class II: Mid-level competition such as regional or local club
-- the spectators arriving, watching the game and leaving the matches which generally involve medium-size spectator
sports facilities capacities with medium viewing distances. High-level training
-- the television and film crews, and the photographers recording may also be included in this class.
the event. ·· Class III: Low-level competition such as local or small club
The players, referees and officials must be able to see clearly matches which do not usually involve spectators. General
all that is going on in the competition area so that they can training and recreation also come into this class.
produce their best possible performance, and make accurate Competition level Class I Class II Class III
decisions. International and National •
Spectators should be able to follow the performance of the Regional • •
players and the action in an agreeable environment. The latter Local • • •
requirement means that they must be able to see not only the Training • • •
competition area but also its immediate surroundings. The
Leisure •
lighting should also enable spectators to safely enter and leave
the sports facility. With large groups this safety aspect is very Lighting Criteria
important. Horizontal Illuminance
For television, and film coverage, the lighting must be able to ensure Knowing the general user requirements, it is possible to determine
that high quality colour images can be obtained, not only of the the lighting criteria for each of the different levels of activity. The
overall action, but also close-ups of the players and spectators purpose of this section, therefore, is to identify these lighting
alike. Close-up images are important to convey the emotions and criteria and, wherever possible, to derive the lighting parameters
atmosphere in a stadium to the viewers watching at home. of interest in each case.
The illuminated playing surface forms a major part of the Surface Illuminance
field of view for the players, officials and spectators. It is the The illuminance on a vertical plane also has to ensure that the
illuminance on this horizontal plane, at ground level, commonly ball in flight can be followed at any time and at the relevant
referred to as the horizontal illuminance (Eh), that chiefly serves position and height above the competition area by the players,
to establish the adapted state of the eye, by creating a stable officials and spectators. Also the illumination of the basketball
visual background against which people and objects will be goal should be guaranteed optimal.
seen. Because of this and because the illuminated field is The need for a maintained illuminance
necessary for the players, spectators and cameras as a visual The illuminance value specified for a particular level of activity
background, an adequate horizontal illuminance on the court is is that which should be present at all times. Therefore, the
important. installation should not fall below this value throughout its life.
To ensure safety of movement for the spectators when entering During the life of a lighting system, the light output will fall mainly
and leaving the stands or surroundings, adequate horizontal due to light output depreciation of lamps, but also due to dirt
illuminance in these areas is also required. in the environment collecting on the light-emitting surfaces of
Vertical Illuminance the floodlights.
Because we are generally interested in following the progress The light loss due to the collection of dirt is difficult to estimate
of the players and the ball, which can be approximated as and will vary for different locations around the world. The light
vertical surfaces, it is the illuminance on the vertical surfaces output depreciation from lamps is rather easy to determine as
(Ev) which describes best what we see. However, experience lamp manufacturers publish this type of data. The light losses
shows that where the human observer is concerned, there is a due to the dirt and to the lamp flux depreciation should be
good relationship between vertical and horizontal illuminance. combined as a maintenance factor.
Therefore, for all activities, with the exception of television Uniformity
broadcasting, if the specified horizontal illuminance is provided Good illuminance uniformity is important in order to avoid
and the design rules are followed, the vertical illuminance will adaptation problems for both players and spectators. If the
be sufficient. uniformity is not adequate, there is a risk that an object or player
The scene illuminance, and more particularly the vertical details, like sponsor logos and emotions, will not be clearly
illuminance, has a major influence on the quality of the final seen at certain positions on the competition area.
television or film picture. To guarantee an optimal view and Uniformity is expressed as the ratio of the lowest to the highest
identification of players from all directions, specified illuminances (U1=Emin/Emax) illuminance and as the ratio of the lowest to
on vertical planes at a height of 1.5m are required. the average (U2=Emin/E-average) illuminance. Also the ratio of
For television or filming with fixed camera positions, it is the uniformity of the illuminances at a single point over the four
sufficient to ensure that the illuminances on planes at right vertical planes facing the sides of the competition area should
angles to the camera positions are adequate. be considered.
In the case of an unrestricted choice of camera positions, Even when the uniformity ratios as defined above are acceptable,
the vertical illuminance on planes facing all four sides of the changes in illuminance can be disturbing if they occur over
competition area should be taken into account. too short a distance. This problem is most likely to arise
when panning a television camera. Therefore, the illuminance
114
uniformity for TV/film coverage at a certain grid point has to be zero glare and 100 represents saturation.
expressed as a percentage change from the average adjacent Until recently it has not been possible to quantify or measure
grid points. This is called the uniformity gradient. glare for outdoor sports lighting installations. Therefore,
To obtain optimal visual conditions for cameras, the ratio guidelines for the positioning of floodlights were necessary. The
between the average illuminances in the horizontal and vertical development of the Glare Rating GR assessment method has
planes should be considered. led to a reliable system that can be used to make a qualitative
Colour and colour properties of lamps statement about the suitability of a lighting system before it is
Colour perception is important in most sports and, while some installed.
colour distortion, attributable to artificial lighting is acceptable, Modelling and shadows
there should be no problem to distinguish between different Modelling is the ability of the lighting to reveal form and texture.
colours. This “modelling” ability is particularly important to provide
There are two important aspects of the colour properties of a pleasant overall impression of the athletes, objects and
lamps: spectators on and around the playing field.
·· The colour appearances of the light itself. This is the colour An installation where light only comes from one direction will
impression of the total environment created by the lamps. cause harsh shadows and poor modelling. The players will
·· The colour rendering properties of the lamps used. This appear to be pushed into the background and will only be seen
describes how faithfully a range of colours can be reproduced from the same direction as that from which the light comes.
by a light source. From all other directions they will be seen as a dark silhouette
Both the colour appearance and the colour rendering properties only.
of lamps are completely dependent upon the spectral energy The design of the lighting systems for basketball facilities should
distribution of the light emitted. An indication of the colour be based on light coming from at least two directions (side
appearance of a lamp can be obtained from its correlated lighting) or ideally from as many directions as possible to create
colour temperature in degrees Kelvin, indicated as Tk, which a good visibility and modelling for players and spectators in all
vary mainly between 2000 and 6500k. The lower the colour directions.
temperature, the warmer the colour impression of the light; the
Lighting Recommendations for Non-Televised Events
higher the colour temperature, the cooler or more bluish the
Where basketball facilities are to be used for all levels of activity
impression of the light.
including recreation, training, club competitions and international
The colour rendering properties of a light source can be
levels for non-televised events, it is mainly necessary to provide
indicated by its colour rendering index Ra, expressed as
a horizontal illuminance suitable for the required level of activity.
numerical values from 0-100. A light source having a colour
Tables 1 and 2 indicate the lighting requirements necessary for
rendering index of 100 will represent all scene colours faithfully
indoor and outdoor basketball events.
and can be compared with daylight.
Glare restriction Class Horizontal illuminance Colour rendering
Glare can have a disturbing effect on the visual comfort and E average (lx) E min / E av Ra
performance of both players and spectators. Glare is expressed I 750 lux 0,7 60
as the Glare Rating (GR) in the range 0-100, in which 0 represents II 500 lux 0,7 60
III 200 lux 0,5 20
116
Table 1: Lighting requirements for non-televised indoor events. Obstrusive Light

To safeguard and enhance the night time environment, in the
Class Horizontal illuminance GR Colour rendering
case of outdoor lighting installation, it is necessary to control
E average (lx) E min / E av Ra obtrusive light, which can present physiological and ecological
I > 500 lux > 0,7 < 50 > 60 problems to the surroundings and to people. In some cases,
II > 200 lux > 0,6 < 50 > 60 local authorities or municipalities have their own guidelines
III > 75 lux > 0,5 < 55 > 20 on such matters and their advice should always be sought. If
Table 2: Lighting requirements for non-televised outdoor not, the recommendation from CIE2 Publication 1503 could be
events. applied.
To ensure the continuation of the game in the event of lighting It should be noted that stray light falling outside the playing
failure, the lighting level shall be at least the Class III level area cannot be effectively controlled by lowering the mounting
specified. To guarantee recommended average illuminances, heights of the floodlights. This only results in luminaires being
during the whole period of operation of an installation, the aimed in a more vertical direction causing even more glare.
illuminances should never fall below the indicated values. All Lighting Recommendations for Televised Events
the recommended average illuminances indicated above are
Illuminance
therefore maintained values. Usually a maintenance factor is
Where colour television broadcasting is a requirement, it is
specified to compensate for ageing and soiling of the light
necessary to provide an adequate vertical illuminance across
sources, reflectors and front glasses. In the absence of relevant
the scene viewed by the camera. If the vertical illuminance is not
information, it is recommended to use a maintenance factor of
sufficient, good quality broadcast pictures will not be possible.
0.8
Television cameras are not able to adapt to changes and
Glare rating
fluctuations in lighting level as quickly as the human eye.
For outdoor basketball fields, the glare rating is assessed on
Therefore this limitation must be taken into account when
a scale from 0-100 GR where higher GR values indicate more
designing lighting systems for televised events.
uncomfortable situations and lower GR values indicate the
A television camera will be viewing predominantly vertical
more comfortable situations. The threshold of discomfort glare
objects at a height of 1.5m above the ground. For the purpose of
is determined at a GR value of 50, therefore a GR value of 55 is
specifications, the vertical illuminance should be specified
accepted for Class III outdoor basketball lighting installation.
as the illuminance on a vertical plane 1.5m above the ground,
The calculated GR value depends on the diffuse reflectance of
facing the direction of the television camera as shown in the
the competition surface.
table below.
It should be assumed that the playing field will have diffuse
For the coverage of basketball events there is a main camera
reflective properties of between 15 and 20%. However, synthetic
position fixed in the middle of the sideline. This camera is used
fields will have a much lower value of approximately 5-10%. The
to maintain an overall view and continuity of the action over
glare formula is designed for use with surfaces with diffuse
the entire area. For cameras used in this way, the calculations
reflective properties.
should be made specifically for these cameras as described
For the five observer positions indicated, the glare rating
above. It is now common for many cameras to be used, and
assessment should include all calculated grid points of the
2 CIE - Commission Internationale d’Eclairage = International Commission on Illumination
principal playing area (PPA). 3 Publication no. 150 = Guide on the Limitation of the Effects of Obtrusive Light from Outdoor Lighting
Installations
distributed around the arena to obtain close - up action shots balanced brightness; the ratio between the average vertical
from along side each event area. Up to ten cameras are used and horizontal illuminance should be as closely matched as
today during a basketball event. However, each camera is possible, but should not exceed the ratio of 0.5:2, i.e.. the
required to cover a small area of the total competition area. It horizontal illuminance should not be less than half the vertical
is therefore not practical to make calculations for each camera illuminance or greater than twice the vertical illuminance.
over the whole competition area. To ensure that the reactions of spectators can be captured, there
Further details on camera location can be found in Annex 1, must be adequate lighting on the spectator areas immediately
FIBA TV Manual (FIBA premium standard production plan). adjacent to the competition area. The average illuminance
In situations where unrestricted camera positions are used, it is towards the main camera for the first 12 rows of seats should
recommended to calculate the vertical illuminances towards all be between 10 and 25 % of the average illuminance of the court
four sides of the competition area and look at the situation for towards the main camera; above the first 12 rows, the light level
each camera for the appropriate viewing area. must decrease uniformly.
When this type of calculation is applied, the uniformity between Illuminance uniformity
the four vertical calculations at a single grid point must be: When a camera pans across the competition area, it is important
Evmin/Evmax ≥0.5. that the illuminance does not vary greatly as this would cause
This ensures that the modelling for the television camera will the camera to adjust its exposure, thus creating a change in
be high enough to ensure the television picture has a well picture brightness.
Illuminance Light source
Colour Colour
Average Gradient Uniformity
Temperature Rendering
Competitions Description
Ug U1 U2
(lux) (°K) (Ra)
(%/2m) (Emin/Emax) (Emin/Eave)
E Cam > 2000 < 10 > 0.6 > 0.7

Level 1 5500 to 6000 >= 90
Eh 0.75 to 1.5 * E cam < 10 > 0.7 > 0.8
E Cam > 1400 < 10 > 0.6 > 0.7

Level 2 5500 to 6000 >= 90
Eh 0.75 to 1.5 * E cam < 10 > 0.7 > 0.8
E Cam > 1000 < 20 > 0.5 > 0.6

Level 3 4000 to 600 >= 80
Eh 0.5 to 2 * E cam < 20 > 0.6 > 0.7
118
An adequate level of uniformity of the horizontal illuminance as Glare Restriction

well as of the vertical illuminance is required to create balanced Direct Glare
lighting conditions so that the television cameras do not Glare should be limited due to its detrimental effect on visual
continually have to adapt to a different light level. performance.
It is also important that the change in the lighting level over a The procedures for measuring the limitation of glare are mainly
given distance is not too great. The gradient calculation per developed with a horizontal viewing direction and a regular
grid point shall be considered to assess this. layout of ceiling-mounted luminaires. Generally, the viewing
Emergency lighting for broadcasting continuity direction of an active athlete will constantly change, however
For the broadcasting of major international events, it is in basketball, there are frequently occurring viewing directions,
desirable that, in the event of a power failure, the continuity of where discomfort glare must be limited as far as possible.
television broadcasting can be guaranteed. It is recommended The arrangement of the luminaires must take account of these
that an emergency TV lighting mode is incorporated and that viewing directions. The luminaire aiming angle (from downward
the average illuminance provided should not fall below 1000 vertical) should be <= 65° and the intensity of the light source
lux, neither for specified camera locations nor for unrestricted should be adapted in relation to the installation height.
camera locations, for which appropriate calculations should be Indirect Glare
provided. Speculate reflection occurs when light strikes a surface and is
To guard against total power failures, it is recommended that reflected from it at the same angle at which it struck, the same
there is an emergency power supply to support the emergency way in which a mirror reflects light.
TV lighting mode. This can be a generating system, a totally A basketball court with significant speculate components can
separate incoming mains circuit or a battery backed-up no- cause glare to persons or television cameras looking across
break system. The power supply shall incorporate redundancy the playing court. This occurs because the specular reflection
or external back up to ensure that the continuity of the television from the court causes a mirror image of the floodlight reflected
broadcast can be guaranteed. toward an observer for some viewing directions. It is difficult to
Colour properties of the lamp design a lighting system to cope with this as it cannot easily be
For the purposes of lighting for television broadcasting, the predicted where problems will occur, due to the infinite number
quality of the light sources used should have a colour rendering of viewing directions possible.
index not less than Ra 80 and the colour temperature should be To overcome this problem, it is recommended limiting the
between 4000k and 6000k. specular reflective properties of the court surface. This then
In practice, it appears that light sources with a colour temperature becomes a part of court specifications rather than of the lighting
greater than 5500k and a colour rendering index greater than system.
Ra 90 are best suited for the coverage of major events. The It should be noted that this is a common problem, as court may
high colour rendering index, greater than Ra 90, ensures that have a top surface causing a “shiny” effect. It is assumed that
colours are vividly reproduced to enhance the general quality if the specular reflections can be limited to less than 5%; this
of broadcast images. can be avoided.
In large sports halls, large video screens and/or scoreboard
systems are now commonplace. Where this is the case, care
must be taken to ensure that luminaires are not positioned too 1. All lighting installations shall:
close to these screens as this could cause glare for persons -- Be in accordance with the national safety requirements for
looking up at the screen. electrical equipment in the respective countries.
Summary of recommended lighting levels for televised 2. For level 1, the strobe light system shall have:
events -- A wiring harness for the installation of four lines, one in each
FIBA has defined three competition levels for televised events. corner of the playing court.
The table below defines the lighting levels required during -- Each line with the ability to power a set of four strobe
televised events organised by FIBA. lights.
The average values above shall be achieved during the event;
-- Each set with synchro-cabling and accessibility for the
usually a maintenance factor is specified to compensate
photographers via a switch exchange located in the vicinity
for ageing and soiling of the light sources, reflectors and
of the basket support structure.
front glasses. In the absence of relevant information, it is
-- Each set located at a distance of at least 5m from the
recommended using a maintenance factor of 0.8.
boundary line and at a height of 15m recommended)
In the event of a power failure, the lighting system should
-- Four sockets for the strobe lights located 2m from the
provide Level 3 conditions for broadcasting continuity.
flashes. Each socket shall be separate and protected against
Also as already mentioned at the beginning of this chapter
interference between the lamps (thermal recognition
dedicated to lighting recommendations for televised events,
differential magnet)
the average illuminance towards the main camera for the first
-- The harness installed safely and out of the reach of the
12 rows of seats should be between 10 and 25 % of the average
spectators.
illuminance of the FOP towards the main camera; above the
-- The flashes installed safely to prevent them from falling.
first 12 rows, the light level has to reduce uniformly.
3. Individual flash photography is not permitted.
Glossary:
E Cam: Camera illuminance; quantity of light into the direction of a Lighting Design
camera, at grid points 1.5m above the FOP The lighting design will define the quantity, type and positioning
E h: Horizontal illuminance; quantity of light at grid points on the of the luminaires necessary to achieve the lighting parameters
FOP for the chosen level of activity.
Ug: Uniformity gradient; the percentage difference of illuminance The illuminance value indicated for a particular level of activity
between adjacent grid points is considered as the minimum value to which illuminance is
U1: Uniformity of illuminance; calculated as E min/E max allowed to fall during its lifecycle and is termed “maintained
U2: Overall uniformity of illuminance; calculated as E min/E ave
illuminance”.
E min: Minimum illuminance on a grid
Design proposals must take into account that the light output
E max: Maximum illuminance on a grid
of a lighting installation will fall over a given period of time. This
E ave: Average illuminance on a grid
will give facility owners or operators the reassurance that the
FOP: Field of Play
Grid: The basic layout of measuring and calculation points over the lighting will always comply with competition regulations, and
FOP provide a clear indication of the facility’s maintenance costs.
As well: Any design proposal shall clearly indicate the average
120
illuminance and uniformity achieved and the point (in hours) (LOR). This ratio must be considered in conjunction with the
after which the installation will no longer achieve the illuminance light distribution, which is the availability of the luminaire to
level stipulated for a particular activity level. Lamp data should direct the light where it is needed. It is important to remember
be provided to verify such statements. that the mounting positions of the luminaires can influence
The area for which the calculations have been made should be the light distribution. There are other criteria to consider when
in compliance with the indicated calculation grid. Any additional selecting luminaires:
calculations provided shall be clearly explained. ·· Compliance with the luminaire standard EN 60598, which is
The lighting design should meet all the required lighting parameters. the norm for luminaire electrical safety.
This has to be proven by computer-aided lighting designs. ·· IP rating, which is the resistance to dust and water (for outdoor
Calculations use).
For computer calculations to be meaningful it is necessary to ·· Maximum ambient temperature. This is particularly relevant
first specify the area for which calculations should be made. for indoor venues.
The diagram below shows the area of interest for an international ·· Luminaire wind-drag factor. This will determine the required
basketball facility. The diagrams show the overall dimensions strength of the supporting structure outdoors.
of an approved basketball facility and the calculation grid to be ·· Weight.
used as the basis for all calculations, shown in the figures. .The ·· Ease of maintenance. Consider how accessible the lamp is
principal playing area (PPA) for basketball should be divided and how easily the reflector can be cleaned.
into 7x13 grid points and the calculated total playing area (TPA) ·· Ease of installation.
into 9x15 grid points.
Arrangement of luminaires
The use of computer-aided design systems is now commonplace
The lighting design for a basketball facility can be based on a
and enables numerous calculations to be made relatively quickly.
number of basic floodlight arrangements. The luminaires can
Consequently, it is recommended that, for design purpose,
be mounted on poles for outdoor venues or on the stadium
calculations be made with a maximum interval between
structure itself for indoor venues.
calculation points. The use of a grid with this definition allows
The possible column arrangements and permanent floodlight
the designer to assess the uniformity and illuminance gradient,
positions are too numerous to list. The drawings indicated in
ensuring that undesirably very high or very low values will be
this guide are for illustration purposes only and may, in practice,
present when the system is installed. If a larger calculation grid
need adapting to meet the specific circumstances of individual
is used, it is possible that these high or low values could fall
site locations.
between the grid points and not be seen in the calculations.
In view of the constant advancement in lighting technology, it
Lamp and luminaire selection is always advisable to seek the advice of a lighting professional
The principal factors for lamp selection are: lumen output, lumen when planning a refurbishment or a new installation. A lighting
depreciation, lamp life, energy consumption, colour rendering professional will be able to advise on the best solution to a
and colour temperature (appearance). It is important to find customer’s specific needs and circumstances, as well as carry
the right balance between these factors in order to create a out the necessary design work. This is particularly important
successful lighting installation. where major stadia are concerned as there are now many
The efficiency of a luminaire is evaluated by its light output ratio factors which must be considered when planning and making
design proposals for these types of facilities, which cannot be they are installed, the material should be diffuse and preferably
fully explained in this kind of Guide. screened (e.g. baffles). Windows should, for the same reason,
Selecting mounting height in major venues always be installed at a height of at least 4.5m above court
Where lighting systems are intended for colour television level.
broadcasting, the mounting heights and positions selected Cost of ownership
must be based on the furthest aiming points used and not on There is a wide variety of lighting systems available on the
the centre field line or point. Floodlights will generally need market and it might be tempting to opt for the cheapest solution,
to be aimed at the far sides of the competition area and will however, it is important to bear in mind that in most cases you
therefore need to be mounted at a greater height. get what you pay for and the cheapest luminaires may have
The lighting designer should be given the freedom to position reduced photometric efficiency, be made from low-quality
the floodlights to provide the best technical solution for a given materials or the manufacturer may have little expertise and
situation. Mounting positions are often limited in large venues provide poor levels of support. For this reason, it is important
due to the architecture of the structure. Lighting equipment to follow the recommendations in this Guide when assessing
should not obstruct large video screens which may be in use. the most appropriate lighting design.
A glare rating assessment will ensure that a specific design A cost-of-ownership study should also be carried out, taking
proposal is suitable for a particular purpose. into account the following factors:
Mounting arrangements for indoor basketball Quantifiable aspects

Luminaires should not be positioned directly over the PPA to ·· Initial cost of luminaires and lamps
prevent dazzling when players look up towards the light source ·· Number of luminaires needed to achieve the required result
to follow the ball. It is better to install the luminaires outside the ·· Ease of installation
field boundaries. The mounting height of luminaires should be at ·· Ease of maintenance
a free height of at least 8m above the court surface. As players ·· Quality of luminaire materials/likely lifetime of product
do need to look up from time to time, it is advised to guard ·· Power consumption
against glare by reducing the contrast between the luminaires
·· Competent support from the manufacturer-is this available?
and the ceiling. Furthermore in basketball, luminaires should
If not, what will a consultant cost?
not be positioned within a 6m radius of the baskets.
·· Cost of gear replacement
Drawing of the luminaire-free area around the basket
·· Efficiency of the gear system, taking into account ballast
Particularly where a court has polished floors, the luminaires
losses.
should be positioned in such a way that light not reflected in
the direction of the spectators or the cameras Main cameras Less quantifiable aspects
are normally located in the stands at right angles to the long Even during non-televised events, the competitors, judges and
side of the court. Secondary cameras are positioned behind spectators attach great importance to their sport and expect
the basket support structures and endlines. the lighting to work effectively.
In the design phase of indoor basketball facilities, glare and In the case of televised events, the sponsorship for the event and
loss of contrast can be avoided by excluding the installation of the status of the venue depend very much on the performance
rows of transparent roof segments above the PPA. However, if of the lighting. It is not wise to rely on a poor system.
A good quality lighting system is a simple way to ensure
122
optimum conditions for an event to take place and the right output will also be lower and adversely affect the performance
ambiance to ensure the event is enjoyed by the participants of the lighting scheme.
and the spectators, both in the arena and at home. Lighting measurements should take place on the same grid
point used for the calculation and should be carried out
Installation and Operation
using a calibrated luxmeter and all the appropriate measuring
Installation
equipment.
Whether it is on poles for outdoor installations or on the structure
A difference between the measured and calculated values is
of the venue for indoor installations, it is important to remember
likely to occur as a result of:
the following points when installing luminaires:
·· Tolerances in manufacturing luminaires, lamps, etc.;
·· The luminaires should be installed as indicated in the lighting
design. ·· Tolerances in the photometric measurements;
·· Sufficient space should be given for the luminaires to be ·· Tolerances in position and aiming of luminaires.
aimed as indicated in the lighting study. Taking these tolerances into account, the differences between
the measured and calculated average values should be ≤10%.
·· Easy access should be planned for commissioning and
Additional differences can be caused by voltage variation,
maintenance.
which also has to be taken into account.
·· To meet these requirements in indoor venues, it is recommended
It is recommended that illuminance measurements are taken
installing luminaires on a narrow pathway, without light being
each year, before the competition season starts, to ensure that
cut off by any structural elements.
the lighting installation still meets the required illuminance and
Commissioning uniformity for which it was designed. These measurements can
Luminaires should be aimed as indicated in the lighting design. also be used to determine how close the installation is to the
This operation is crucial to guarantee that the lighting results required maintenance point.
predetermined during the calculation can be achieved in reality
Maintenance
and should be done in cooperation with a sports lighting
Once an investment has been made in a lighting system, regular
specialist.
maintenance should be carried out to ensure the system
During the final stage, illuminance measurements should be
continues to perform as intended.
carried out to check the lighting levels provided by the lighting
The maintenance of lighting systems must not only include the
installation. After switching on the lighting, sufficient time
replacement of lamps but also the inspection of electrical and
should be allowed to ensure that the lamps have warmed up.
mechanical components and the replacement of worn or failing
The warm-up time required depends on the type of lamps used;
items. This type of maintenance can be planned at regular
information on this will be given in the lamp manufacturer’s
intervals and will usually avoid unexpected system failures.
specifications.
In addition to illuminance measurements, it is necessary to Emergency Lighting
measure the supply voltage at the input to a group of luminaires Emergency lighting systems must be provided in locations
or at the base of the lighting column. This is because, if the accessible to the public, like the basketball hall.
supply voltage deviates greatly from the nominal supply voltage The primary objective of emergency lighting is to provide
of the floodlight, the light output will vary as a percentage adequate visual conditions to avoid panic and facilitate safe
difference. If the supply voltage is lower than required, the light evacuation of people from a building during a power failure.
Battery-backed safety lighting devices are designed to come is almost a must nowadays, not only because of the increasing
on automatically when the power goes out and continue to number and types of sporting events that attract the public
operate long enough to evacuate a building. and but also the increase in building and management costs
In most countries, states or towns, statutory regulations (resulting from greater demands in quality of service by users
relating to emergency lighting already exist. For this reason, and in higher safety standards).
the appropriate authority should always be consulted before The acoustics in a sports facility represent an aspect which
commencing the design of a specific emergency lighting system. requires special attention, since each room and hall has its own
Where such a regulation does not exist, reference should be particular purpose and therefore quite different requirements.
made to the European Standard EN 1838 (Lighting Applications What is more, the structural and functional nature of a building
-Emergency Lighting). can also affect the acoustics inside a building.
It is often very difficult to integrate a sound system in already
Acoustics in Sports Facilities
existing structures, due to the prevailing structural and
By Mauro Barducci
architectural aspects.
Sound engineer and sound environmental consultant
Large sports facilities must be equipped with a sound system
Introduction
that meets the following requirements:
When planning a sports facility, it is important to consider
creating a structure suitable for other types of events and spin- ·· Use as a safety device to convey warnings in the case of
off activities such as music concerts, dance performances, emergencies;
and artistic sport shows. The multifunctionality of a complex ·· Use as a PA system to convey announcements throughout
table 4.A
AMPLITUDE
Sound pressure in dB Practical examples
130 Jet airplane at take off
120 Threhold if pain, pneumatic drill
115 Brass band from the first rows
110 Dancing floor in a discotheque, symphony orchestra from the first rows
105 Klaxon from a distance of 1m
100 New born baby crying
90 Cry of “goal”, percussion instruments at a distance of 10 m
Table 4.A 85 Background noise from a railway station bench
80 Noise in a crowded street, loud volume of a hi-fi set
70 Public speech
65 Washing machine
60 Background noise in a shop, limiti of normal conversation
50 Office, restaurant
40 Conference room, soft music, quiet bar
35 Rustling leaves, light wind
30 Silent club room
20 Very quiet room
0 Threshold of perception
Tab. n. 4.2 - Indicative values of acoustics pressure in normal every day life. The human ear cannot perceive acoustic pressures inferior to 0dB
124
the sports facility; service announcements (whereby the latter must also reach the
·· Reinforce a clear sound (of speech and music) to increase ancillary areas), and yet without disturbing the athlete areas.
the appeal of a sporting event; The main objective in a space dedicated to listening
·· Ensure that players can clearly understand the officials; to music (such as an auditorium or theatre) is to guarantee
·· Ensure that players can hear the instructions from the team excellent acoustic comfort and high quality sound diffusion
bench. within the space, paying particular attention to the timbric
This chapter describes the sound diffusion problems that can content and dynamics in the reproduction, direct or amplified,
be encountered in any hall hosting sporting events. Irrespective of voice or instruments.
of the technical system installed, the fact remains that a sound Modern facilities usually need some form of acoustic correction
system can improve the sound in all areas and help to correct which invariably entails treatment or modification of internal
the negative aspects in facilities requiring restoration. structures depending on the different intended uses. This can
The chapter will focus on the environment and how to best be done by measuring and testing the acoustic characteristics
exploit the acoustics of a sports hall in order to gain the most ante operam or by using specific calculation software that
out of the complex and the equipment. takes into account the different conditions of use (number of
The main objective in a space dedicated to sporting events spectators).
is to guarantee speech intelligibility to all spectators whatever Basically there are two types of intervention:
their position in the hall, both in terms of speaker comments and -- Treatment of the different internal surfaces with sound
table 4.B
SOUND PROPAGATION
Site Noise level dB Required Sound Level dB
Entertainment and recording studios
Television or radio studio 35
Recording studio 40
Monitoring studio 45
Theatre 40-45 65-80
Concert Hall 45-50 85-110
Cinema 50 70-80
Night club 75 95-110
SHOPS AND SUPERMARKETS
Boutique 55-65 70
Table 4.B Supermarket 65-70 75
Bar 60-65 65-70
WAITING ROOMS, PUBLIC BENCHES
Airport 65-70 75-80
Railway Station 80 85-90
Underground 90 95-100
SPORT FACILITIES
Gym 55-65 70-75
Swiming pools, ice skating rings 60-70 75-80
Multi-purpose facilities 75-80 90-95
Sport Facility at the moment a point is scored 90 90-95
PLACE OF WORSHIP
Church 50-55 60-65
Mosque 50-55 65-75
Tab. n.4.3 - Values of background noise in everyday life situation
126
absorbing/diffusing materials. is referred to as timbre. The sound spectrum represents the

-- Selection of an amplification and sound diffusion system combination of audible frequency bands ranging between
which covers all areas required and takes into account 20Hz and 20,000Hz. These bands are divided into octaves. The
the dimensions and characteristics of the hall as well as centre frequency values on the octave band are 31.5, 63, 125,
the different intended use. This system should be easy to 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, 16000Hz.
reconfigure and adjust to suit different situations. -- Sound propagation
Fundamental Concepts of Acoustics The rule for sound propagation in free field conditions is as
Sound, both useful (spoken and musical sound) and disturbing follows: in the case of a sound point source, for every doubling
(noise or other incidental background sounds), has two of distance there is a 6 dB drop in sound pressure level in that
fundamental characteristics: amplitude and frequency. point. The partially reflecting ground (where the source and
In terms of physics, sound refers to pressure perturbations listener are) increases the level calculated in this way by 0 to
(oscillatory) that propagate through a transmission medium (air), 6 dB. The attenuation due to absorption by the atmosphere
stimulating the hearing system. should also be calculated; however, this value is rather irrelevant
for distances less than 100m. (Table n. 4.B)
-- Amplitude
Amplitude refers to the intensity perceived by the hearing system Characteristics of the Sound Field of L arge Rooms
generated by an acoustic signal. Sound intensity (acoustic Unlike sound propagation in open spaces, in a closed
pressure level) is measured in decibels (dB). (Table n. 4.A) environment the acoustic field is made up of direct sound
It is important to bear in mind that a decibel is a logarithmic waves (source-listener) as well as sound waves reflected by the
unit (an increase of 10 dB decibels in the power of a signal is surfaces within the area.
equivalent to increasing its power by a factor of ten); decibels The acoustic quality depends on a number of different
are used to measure the sensitivity of the human ear which can
perceive sounds from very low-energy sounds (whisper, human
0
breathing, 10-20 dB) to very high-energy sounds (jet taking off
d B -10
120 dB).
-- Frequency -20
The speed of pressure oscillation (number of cycles per -30

second) determines the frequency of a sound. For humans, the
-40 Diagram 4.1
general range of hearing is between 20 Hz and 20,000 Hz (20
kHz). Frequency is the parameter that characterises the pitch -50
of sound, thus enabling sound to be perceived as low (grave),
-60
medium and high (acute). T10 T60
Normally, no sound is ever made up of one single frequency
(pure tone) but is a very complex combination of sounds with Tempo
different frequencies and amplitudes which together create an
acoustic signal with an overall amplitude and a combination
of frequencies. In terms of frequencies, the quality of sound diagram 4.1
elements: direct sound and diffused sound, delay of the many integrated with other criteria, still related to multiple reflections
reflections (due to the geometric and physical characteristics of but capable of highlighting the differences in quality in the
the room and walls), frequency response of the sound diffusion different points of a room caused by the imperfect diffusion
and absorption elements present; in other words, it depends and relative importance of direct and reverberated sound.
on the direct (source characteristics) and reverberated (room The reverberant sound field
characteristics) sound field. Limiting the initial time delay gap serves to increase the useful
The direct sound field sound; this improves speech intelligibility (sports events) and
The sound pressure level of the direct wave that reaches the music quality (performances).
listener depends on: If the initial time delay gap is greater than 50 milliseconds for
-- Power of the source. speech or 75 milliseconds for music, and the difference between
-- Directivity of the source. the level of the direct sound and reflected sound is significant
-- Source-receiver distance. (more than 10 dB), this may cause excessive prolongation of
the reverberation tail; in this case an echo may occur in which
-- Sound absorption along the propagation line. This includes
the reflected wave is perceived as a distinct and, therefore
the absorption caused by spectators and seating which is
disturbing, sound.
higher for a sliding tangential sound wave (especially at low
For a sound speed of 340 m/s, the gap limits of useful reflected
frequencies); therefore, absorption can be reduced by having
sound correspond to path-length differences between the
an inclined seating surface.
waves of 17 and 25 metres respectively.
-- Background noise (disturbing).
With regard to the quality of sound perceived by listeners, it is
Sound decay and reverberation time necessary to focus on the first part of the decay curve; the initial
Scientific research in the field of architectural acoustics began slope is extrapolated to 60 dB decay to obtain the parameter
with the work of American physicist, Wallace Clement Sabine of the T60 (RT).
who, at the beginning of the 20th century, recognised the
The following parameters are taken into account, calculated by
fundamental importance of the size of the room and the amount
extrapolating the initial decay slope to 60 dB; the parameters
of absorption surfaces present (reverberation). Sabine defined
correspond to the first 10-15 dB respectively:
reverberation time (T60) to be the number of seconds required
- T10 Early Decay Time (EDT)
for the intensity of sound to drop from a level of audibility 60 dB
- T15 Initial Reverberation Time
above the threshold of hearing to the threshold of inaudibility.
After this, researchers focused on defining a way of predicting Diagram 4.1 shows an example of the difference between T10
reverberation time and identifying the optimal T60 values and T60 on the basis of the graphic representation of the decay
according to the volume and use of a room. As research in sound pressure level.
progressed, it became obvious that an evaluation criteria The comparison between the T10 value and the conventional
based only on reverberation time had its limits and was only reverberation time T60 provides further information on the T60,
really useful in the case of perfect diffusion of reverberated as it highlights the linearity or non-linearity of the decay curve;
power within the room, in other words a situation which is not the curve is exponential only in conditions of perfect diffusion.
realistic. The Initial Time Delay Gap (ITDG) is another important parameter
The information provided by reverberation time has to be in the objective measurement of the acoustic quality of a room.
128
To define the acoustic quality of a room, it is also important to The T60 value depends on the volume of the room and total
take into account the reverberations that follow the initial ones, absorption of its internal surfaces; as the absorption of the
which create the so called reverberation tail. materials varies with the frequency, also the T60 varies with
The optimal combination of the two sound fields (direct and the frequency. In rooms of the same given shape, the T60 will
reverberated) varies according to the use of the room: speech increase as the size increases.
(sporting events) or music (different types of performances). In The optimal reverberation time value is between 1 and 2 seconds
fact, in the case of music events, a prolonged reverberation tail for different types of music, yet it should be less than 1 second
of each single sound element is preferred, compared to events for speech.
where speech intelligibility is required. When the use of reverberation time alone to predict the acoustic
It is important to remember that irregularities present on a quality of a room was found to be insufficient, another element
reflecting surface (due to shape or unevenness) transform it started to be taken into account: the energy ratio based on the
into a reflecting surface for low frequencies (long wave lengths) arrival time of energy related to a sound signal in a specific
and propagating surface for high frequencies. These reflection listening point, also called “acoustic ratio”
or selective diffusion phenomena may result in frequency These can be summed up as follows:
distortion: the sound signal that reaches the listener does a. useful signal/residual reverberation formula:
not have the same spectrum composition (timbre) as the one
Es
emitted by the source. Rs,r =
Er
Sorgente
He + h
h Diagram 4.2
sorgente
H
s
Hs Hs
He
He
s
Diagram 4.3
d p
h0 - s (Hs - He)
tg 0 =
sd
b. useful signal / total energy formula: create the “useful sound”, for satisfactory listening of sound
emissions.
Es
Rs,t = For a correct perception of the space by the listener (spatial
Et impression), the direction from which the first reflections arrive
is also important, particularly the lateral ones.
where: It is also important to remember that the architectural acoustics
-- Es (useful signal) is the sound energy perceived by a listener must not only meet the requirements of the spectator but also
within a given time delay from the moment in which the the needs of athletes (sporting events) and artists (music events).
direct wave arrives; Three or four carefully selected parameters can provide a useful
-- Er (residual reverberation) is the energy of a signal that assessment of the architectural acoustics of a hall.
reaches the listener after the above mentioned time; As regards the study of parameters in the planning phase,
-- Et is the total energy of a given sound signal, without limit in there are three main factors influencing the acoustics of large
terms of time of arrival. halls: the sound that reaches the listeners directly from the
sound source (direct sound), the early reflections, and the late
Acoustic Design of L arge Halls
reflections (reverberation).
The previous pages highlighted the importance of first reflections
with a short delay gap in relation to direct sound (T10, acoustic Direct Sound
source) the contribution of which is added to direct sound to The importance of reverberation, highlighted by Sabine’s
work, may lead planners to underestimate the contribution of
diagram 4.4 the direct sound field. Experience shows that the possibility
of receiving sound waves directly from the source, without
obstacles, and at an adequate level, is paramount in ensuring a
satisfying listening experience.
Therefore, the condition to be respected is of a geometric
nature and concerns the position of each listener vis-à-vis the
sound source and other listeners in the hall. This is illustrated
in the diagram below, which shows that the line of sight of each
spectator must be adequately inclined to enable the sound
Table 4.4
source to be seen without being blocked by the head of the
person sitting in front.
If Hs and He are respectively the height of the source and the
height of a listener compared to the floor, then the maximum
h’ = cost distance of the source at which the pit can be horizontal is
given by the following formula:
s
d= (Hs-He)
h
130
table 4.C
where s is the distance between two adjoining rows of seats
and h is the minimum incline of the line of sight.
TAB . 4 C - Some examples of the values of sound absorption coefficient “ α “
125 Hz 250 Hz 500 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 Khz The graph in Diagram n. 4.2 illustrates the maximum horizontal
Area occupied by the public 0.52 0.68 0.85 0.97 0.93 0.85 extension of the pit.
Area with seats upholstered with cloth without
0.44 0.60 0.77 0.89 0.82 0.70 Beyond this distance, the pit must be inclined at an angle
public
Area with seats upholstered in leather without defined by the following formula (Diagram 4.3):
0.40 0.50 0.58 0.61 0.58 0.50
public
Acceptable values for the parameters He, S and h are as
Area with hard wooden seats without public 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.08 0.12 0.10
follows:
Wall with plaster 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03
He= 1.00 ÷ 1.20m
Polished marble 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02
S= 0.90 ÷ 1.00m
Floor tiles or concrete 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03
h= 0.10 ÷ 0.20m
Parquet wood floor on concrete 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
Values of ϑ should not be greater than 15°÷20°.
Wooden floor joists 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.11 0.09 0.07
Instead of basing calculations on the spectators furthest away,
Linoleum flooring 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.04 on the horizontal and inclined plane respectively as in previous
Rubber flooring 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.08 diagrams, it is also possible to define an outline of the surface
Glass walls 0.30 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.07 0.04 that ensures the same visibility for all rows of spectators, as in
Average thickness of glass (window acoustic) 0.15 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.02 the following diagram.
Table 4.C
Curtains cotton (300 g/mq) a wall without drapery 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.25 0.30 The same method can be used to calculate the incline of a
balcony.
Velvet curtains 0.05 0.12 0.35 0.45 0.38 0.36
Another essential condition for a direct sound field is that it
Velvet curtains with little thin wall drapery 0.08 0.30 0.50 0.50 0.60 0.60
must have an adequate level even for the listeners who are
Velvet curtains with very heavy drapery wall 0.50 0.50 0.70 0.90 0.90 0.90
furthest away. (Diagram 4.4)
Carpet thin 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.20 0.20
Early Reflected Sound
Carpet heavy 0.10 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.30 0.30
The following conditions are necessary for early reflected sound
Porous acoustic plaster (not painted) 15 min 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.10
mm from walls and ceilings to contribute to form a useful signal:
max 0.10 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.30 0.20
-- Limited delay compared to direct sound,
Panel porous mineral fiber, according to min 0.10 0.30 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80
the thickness and mounting max 0.60 0.80 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 -- Sufficient level of reflected wave.
Panel porous wood fiber pressed to the wall 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.40 As mentioned above, the limit for the delay time gap is of 50
Wood panels, with space between the min 0.20 0.10 0.05 0.03 0.03 0.03 milliseconds for speech and 75 milliseconds for music which
panel and wall, depending on the thickness
of the panel and empty space max 0.40 0.25 0.15 0.10 0.10 0.05 corresponds to path-length differences between the waves
Wooden elements 0.21 0.22 0.28 0.20 0.20 0.20
(reflected and direct) of 17 or 25 metres respectively. For the
reflected wave to assist the useful signal, its intensity (sound
Suspended ceiling plaster, thickness 25 mm. 0.10 0.08 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04
energy) must be at least 10% the intensity of the direct wave. This
Sheet of aluminium foil shaped, drilled to 15% of
0.50 0.75 0.75 0.85 0.75 0.70
the area, with the rear of rock wool is valid for reflections from both the ceiling and side walls of a
Gypsum panel holes at 12%, with the rear of rock
wool
0.40 0.60 0.80 0.60 0.60 0.50 hall.
In the case of the side walls, it is important to note that different or an acoustic resonator. In large halls, the audience contributes
building specifications (constructional, architectural, seating- significantly to the overall required sound-absorption value.
capacity related) often restrict the most suitable building shape, Obviously, in order to obtain acoustic behaviour that does not
from an acoustics point of view. vary considerably according to the size of the audience, it is
This problem can be overcome by creating rough and irregular important, where possible, to use seats and structures that
side walls with vertical elements so they will reflect in a variety provide a similar sound absorption to that of the audience.
of different directions. Sound absorption by seated audience (and unoccupied seats)
If the ceiling and side walls do not provide sufficient useful can be calculated by attributing an absorption coefficient to the
reflections towards the listeners, acoustic reflectors can be audience area, occupied and unoccupied.
installed, with correctly shaped and adequately sized surfaces Examples of acoustic absorption coefficients a are shown in
to ensure that the incident energy is reflected consistently. table 4.C
Delayed Reflections and Reverberation Design Criteria of a Hall

As each reflection is usually accompanied by a partial diffusion, In light of the above, basic criteria for the design of a hall can
reverberation is characterised by a progressively increasing be defined with particular reference to its volume and surface
degree of diffusion. treatment.
In large halls, the first delayed reflections may occur after the c. Study the characteristics of the hall and sound amplification
50 (or 75) ms limit; these reflections can cause disturbances systems to guarantee a good level of direct signal to all
such as “echoes” if their intensity is greater than the regular spectators.
reverberation. d. Check the differences between the paths of the direct and
To identify the areas affected by “harmful” reflections in the reflected waves, respecting the “useful signal” limits and
building/reconstruction plans, it suffices to remember that these avoiding excessive delays. Surfaces which may cause
areas are those in which the difference between the distance reflected waves with an excessive delay must be treated with
of the image source and the real source is greater than the limit sound-absorbing material. To guarantee clarity, definition
distance (17 or 25 metres). and lateral efficiency, the early first reflected sounds must be
Disturbing reflections are not only caused by distance and delay sufficiently intense and come from directions different from
time but also by the shape (curve) of reflecting surfaces as they that of the direct sound. For this purpose, the hall ceiling may
may focus (or reduce) the reflected energy towards specific be used as reflectors in parts of the hall which can generate
areas, thus creating unwanted irregularities in the sound field. useful reflections, or, alternatively, the ceiling may be used to
Therefore, if “harmful” reflections cannot be avoided, the address harmful reflections outside the audience area. Side
solution is to treat the reflecting surfaces to render them sound walls can also be used as reflectors but only if the width of
absorbing and sound diffusing surfaces. the hall is limited. A rectangular plan usually offers good
There are three basic types of sound-absorbing materials distribution of reflected sound. Excessively flat and wide
available: porous sound-absorbing materials, vibrating panel halls tend to reduce the spatial impression, due to the lack of
and perforated resonant-absorbing panels. importance of the first lateral reflections. The surfaces which
In the first type of materials, sound absorption properties depend are furthest away (end walls) usually have to be treated to
on the porosity, while in the other two types, the properties are become sound-absorbing due to the excessive path-lengths
linked to resonance phenomena perhaps resulting from a panel
132
of the reflected waves. The ceiling can also be used for the having a detrimental effect on spectator comfort in some
acoustic correction of a hall, using treatments or suspended areas.
elements to improve the useful reflections or increase the In fact, in a large hall it is usually very difficult to obtain a
sound absorbing elements. reverberation time within the values theoretically required: this
e. To guarantee a sufficiently uniform sound field, a compact represents a limit in terms of music listening quality and is
shape must be achieved (one dimension should not be much even more problematic when it comes to speech intelligibility
greater than the others). (sporting events).
f. To avoid reciprocal multiple reflections and the flutter effect, A sufficient number of loudspeakers must be installed to
shapes which are too regular must be avoided (similar overcome these problems, in order to:
dimensions in different directions) and opposing walls must -- Reach each all spectators present;
not be parallel (if reflecting). -- Make sure that the sound levels generated are sufficiently
g. Harmful reflections are not only those which reach the listener consistent with the sound source distance constant;
with excessive delay and energy, but also those which, due
-- Achieve good loudspeaker directivity; loudspeakers must
to the shape for the reflecting surface, tend to focus the
be positioned so that in each point the sound generated by
sound energy only in certain points or create zones which
one single loudspeaker, or maximum two equidistant ones,
generate a non-uniform sound field. In these cases, the
prevails. The lateral overlapping of radiation cones from
surfaces causing the problem must be treated with sound-
sufficiently directive loudspeakers creates harmful delays
absorbing materials or diffusing structures. In multifunctional
between the two signals.
halls which call for the projection of various kinds of music,
-- Not to exceed the levels generated by each loudspeaker,
live and recorded, as well as speech, there may be a need to
thereby minimising the following “non useful” reflections
install elements and structures which can alter the acoustic
(reverberation tail).
characteristics in a hall, these may include mobile reflectors
or panels which can adjust their absorption characteristics. In this way, by avoiding sound systems with a reduced number
of high-power loudspeakers with little directivity, part of the
Sound System for a Hall acoustic problems usually encountered in large public halls
To guarantee adequate speech intelligibility and good can be solved. The acoustic problems are usually due to:
quality music sound in a large hall, as mentioned above, the
-- Not being able to treat the walls with sufficient sound-
characteristics of the hall must be studied alongside the
absorbing elements;
amplification and sound diffusion systems, in order to:
-- Various types of problems in the acoustic treatment of the
-- Guarantee a good direct signal level to all spectators;
ceiling;
-- Avoid multiple reflections characterised by excessive delay
-- The presence of a reflecting floor required for a sporting
time.
event;
It is best to avoid sound diffusion systems with excessive
-- The architecture of the hall having been designed without
power and reduced directionality as these are known to create
taking into account multiple reflections or critical points, as is
considerable non-uniformity in the power and quality perceived
often the case in “sports centres”.
by the audience, and could even interfere with an event, by
disturbing the protagonists (artists, athletes) or, alternatively,
134
Identification and Solution of Acoustic Problems of a Technological Video Surveillance Systems

Sports Hall Introduction
Large sports halls usually have considerable acoustic problems, Large events usually attract a considerable number of visitors
due to their large dimensions and expansive reflecting surfaces and so video surveillance systems are usually installed for
(cement or plaster walls and ceilings, windows, rigid and smooth security reasons. The systems are installed by the management
flooring suitable for sporting events). on their own initiative or following the request of public
These problems become even more pertinent when the same authorities. These systems, combined with other devices, offer
space is increasingly used for commercial activities or other greater efficiency in security management and enable fast
events, and will require recourse to experts in environmental intervention in the case of accidents or unfortunate incidents.
acoustics and sound diffusion system specialists. Video surveillance systems should therefore be included in the
In other words, the following steps are necessary: overall cost of a new sports facility or in the restoration of an
-- Study of the geometry of the hall, also in terms of the acoustic existing one, particularly if the facility is intended to host large
characteristics of the surfaces. events.
Video surveillance systems are also recommended for smaller
-- Identification of the distribution of the paths of the multiple
sports centres or outdoor ones to monitor a number of different
reflections and of any critical points.
area and rooms, as well as to deter vandals or intruders.
-- Calculation of the reverberation time in the different areas
This chapter deals with the video surveillance system for
of the hall at different frequency bands, also to identify any
high-level competition sports facilities with a large number of
resonance problems.
spectators.
-- calculation of sound-absorbing units required to reduce
Before installing a video surveillance system to monitor the
the reverberation time to values more in line with the limits
movement of spectators inside and outside the sports facility, a
recommended for the acoustic use, taking also into account
structural analysis of the facility itself must be conducted. This
the behaviour of the main acoustic parameters mentioned
chapter provides some guidelines for the design and installation
above;
of a video surveillance system.
-- choice of the surfaces to be treated and type of treatment,
First of all, video surveillance must not only be limited to the
sound absorbing and/or diffusing, taking into account the
inside of the building because, as recent facts have shown,
architectural limits and use limits, and the frequency responses
security is very important in the surrounding and neighbouring
of the hall;
area, in particular for preventing potential incidents.
-- design of the amplification and sound diffusion systems Recording equipment and monitors should be positioned in all
according to the aforementioned principles; the size of public areas, near entrances and exits, in order to supervise
this system must compensate for part of the remaining all movements near the outer perimeter of the sports facility.
acoustic problems of the hall by carefully selecting the power, In this way, every person or group of people can be monitored
directionality and position of the loudspeakers. from the outdoor area along the perimeter up to the entrance of
The sound diffusion system may also be modular so it can be the facility where controls are usually strengthened by security
adapted to the different conditions of use (sporting event, music officers within the building.
event, mixed activities). The recording equipment used to monitor the external areas
should also capture visual information on the inflow and outflow ·· An adequate number of radio channels, telephone lines and
of the following types of visitors: personal computers with Internet connection to communicate
·· Suspicious groups. with the public safety authorities.
·· Blacklisted fans. The amount of recording equipment required depends on the
·· Large groups of supporters. type of facility. It is important to be able to monitor the entire
Video surveillance systems must include at least the following venue as well as the immediate surrounding area. In this way,
equipment: any attempts to climb over the perimeter can be captured on
·· Auxiliary power supply in case of electrical interruptions. film.
·· Lighting system that guarantees full and effective visibility of It is essential that sufficient cameras are in place to record
the playing area, adequate lighting of spectator areas and all potential incidents or commotions, both inside and outside the
access areas, including external ones. facility, to enable the public safety authorities to identify people
if necessary. The cameras must be positioned out of reach of
·· Room to be used as a central control booth with good
the public and anchored securely so they do not vibrate.
visibility of the entire sports facility.
The most common recording equipment requested has the
·· Optical or digital recording equipment.
following features:
·· Digital photographic systems.
·· Horizontal and vertical movement and variation of the shooting
·· Multi-screen monitor for simultaneous viewing of the
angle controlled from the control booth.
different areas.
·· A maximum image resolution of 1024x576 pixels for
·· Thermal printers.
photographic systems and 768x576 pixels for analog television
·· Equipment for image transmission and data communication.
recording systems and 720x756 pixels for digital recordings.
·· Operators.
·· A Charge Coupled Device (CCD)4 for at least front-illumination
Control booth and a focal length of at least 75mm, with an optical
The minimum equipment required in a control booth should magnification of at least 5x.
be: ·· Sufficient luminosity to recognise visitors from profiles, also
·· Three Super VHS video recorders, or three DVCAM players/ at night and in individual video frames.
recorders, one to record/play the images shot outside the There must be one monitor for each video-camera, plus one for
sports facility, one for the images taken inside the building, each operator in the control room.
plus a spare one; Operators must be qualified to use the system. At least two
·· A sufficient number of monitors to view images from all operators are recommended: one to monitor the areas outside
operating cameras simultaneously, plus one monitor for each the building and the other for internal surveillance. The operators
operator in the central control room; may sit in the control room and work together, however each
·· A system to control the movements of the cameras and one must monitor his designated area independently.
recording/playing equipment;
Energy Saving Systems
·· Work stations complete with personal computer;
Over the last few years, the growing importance of the energy
·· Two thermal printers;
problem has led to the need for a rational use of energy and,
·· Equipment to transmit images;
4 Charge-coupled device, an electronic light sensor used in digital cameras
136
consequently, to a need to reduce and contain the cost of At present, research and experimentation is working on how
energy required for staging activities. to improve processes to exploit organic waste to produce
Prompted by Agenda 21, a global programme run by the United thermal energy. A wide range of opportunities are available to
Nations, many countries have agreed to adopt policies aimed at reduce energy consumption. In this chapter we look into the
sustainable development. Over recent years, the International most common aspects and the methods most regularly used
Olympic Committee (IOC) has also turned its attention to for sports facilities.
environmental protection and sustainable development, The convenience of using one or more renewable energy
culminating in the adoption of the Olympic Movement’s sources varies from country to country according to the
Agenda 21. The section on “Sport and Environment” states geographic position, sun exposure, available materials, national
that energy saving in sports facilities is a priority issue. energy policies, type of management and lifespan of the sports
Most of the industrialised nations have ratified the Kyoto facility.
Protocol5, committing to reduce the emission of pollutants In sports facilities, energy is used to create the artificial
(carbon dioxide and five other greenhouse gases, i.e. methane, environmental conditions necessary for the different activities.
nitrous oxide, hydrofluorocarbons, perfluorocarbons and Energy consumption can be divided as follows:
sulphur hexafluoride) by at least 5.2% compared to the
·· Air conditioning.
emissions registered in 1990 -considered as the reference year
·· Hot water.
- over the 2008-2012 period. In recent years, a great deal of
·· Indoor lighting of sports areas, ancillary services and
research has been carried out on methods, technologies and
facilities , offices, etc.
strategies to reduce energy consumption. This has led to the
·· Outdoor lighting: car parks, pedestrian walkways, green
growth and diffusion of an environmentally beneficial energy
areas and fencing.
saving culture, the ultimate aim of which is to limit the release
·· Power for different machines.
of carbon dioxide into the atmosphere.
A number of different factors can significantly influence the
Building planning methods have also been influenced by
consumption of energy:
this bid to protect the environment because the energy
consumption behaviour of a building can be anticipated early ·· The relation between the building and surrounding environment,
on in the planning phase, thus enabling energy requirements such as position, exposure to wind, local climate, presence of
to be defined in advance. The choice of energy sources can natural and artificial barriers and exposure to sun.
therefore be foreseen, studied and optimised from the start ·· Building specifications: volume, extension and characteristics
of a project on the basis of traditional innovated sources or of external surfaces, internal layout, in relation to the internal
renewable energy sources (sun, wind, geothermal energy, etc). environmental characteristics and technological systems.
Other methods or technological systems can also be considered ·· Technological characteristics: construction method,
as renewable energy sources as long as they derive from raw specifications of materials, fixtures and fittings.
materials, such as biomasses from sugar or wood, obtained ·· Environmental characteristics: temperature, relative air
in a sustainable way, and provided they help to reduce energy humidity, hot water temperature, light level and sound level.
consumption. ·· Characteristics of machinery: quantity, power efficiency, type
of power used and installation methods.
5 The Kyoto protocol is an international environmental agreement on global warming, signed in the Japanese
town of Kyoto on 11 December 1997 by over 160 countries during the 3rd Conference of Parties of the ·· Application procedures: thermo-technical controls, level of
United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC).
lighting and sound, maintenance type and method. ·· Sports facilities requiring air conditioning should be located
Energy-saving strategies in windy areas with little exposure to the sun.
In basketball facilities for high-level competitions, most of the ·· The best solutions for architectural construction and plans
energy consumption (98-99%) is used to heat the halls, ancillary must be found in order to best reduce the volumes to be
service areas and public facilities, offices, etc. as well as for the heated and cooled, thus eliminating thermal bridges.
production of sanitary hot water. 72–78% of this thermal energy In the case of already existing buildings, meeting these
is absorbed by the air-conditioning and ventilation systems, objectives may entail significant changes and investments. If
and the rest for the production of hot water. a facility is in need of restoration, it is generally advisable to
On the basis of these observations, and considering that opt for the more economic measures, particularly with regard
a sports facility or outdoor sports complex represents a to correct use and maintenance of the systems. The economic
particular type of building or structure, complicated in terms of return should be estimated on the basis of the costs.
structure and activities carried out, the most common energy- The main strategies for reducing energy consumption in existing
saving methods used in the planning phase are inspired by bio- facilities can be summed up as follows:
architecture. These methods include: ·· Check that the hall temperature is suitable for the proposed
·· Increasing the building’s thermal inertia (prevent thermal activities (16°C-19°C for basketball, 18°C-20°C for all other
dispersion through the external shell and floors, and prevent activities); the temperature in other areas should not exceed
the formation of thermal bridges). 20°C.
·· Allowing building materials to breathe. ·· Keep machinery in good working order; this means regular
·· Using natural ventilation for cooling in the summer or for air cleaning of boilers, drainage pipes, burners and filters.
exchange, exploiting the position of the rooms according to ·· Adjust thermostats and other control and adjustment
the orientation of the building and prevailing winds. devices.
·· Fitting all facades prone to overheating and solar glare with ·· Only heat the areas actually used.
appropriate screening. ·· Eliminate air dispersion through doors and windows.
·· Planting trees and green areas to protect the building from
·· Exploit natural lighting as much as possible by keeping
winds and to humidify the external temperature.
internal surfaces and windows clean.
·· Collecting and recycling rainwater to flush toilets, water the
·· Keep lamps and lighting devices in good working order by
green areas and clean the common areas.
regularly cleaning, and replacing the lamp bulbs.
·· Using glass surfaces for natural lighting.
·· Avoid increasing the power of the lamp bulbs when replacing
·· Using renewable energy sources and geothermal energy.
them (reduced efficiency is mainly due to aging or lack of
These principles suggest that
cleaning).
·· Solar radiation can be exploited for heating and lighting
·· Only light the areas in use and adjust the lighting level to the
if the position of the different parts of the building can be
requirements of the activities carried out.
planned along with the window surfaces.
·· Sports facilities which require a form of heating should be ·· Try to reduce hot air stratification by calibrating the distributors
located in wind-protected areas and strategically positioned of in-flowing and out-flowing air and the heating units.
in relation to other buildings, embankments, barriers and ·· Adjust the air supply according to the number of users present
trees. in the facility, foreseeing at least 2 exchanges in the case of
138
maximum crowding (users and public), and normal crowding For heating water:
(only users) equal to 30 m³ per person per hour. ·· Combination boilers. Appliances capable of supplying both
·· Close external air inlets when the systems are switched on, space heating and domestic hot water.
in order to reduce the time necessary to reach the optimal ·· Installation of heat pump water heater.
temperature. ·· Heat recovery unit.
Other similar suggestions concern the production of hot water ·· Use of solar collectors.
using a traditional system: For lighting:
·· Limit the temperature of the water according to user ·· Use of light colours for walls and ceilings.
requirements.
·· Use of high efficiency lamps such as fluorescent lamps, iodide
·· Activate the circulation pump only when the showers are in and mercury-discharge lamps.
use.
·· Reduction of lighting points and use of closed circuits to use
·· Keep water production devices and water distribution equipment lights only when required.
in good working order (water heaters, thermostats, taps etc).
·· Use of devices for the cogeneration of electricity and heat if
These simple suggestions are part of the standard and the facility uses electricity and thermal energy in parallel.
continuous maintenance of facilities; following them can lead Exploitation of solar energy
to a reduction in energy costs of 20%-30% or more. The sun is the most widely used source of renewable energy.
Main interventions concerning some sub-systems of the At present, solar thermal and solar photovoltaic systems are
technological installations include: the most commonly used systems in the tertiary sector and, in
For air conditioning: particular, for sports structures. The solar thermal system is
·· Installation of control unit and distribution ducts. specifically used to heat water for sanitary installations.
·· Use of economic fuels or low cost maintenance fuels (for Solar thermal systems include:
example methane instead of diesel). ·· Collectors.
·· Different generators must provide the required thermal ·· Accumulation tanks.
supply. ·· A distribution circuit.
·· Installation of a device to recover the heat from the air expelled ·· Supplementary traditional devices.
by the centralised systems. ·· A control unit.
·· As regards non-centralised systems or parts of systems, more The size of the collectors and, consequently of the accumulation
efficient devices must be adopted (convection fans instead of tanks, depends on a number of factors and, importantly, on
convection heaters to reduce the heating time). the intended use. With regard to sports structures, it is
·· Increase thermal inertia with non-conductive materials, double important to consider the actual consumption, and the time
glazing or double doors and windows. of day in which energy is consumed. As for all solar thermal
·· Use of devices to generate more efficient heat, for example systems, a traditional source must also be provided to meet the
condensing boilers or boilers that use low-temperature heat requirements during reduced daylight exposure.
sources, such as heat exchange pumps. Photovoltaic solar systems are made up of a series of
·· photoelectric cells of about 10cm²; the cells are made up of two
thin layers in contact with each other, one is made of boron-

doped silicon and the other of phosphorous-doped silicon. The
single cells are usually incorporated in a module measuring
0.6/1.00 m². The modules are assembled in parallel rows to
make up the actual photovoltaic generator.
There are two principal photovoltaic systems:
·· Isolated system.
·· Mains-connected system.
The isolated system is used when mains electricity is not
available: this type of photovoltaic system is electrically isolated
and self-sufficient; the main components are:
·· Photovoltaic modules.
·· Charge regulator to control the energy collected, and
manage it within the system, working at 12 or 24 V.
·· Accumulation battery for periods of reduced or no daylight
exposure.
·· Inverter if alternating current utilities are present.
Systems connected to the mains are much more complex.
These systems use a photovoltaic grid-interactive inverter to
change the direct current (DC) produced from the solar panels
to alternating current (AC), synchronise with a grid and feed the
energy into the mains electricity grid for use. These systems do
not need accumulation batteries to store the energy produced
as the mains grid has an infinite capacity. Power from the solar
cells can be fed directly to the consumers and to the mains grid,
enabling other consumers to benefit from surplus power.
Recently, many sports facilities have begun to install photovoltaic
solar panels on their own roofs. Their expansive surface lends
itself to becoming involved in urban plans for the production
of renewable energy, which guarantee energy for the sports
facility itself as well as a reasonable number of homes in the
area. This serves as a perfect example of how a sports facility
can be both significant and useful!
anagement
of ports acilities S
M F
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 5 › Management of Sports Facilities
142
O
ver the last decade, the concept of a sports facility has Efficiency and effectiveness are the key points, in economic
evolved rapidly, particularly in terms of its significance terms. The services foreseen do not necessarily have to be
and its regional presence. related to a programme of high-level events, but they must take
Nowadays, sports facilities not only represent a place in into account the facility’s intended location and purpose, the
which sports are played but, most of all, they also represent objective being to build a successful sports facility.
financially self-sufficient structures that provide employment. This way of thinking has introduced marketing concepts into
It is not surprising therefore, that sports facilities now adopt the management of multifunctional facilities, both small and
concepts of management, organisation, efficiency and large.
effectiveness, sports facilities have become an “economic Competitive management must include the basic business
entity”. marketing concepts for a detailed analysis and forecast of the
All these processes and principles are part of the greater services and activities to be offered. These concepts include:
concept of planning and programming. -- Demand segmentation (and identification of reference target)
Sports facilities should not be planned and designed in relation -- Differentiation of services and offer
to a single sporting event, but with the long-term focus of fully -- Organisational and instrumental optimisation
exploiting the potential of a sports complex and ensuring a long Management is therefore influenced by different parameters
and productive lifespan. that include all operating costs, including activities, personnel
Sound architectural planning can help to reduce the under-use and equipment. All these factors must be considered when
of facilities or even the abandonment of structures no longer in examining management, and particularly expenditure, as it is
use. Indeed, an incorrect assessment of demands can lead to the cost factor that primarily affects the final result and, at the
an inadequate offer and supply, and consequently to low staff same time, ultimately influences the performance of other
resources, inadequate service, high running costs, etc. These parameters.
are all aspects which could render a facility unmanageable and
Management approach
unsustainable.
The logic behind sports facility management is to maximise the
As already described in the preceding chapters, it is essential
potential of a facility and see a high-level basketball facility simply
to study the future potential of a sports facility early on, in the
as a multifunctional complex. This requires the support of an
planning and conceptual stage. Consequently, the management
organisational structure which should include qualified and
of a facility becomes closely linked to the planning and
competitive staff who will work with the stakeholders interested in
construction of the building and, thus, ultimately, with an
the sports facility (sports associations, local bodies, sponsors,
understanding of the territory and its requirements.
media, etc.), all cooperating for the success of the facility. This
What is management? type of approach is very business-like, but in today’s market this
The word management has a complex meaning and includes is a way of guaranteeing the quality of a sports structure and a
leading or directing, planning and organising, scheduling and long lifespan. Not to be underrated is the role of facility manager
budgeting, problem solving, and accomplishing goals. who must have similar attributes to those of a company manager,
All these actions are related to one another but each one must with good business organisation and PR skills, and leadership
be able to be developed individually through an effective and values recognised by the work team and the stakeholders. Another
efficient organisational structure. fundamental element of sports facility management is the
143 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 5 › Management of Sports Facilities
manager’s knowledge of sports matters and his determination to The activities have been divided into groups for an easier
act and achieve. analysis of the problem:
Management time -- Sporting activities
The need for feasibility and profitability studies influences the -- Additional activities
time spent managing, and this depends more or less on the -- Personnel
goals set. If studies of this kind are carried out before a facility a. Sporting activities
is built, then profitability will be guaranteed. Obviously, one of These include all the activities that can be conducted in
the objectives is to help investors to save as much as possible, multifunctional facilities.
not only in terms of costs related to the structure (energy, Each sporting activity has its different distinguishing aspects:
services, staff, etc.) but also in terms of new income sources.
·· Training
These sources mainly include ancillary areas and other activities,
·· Competition
the multifunctional use of the facility, and the provision of top
·· Education
services commensurate with the size of the facility.
·· Fitness/Wellness
Elements of Management
The distinction is very important as the different elements can
Introduction
influence organisation and have an impact on the ancillary
For the management of a sports facility to be stable and
services and equipment requirements.
effective, it must be based on certain key points necessary to
Organisation must also guarantee the necessary services
attain the three fundamental objectives:
related to a particular activity.
-- Social
Sports and other activities must be:
-- Financial
Programmed: All activities must be scheduled and supervised;
-- Occupational
they must not be double-booked and must be included in an
The variables include the location of the facility, area potential, “activities’ calendar”. Activity periods should be divided into
possible users, proposed services and economic capacity or, three types of cycles: micro, meso and macro. Facility use is
more specifically: programmed by coordinating the various sections, staff
-- Catchment area for sporting events and other events; activities, and user and management requirements. This
-- Analysis of the demand in the area concerned; programme can be divided into a daily, weekly, monthly and
-- Location of local sports facilities; annual schedule to best accommodate the varying requests.
-- Proposed service provision; Optimum management results will obviously only be evident
-- Cost and revenue forecast; when the facility is in regular and continuous use, with the
exception of the unoccupied periods when the building is
-- Social and environmental impact;
closed at night or for maintenance works. For obvious reasons,
The organisation of the future (and current) activities of a sports
the requirements of regular users shall have priority over those
facility must take these variables into account, because,
of occasional users, who would be allocated alternative spaces
ultimately, the organisational factors also have an influential
designed for temporary activities. Reserving the facilities for
impact on the success of the activities offered and the public’s
use by schools could represent a long-term investment with
reaction.
immediate and significant positive social implications.
144
Coordinated: The activities must be adequately supervised 2. Chief Executive Officer (CEO)
and managed by the staff; guidelines must be prepared for 3. Director
each activity, and the supervisors must be qualified sports 4. Managers
instructors: 5. Supervisors
·· Coaches, federation representatives, technical commissioners, 6. Operators
medical staff, professional assistants for persons with
(One same person may often cover different roles, for example
a disability, physiotherapists, post-trauma rehabilitation
the owner may also be the CEO).
experts;
This is a simplified version of the complex and complicated
·· Organisation staff for the users and their activities, such as:
mechanism of the human resources organisation of a sports
·· Team managers, group leaders, facility managers, facility facility. Obviously, it all depends on the size of the facility, type
users, etc. of activities anticipated, amount of investments, and media
Functional: Every activity carried out in a facility, from the reach of the facility. The more complex the sports facility, the
playing court to the ancillary services, must be aimed at more complex the operational structure.
achieving the maximum quality possible, guarantee long-term The owner and managers are responsible for the strategic
comfort and safety for its users. This can be achieved through management of a basketball and/or multifunctional facility,
the effective technical and administrative coordination of a while the operational efficiency is managed directly by the
series of functions and their costs. personnel responsible.
b. Additional activities Unfortunately there is no single common effective strategic and
Over recent decades we have seen a rapid growth in sports decision-making policy to guarantee the success of a facility;
coverage worldwide, both in print and on broadcast media. however, the list below describes some operational points to
This interest has not been limited to high-level sports alone, but pursue as management objectives:
has also devoted attention to all kinds of amateur and non- 1. Constant quality standards
professional sports. The knock-on effect of this has led to a 2. Ordinary maintenance of structures and equipment
vast improvement of the sports culture in general, and ultimately
3. Extraordinary maintenance of structures and equipment
to a generation of well-informed athletes and users with
4. Surveillance
expectations and requirements of their own. These requirements
5. Ancillary services (hospitality, information, refreshment
are directed mainly at the services offered by a sports facility,
areas, entertainment, etc.)
in particular the collateral activities.
6. User services.
c. Personnel
The staff responsible for a facility represent the heart of a sports Cost/Benefits Analysis
facility. General aspects
Operators must be qualified, and be offered professional A cost/benefits analysis is an instrument that enables
training to meet new demands. Good organisational structuring management staff to evaluate decisions taken in the past and
of the different services will be required to ensure the best assess future ones. It involves a number of variables and
management possible. This structure often includes: represents an immediate element of reference to evaluate the
1. Owner (person-public body-private body) return of an investment.
According to the laws of economics, as well as common sense, Intrinsic factors

the cost/benefit ratio should be almost equal to zero at the These include:
beginning and then in time develop into a positive result. Despite -- The ability to meet user requirements related to sports and
the variable financial expenses, the cost evaluation is rather support activities, such as providing flexible opening hours
simple both in the medium and long term. It is certainly more for users, appropriate working hours, appropriate facility and
complicated to define how to evaluate the benefits. equipment specifications, adequate security and hygiene.
To make it easier, the benefit aspects can be divided into -- The effective running, maintenance and organisation of
“quantitative and qualitative”. the services provided. Only some of these factors can be
The first factors are simply a “calculation” of the revenue easily quantified, for example the comfort values such as
produced by the activities. The second can be grouped under air temperature and relative humidity, lighting, acoustics; all
“customer satisfaction”. The perception of customer and user other factors can only be evaluated on the basis of statistics,
satisfaction is fundamental because it defines the quality of the experience and good common sense.
service. Diagram a1 Extrinsic factors
Public services can be influenced by a number of factors: some These include:
are strictly related to the use and organisation of the facility -- The ability to meet the demand for basketball (in our case)
(intrinsic) and others depend on local choices and planning -according to the type and size of the facility, and how well
(extrinsic). integrated it is in the social and regional context;
diagram a1
REPORTS MUST BE MONITORED DURING THE MANAGEMENT OF SPORT FACILITIES
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A REPORT
Diagram a1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
ECONOMIC VALUE
B REPORT
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
146
-- The provision of appropriate and affordable services which

diagram b2
are compatible with the organisation of activities and local
infrastructure.
ANNUAL BUDGET OUTLINE-MANAGEMENT OF BASKETBALL FACILITIES
Costs Quantity Price Total
As previously mentioned, the most significant costs in facility EXPENDITURE

Consumption Water Supply
management emanate from energy consumption (lighting, air
Electric Power
conditioning, water, telephone, etc) and human resources. Telephone
With regard to the selection of personnel, it is very important to Fuels
Machinery and Equipment
employ motivated staff keen to pursue an improvement in the
quality of the services offered. A detailed cost-analysis must Technical Services Ordinary Maintenance
differentiate fixed costs from variable costs; fixed costs are Technical Administration
independent of or only minimally dependent on the use of the Cleaning

Setup
structure while variable costs are strictly related to the use of the Surveillance
sports facility.
Fixed costs generally include: Administratiove Costs Direction
Administrative Expenses
·· Personnel, including salaries, insurance contributions, social Administration And General Exspenses
security, etc. for employees and associates; Paid Interests And Loans
TOTAL X
·· Depreciation including accrued costs for the recovery of
Diagram b2
invested capital; INCOME
Events Basketball
·· General expenses including taxes, insurance policies on the Other Sports
facility, etc.; Other Activities Than Sports
·· Ordinary maintenance, including all repairs (defective

Sporting Activities Training
machinery, leakages, damp, plastering, etc.). Group Courses
Variable costs generally include: Individual Courses
Extra Hiring
1. Expendable supplies, equipment and other services
necessary to run a facility; Advertising Main Sponsor of Facilities
2. Extraordinary maintenance including servicing, inspections External Advertising
Internal Advertising
and possible repairs.
Possible Exhibition Stands
Management Planning Sound Advertising
Television Rights
Management and planning
In order to achieve successful management of a basketball or Marketing Activities Bar/Restaurants - Selling Points
sports facility in general it is necessary to study the level of Video Games
Parking Areas
involvement of the management aspect in the planning phase.
TOTAL Y
As mentioned earlier in the introduction, running a sport facility
FINAL RESULT TO BE ACHIEVED Y ≥ X
is not an easy task.
147
Oaka Arena Athens
The management aspect has an important economic impact on flexibility and a suitable exploitation of the spaces.
the financial investment to be made as it represents the most Allocation of space
dynamic component. The correct integration of the various sections and spaces of a
Annual management costs can amount to 10%-15% of the facility influences the use and running of the facility itself, with
construction costs, or rise above 20%, if they are not adequately implications in terms of activities, number of operations, and
controlled. personnel. The areas and spaces must be:
A business plan must therefore be drawn up, not only for ·· Arranged so as to enable sports activities to be practised
construction costs, but also for management expenses. appropriately (dimension of the courts, height, etc.);
With reference to the current management of basketball facilities, ·· Suitably equipped for these activities (fixed and mobile
the budget should include the following main items: equipment, accessories, services, offices, first aid, access to
d. Income: the proceeds from sports competitions, sporting different areas, etc.).
activities, advertising and possibly marketing activities; Obviously the various sections of a facility, with their respective
e. Expenditure: consumption, technical services and components, must meet the requirements of users and
administrative costs. personnel, in terms of physical and psychological comfort,
An example of a possible annual budget outline for a sports physical integrity and hygiene. Any inadequacy in this sense
facility is shown in diagram b2 (Annual budget). will have repercussions on the use of the facility, on staff
In short, as far as income is concerned, planning should employment and on maintenance interventions which will be
concentrate on achieving optimal results in terms of: more complicated and frequent; consequently, all this will have
1. Use of the facility a negative impact on management costs.
2. Allocation of space Ancillary services
3. Ancillary services. Basketball halls can be integrated in spaces which are also
intended for other recreational and social activities suited to
Use of facilities
multifunctional facilities. Planners must therefore study the
Apart from the specific-use requirements of special facilities,
whole local context and arrange a compatible timetable to
the construction of a facility should be planned to meet the
accommodate other activities. Even if a hall is not integrated in
requirements of as many users as possible; this means that
another recreational or social structure (such as a library building
multifunctionality is an increasingly fundamental requisite to
or community centre), a series of services such as bars,
meeting the demands of different sports. The main aspects
restaurants, sports shops and advertising should be provided,
influencing the functionally of a facility are the dimensions of
particularly in facilities used for professional competitions, as
the facility itself, of the playing areas as per official regulations,
they can significantly reduce management costs. Management
and of the flooring.
planning should be based on operational requirements,
Other criteria must be implemented, to organise the spaces of
equipment maintenance and installation maintenance
a facility according to the planned activities, such as dividing
requirements. A maintenance and operational plan must be
the space using mobile partitions, correctly distributing the
drawn up to implement this aspect of management planning.
services, etc.
These points are dealt with in greater detail in the chapter on
The complexity of the structure and the consequent increase in
facility maintenance.
costs resulting from these operations are countered by a greater
M
U se and
aintenance
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 6 › Use and Maintenance
152
Use and Utilisation of Basketball Facilities The following definitions provide a better understanding of the
O
ne of the management’s main activities is planning concepts of use and utilisation of a sports facility:
the utilisation of the sports facility. The revenue of the ·· Use means: operational days per year and opening hours
facility and the management strategies depend on the per day;
study of facility use and the implementation of the plan; ·· Utilisation means: users per hour (users may vary according
maintenance costs are also relative to the intended use of the to the spaces provided and the sports activities planned,
facility. A facility that is being utilised 365 days a year for 10 etc.)
hours a day will obviously require a complex maintenance The data collected should be compared and contrasted to
programme, while a sports facility that is only utilised for just a prepare graphs and tables to illustrate the level of use and
few events per year would only require temporary maintenance utilisation of a facility.
during the actual event period. In the case of an existing facility, the aim is to constantly improve
The planning of the use and consequent utilisation of a facility the use of the facility and the exploitation of the activities and
must start well before the conceptual phase. to highlight those activities which are not very popular, to bring
Furthermore, it is necessary to find out how many and which them in line with other activities available in the surrounding
structures in the area are under-exploited in relation to the area.
total number of facilities, in order to identify the areas in which More precisely, the “use of a facility” is the time during which it
the construction or restoration of a sports facility may be is open to users.
necessary. This is expressed in terms of operational days (o.d.) and an
The assessment should define the following: average number of opening hours per day.
Under-exploited structures A calculation of the amount of acceptable operational days
Total number of facilities (o.d.) is reached by subtracting the number of maintenance
The study should include key points such as the organisation days (m.d.) and non-operational days of seasonal activities
and management of existing activities in a specific territory, the (s.d.) from the number of days in a year.
demographic analysis of the population, production sites of The formula is as follows:
particular interest, infrastructure such as roads, railway lines, o.d. = 365-(m.d. + s.d.).
airports, interchange points, etc., as well as consolidated sports Maintenance days are calculated according to the type of
facilities in the area concerned. planned maintenance, with average maintenance requirements,
This study should help: for the main areas of the facility.
1. Local administrations to implement local plans and The seasonal nature of activities must also be taken into account,
programmes in relation to sports facilities, in terms of new so the calculation must consider the length of the sports season,
structures or the restoration of existing ones if the catchment the quality of the demand and the type of activities.
area or territory does not need a new facility. The parameters mentioned above can be used to predict the
2. Private companies to direct their own management towards potential exploitation of activities in a new sports facility and to
a particular use of a sports facility, and towards a qualitative classify it as fully exploited or under-exploited.
evaluation of the services offered and an evaluation of A similar approach should be adopted to evaluate the operational
management costs. hours.
153 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 6 › Use and Maintenance
A further requirement to be checked is the utilisation of a accessible in a short time of 15-30 minutes. Activities in
facility. this kind of facility should focus on sports education and
This factor is variable as it takes into account the number rehabilitation (small outdoor playing areas, multifunctional
of users per hour of activity; the value of this factor can be areas, tarmac courts, etc.).
compared with an average acceptable value obtained by 2. Medium facilities with a catchment area covering a distance
actually observing the activities. In this way it is possible to which enables activities to be accessed in an average time
compare the number of under-exploited activities with the total span of 30-60 minutes. Activities in a facility of this size should
number of activities. focus on the most common sports, but the facility may be
designed for more specialised sporting activities.
Access to Facilities
3. Large facilities with a catchment area extending to a
It is important to differentiate between facilities located in areas
distance over 60 minutes away from the activities; this area
with a high concentration of facilities which are not utilised or
can include an entire province in the case of large-scale
not easily accessible and thus accessibility has to be improved,
events. These facilities are used for major sporting activities
and areas where facilities are easily accessible and fully
and entertainment events that require large spaces.
exploited. The number of facilities which are not accessible or
not utilised must be calculated and compared with the total Criteria to Evaluate the State of Preservation of a
number of facilities. The formula is as follows: Facility
Non-accessible facilities With existing sports facilities, the state of preservation of the
Total number of facilities
building is an important factor that influences management
This parameter is also useful to evaluate the following factors: decisions and maintenance plans.
·· Location of the facilities in relation to their catchment areas. Three basic and intersecting parameters can be used to assess
·· Presence of adequate access routes. the state of preservation of a sports facility:
·· Efficient public transport service. 1. Property value estimate.
These factors must be evaluated in a feasibility study that takes 2. Facility-use estimate
into account the environmental context, sporting activities and 3. Location estimate
the social and economic indicators of the area concerned.
These parameters may be linked to one another, for example,
The elaboration of tables and diagrams, based on data collected an economic investment in a facility with a low real-estate
from surveys on the different areas to identify the existing value may be prompted or justified by the fact it is located in an
imbalances in terms of accessibility, can help in the planning interesting catchment area; in this case, what may otherwise
phase to determine the primary and secondary interventions be considered a drawback now becomes an objective to
required. re-launch an existing structure. This means that in the case
Catchment area and classification - A basic point of reference of sports facilities, all factors must be considered for a true
when examining access to facilities is the definition of their assessment of the state of preservation, and not merely the
catchment areas in terms of distance-time and users. value of the property.
A simple classification method is described below: One method to understand the relation between existing sports
1. Small facilities with a catchment area limited to the facilities in a bad state of preservation and the total number of
immediately adjacent residential area, where activities are facilities is to compare the areas (and their respective activities)
154
where the state of preservation is worse, and which therefore The aim is to understand how many and which activities
require intervention, and the areas where preservation is better, are functional in relation to the demand for sport, and in
and new facilities may possibly be built. terms of structural solidity, and adaptability of the staff and
The relation can be defined as follows: organisation. This enables a distinction between areas with a
high concentration of facilities which are not yet operational as
Sports facility with poor state of preservation
Total number of sports facilities the sports halls still require maintenance and repair, and areas
which already have fully operational facilities.
For a correct assessment, criteria for the evaluation and
The relation is as follows:
collection of data must be defined.
A gradual approach is recommended, starting with the analysis Non-operational facilities
Total number of facilities
of general information and then moving onto a more detailed
analysis and evaluation. The aim is to establish whether the Another parameter requiring a qualitative assessment is the
state of preservation can be considered adequate or inadequate distinction between functionality in terms of structural solidity,
for sporting activities according to the requirements of national and functionality in terms of qualified personnel and an efficient
and international sports organisations. Moreover, it is important organisation.
to assess whether the additional areas for recreational or In terms of structural solidity, facilities can be considered
commercial activities respect the standards in force in the functional, if the structure is complete in all its parts: sections,
country in which the sports facility is located. rooms and construction components. In this context, the
The main point of reference of a sports facility is the actual indispensable elements must be distinguished from those
performance of the various sports, therefore the state of elements which, although useful, are not indispensable (public
preservation can be considered to be adequate when all the section, support services, etc.).
scheduled sports can be performed in the playing areas without From a strictly technical point of view, to assess the solidity
any hindrance or interference. and stability of a building it may be necessary to check the
The evaluation procedure should involve all parts of the sports structure’s static situation by testing the materials or part of the
facility (sporting activities, support services, public ancillary components.
services), the premises and the basic constructional elements As regards the organisation and personnel, the staff required
(flooring, equipment, technological installations). In other words, for the activities may vary significantly according to the
defining the state of preservation of the playing areas is a very management strategies, use, etc.
complex process and must be carried out with accuracy and The starting point for a realistic evaluation is the comparison
precision in order to prevent grouping together facilities with between the current conditions of a facility and the ideal
very different requirements, from slight renovation to total standard of the construction and management; this comparison
restoration. should be carried out using:
The schematic approach (adequate/inadequate) must be -- diagrams;
supported, as mentioned above, by a study of the general -- layout plans: areas divided into sub-areas;
geographic context; however, a detailed analysis of the This will highlight any existing imbalance and establish the
individual parts of a facility is also necessary to prioritise the priorities for the work to be carried out. This rather schematic
restoration work to be carried out. approach is aimed at showing how many and which activities are
not functional, and to establish where and which interventions to the requirement of multifunctionality. This implies that the
are necessary, on the basis of future plans for restaurants and structures should be transformable and adaptable as nowadays
bars, management strategies, new activities, etc. large structures are not only built with the intent of housing
Another, yet rather complex, method of evaluation, both in sports facilities. The structures must be constructed so as to
theory and in practice, is to distinguish global values from be rapidly transformed internally to house a sporting event as
“conventional” ones. The global value refers to the overall well as a series of other different sporting events depending on
number of facilities, while the conventional value is attributed the market opportunities.
to each facility which can be used for basketball on the basis As a consequence, the physical, functional and economic
of an assessment of the structural solidity and management lifespan is long-term, but the technological installations must
efficiency. be rapidly updated to suit the functional requirements of the
planned activities. (Diagram 6.2)
Maintenance
From this point of view, maintenance takes on an important role
As already mentioned in the management chapter, a sports
as it can help the management to identify the following factors
facility must be built to last as long as possible or better,
in a timely manner:
according to the “property value analysis theory”, to maintain
·· When a facility no longer meets the requirements for which it
the efficiency characteristics throughout its entire lifespan.
was built;
(Diagram 6.1)
·· Identify any intervention necessary to improve the facility;
The lifespan of a building for sporting activities is strictly related
·· Predict when the facility will no longer be able to meet the
requirements and will enter a negative management period.
diagram 6.1
Management must therefore concentrate on continuously
LIFE CYCLE OF A BUILDING
LIFETIME PROVIDED
monitoring the relationship between the requirements of the
sports facility “system” and what it offers. Management must
also focus on the relationship between the economic value
expressed by the continuity of the operation of the facility,
LIFETIME PROVIDED
which also includes the deterioration time of the structures, and

components in time (Diagram 6.3).
In general, the overall maintenance and restoration cost for
Diagram 6.1 the entire lifespan of a building equals 2-3 times the actual
construction cost.
Maintenance operations are necessary for at least four main
reasons:
1. To provide hygienic and safe living and working
CYCLE OF LIFE LIFE CYCLE OF PROFIT CYCLE OF LIFE: GLOBAL
Timescale that contains Timescale within which is Timescale beyond which environments.
the economic contained the economic construction activities are 2. To monitor the obsolescence of technical systems and
investment that allows planning-design realization- carried out during the operation
the implementation of phase operation and and technical management. materials.
manufactured goods technical management Negative operation
3. To monitor any possible deterioration and prevent it from
becoming irreparable.
156
LIFESPAN OF A BUILDING
The facility should meet the requirements for which it was built. The facility
PHYSICAL LIFESPAN should not be affected by environmental damages. The facility should be
tested to answer all needs. Diagram 6.2
At all moment one should be able to identify any intervention necessary to

FUNCTIONAL DURATION
improve the facility; requirements should be reviewed on regular basis.
It is necessary at all times to predict when the facility will no longer be able
ECONOMIC LIFESPAN to meet the requirements and will enter a negative management period
which may generate financial issues.
diagram 6.2
diagram 6.3
ECONOMIC PLANNING OF FINANCIAL INVESTMENT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION

AND MANAGEMENT OF SPORTS FACILITIES
RELATIONSHIP
1
Financial investment for the construction of building
FINANCIAL
2 INCOME
Diagram 6.3
Scheduled time for depreciation of financial investment for the construction
CONTROL
3 TECHNICAL
Scheduled time for the pension resulting from the financial and technical management
MANAGEMENT
4
Unprofitable stage of technical management
PHASE 1 Year 2°Year 3°Year 4°Year Year 10°Year Year 15°Year Year Year Year Year Year Year Year
4. To duly safeguard the value of the property.

Maintenance planning must start in the project phase when
the materials and equipment are selected, layout decided,
technologies for the supply of energy chosen and the functional
parameters of the technological installations established. PARTIES ACTING ON THE
An extremely important aspect that influences the planning of LIFESPAN OF A BUILDING
maintenance both in operational and cost terms is the use and
utilisation of the sports facility as mentioned earlier. STRUCTURE OF THE
BUILDING
Diagram 6.4 The main elements influencing maintenance costs are the CHARACTERISTICS OF
THE MAINTENANCE
buildings constructional elements and the technological OF PARTIES AND
systems. COMPONENTS OF
THE BUILDING
(Diagram 6.4) STRUCTURE OF THE
TECHNOLOGY SYSTEM
A maintenance plan should be drawn up in the project phase,
including ordinary preventive/predictive maintenance and long-
term programmed maintenance (extraordinary). In other words,
it is possible to anticipate the operational management of the The threshold for non profitable technical management
services and the personnel required for the said services. The in relation to general management.
more the project phase takes into account the maintenance of diagram 6.4
the parts, materials and equipment, the easier it is to predict diagram 6.5
and plan future maintenance costs.
(Diagram 6.5)
Maintenance planning calls for a series of operations:
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
·· Programme of maintenance interventions.
LIFESPAN OF A BUILDING
·· The breaking up of the building-system into sub-systems
according to their function and technology.
COST OF
·· The setting up of an information system to monitor technical CONSTRUCTION
Diagram 6.5 stability, materials, equipment, components and their
behaviour in time.
·· The definition of intervention procedures for each operation in COST AND MAINTENANCE OF RECOVERY IN
THE LIFE OF CONSTRUCTION
terms of the equipment to be used, work organisation, type of
labour, and interference with users. 1 2 3
The total cost to ensure the maintenance and rehabilitation of a building throughout its
·· The identification of sets of operations to be carried out lifespan is equivalent to 2-3 times its construction cost.
simultaneously or in succession;
·· The evaluation of the cost of single operations.
·· The evaluation of the cost of more operations carried out at
the same time in one single intervention.
158
These planning and analysis steps are useful and necessary organised according to fixed and rigid intervention plans,
both in the case of new buildings and in the case of the reuse has been replaced by more dynamic maintenance concepts
of an existing building. related to a management objective. These new methods are
Diagram 6.6 shows how a sports facility can be divided into based on durability, reliability and practicability of the parts
functional units. Each functional unit must include spaces that and components of the entire sports facility. A combination
allow for the independent operation of each sub-unit. of different methods can be used to prepare maintenance,
Layout planning must take place in the project phase of the intervention and cost plans.
sports facility when analysing what exactly is necessary These concepts are widely recognised and accepted, however
for the running of sports activities and other activities in the the intervention methods are subject to the regulations and
facility (sporting events, training, wellness, restaurants and provisions in force in the different countries.
bars, commercial activities, etc.) in relation to the spaces to be The list below briefly describes the most widely adopted
created or, in the case of the restoration of a facility, spaces maintenance methods.
already available. 4. Predictive maintenance is condition-based maintenance,
In operational terms, the first simple step towards monitoring i.e. maintenance is scheduled only when operational or
the entire “sports facility system” is to create an “information mechanical conditions warrant. Equipment is periodically
system” to regulate the interventions in the operational phase; monitored and repaired or replaced when the condition reaches
this database should be used to keep track of all the interventions, an unacceptable level. This approach also requires personnel
the means, the equipment used and the assistance services with the skills and time to perform the maintenance, and also
employed. allows replacement parts to be ordered in advance and repairs
Diagram 6.7 shows an example of a data sheet for the creation to be scheduled at suitable times, only when needed.
of a database. 5. Preventive maintenance is a time-based form of
Operational rules of maintenance maintenance that entails scheduling maintenance activities at
For maintenance to be effective, it must be continuous and regular intervals or set time intervals to ensure that damages
follow certain rules such as: are repaired or replaced before obvious problems occur.
This approach works well for equipment that does not run
·· The constant check of the property status; this is very
continuously, and with personnel who have the skills and the
important for security reasons and to preserve the building-
time to perform the preventive maintenance work.
system in an efficient working order;
6. Opportunity-based preventive maintenance defines
·· Continuous cleaning: this is an essential daily activity
preventive or failure maintenance carried out during an
undertaken to assure a safe working environment;
intervention service originally performed for another reason.
·· Fast and expert intervention where necessary to avoid higher
7. Emergency (or accidental) maintenance can be convenient
costs and worse results when it is too late.
depending on the criticality of the function and the level of
Maintenance strategies
interaction with other components of the building-system.
Every management organisation can choose one or more
This type of maintenance usually concerns unforeseeable
maintenance strategies. The choice depends on the type of
problems; the unpredictability cannot be reduced but a
building and on management policies.
statistical evaluation can be made of the size and number of
The concept of ordinary and extraordinary maintenance,
159
Bona Sportive System

Maximum performance for many games to come
We see wooden sport floors as a vital part of sports performance. But most sports activities put
extreme stress on the wooden floor surface, leading to a shorter lifetime and costly renovations, unless
given proper care. That’s why we’ve created the Bona Sportive System, a complete solution for the
treatment, maintenance and renovation of wooden sport floors. Bona Sportive System is the easiest
way to maximize performance and ensure a longer lifetime. So no matter how hard you play, the floor
is up for it!
bona.com/sportive
160
diagram 6.6
DIVISION OF SPORTS FACILITY INFO FUNCTIONAL UNITS

Parts of the sports facility Environmental unit
Sub unit
Signs Sections/unit functional Denomination Size N. Spaces Floor
SA1 Area game

SA2 Lateral surface
SA3 Athletes with changing rooms including toilets and showers
SA4 Athletes with changing rooms including toilets and showers
SA5 Changing rooms coaches/ referees with including toilets and showers
Section Sports
SA SA6 Changing rooms official/ referees with including toilets and showers
Activities
SA7 Infirmary
SA8 Deposit-shed
SA9 Stock equipment
SA10 ……….
SA11 ……….
SAWM1 Spaces for sports, recreational and others

SAWM4 Stock equipment
Diagram 6.6
SAWM5 Athletes with changing rooms including toilets and showers
Section Sports SAWM6 Athletes with changing rooms including toilets and showers
SAWM Activities - Wellness SAWM7 Changing rooms coaches/ referees with including toilets and showers
- Miscellaneous SAWM8 Changing rooms coaches/ referees with including toilets and showers
SAWM9 Secretary / ticket
SAWM10 Infirmary
SAWM11 Cab direction
SAWM12 ………. ……
SAWM13 ………. …….
PS1 Main entrance

PS2 Outdoors
PS3a Bathrooms
PS3b Bathrooms
PS3c Bathrooms
Section for the PS4 Ticket
PS
Public Services PS5 Forums Seats
PS6 Refreshment point with nearby toilets, and storage room for goods
PS7 Meeting room
PS8 Free spaces
PS9 ……….
PS10 ……….
DIVISION OF SPORTS FACILITY INFO FUNCTIONAL UNITS

Parts of the sports facility Environmental unit
Sub unit
Signs Sections/unit functional Denomination Size N. Spaces Floor
SMM1 Workstations
SMM2 Microphones Positions
SMM3 Cameras’ Positions
SMM4 Conference Room
SMM5 Pressroom
SMM Section Mass Media SMM6 Bar- Cafeteria
SMM7 Bathrooms
SMM8 Infirmary
SMM9 Deposit-Shed
SMM10 Stock Equipment
SMM11 ……….
SO1 Director Office
SO2 Assistant Director Office
SO3 Assistant Director Office
SO4 Secretariat
SO5 Secretariat
SO6 Archive
SO Section Office SO7 Deposit-Shed
SO8 Stock Equipment
SO9 Meeting Room
SO10 Bathrooms
SO11 ……….
Diagram 6.6 SO12 ……….
SO13 ……….
SOA1 Parking Area 1- Public
SOA2 Parking Area 2 - Staff
SOA3 Parking Area 3 - Service
SOA4 Parking Area 4 - Emergency
SOA5 Green Areas
Section Outdoor SOA6 Control Point
SOA
Area SOA7 External Installation
SOA8 ……….
SOA9 ……….
SOA10 ……….
SOA11 ……….
SOA12 ……….
TECHNOLOGICAL SYSTEM
Relationship
TS1 System Production Hot Water x x x x
TS2 Lighting System x x x x
TS3 Electrical System - Force Driving / Control Frameworks x x x x
TS4 Installation Of Air Conditioning x x x x
TS5 Central Fire Detection x x x x
Spaces Section TS6 Sound Diffusion System x x x x
TSY of Technological TS7 System Water Management x x x x x
Systems TS8 System Protection From Atmospheric Discharges x x x x
TS9 Plant Protection From Atmospheric Discharges x x x x
TS10 Installation Of Elevation
TS11 Installation Of Outdoor Lighting x
TS12 Monitoring System x
TS13 ………. x x x x
162
failures in a set period of time in order to programme and size as little inconvenience as possible to the public. For example,
the technical intervention; the replacement of a panel, false ceiling unit or other component
8. Run-to-failure maintenance is reactive maintenance which must be carried out without having to dismantle all the other
is performed only when problems occur and equipment has components or, at the most, involving only the adjacent parts.
run to failure. This approach requires facilities to shutdown Particularly with regard to the technological systems, predictive
equipment for repair immediately until the problems are maintenance must be foreseen alongside regular inspection
resolved. maintenance; predictive maintenance must be implemented
Preventive/predictive maintenance (ordinary) according to the building characteristics and maintenance
Preventive/predictive maintenance foresees all the operations requirements supplied by the manufacturer or installer for
necessary to maintain the required level of efficiency and each machine or piece of equipment. It must also provide an
performance of the parts and components of all the maintenance estimate of costs for faults or failures during special events such
groups (cleaning of premises, good working order of doors and as sporting events or championships; in these cases greater
windows, of locking systems, of sports equipment, etc.). attention must be afforded to the use of the facility and more
specialised personnel must be available.
Ordinary maintenance includes the replacement of materials
and equipment, worn or aged materials, and partial repairs. Opportunity-based maintenance (extraordinary)
Maintenance operations must be easy to carry out, without Extraordinary maintenance is carried out on an opportunity-
involving high costs or complicated means, and should cause basis as scheduled by the manager; the aim is to restore the
technical level or performance level of parts or components
diagram 6.7
SHEET DATA ENVIRONMENT Sheet n. 1
Functional unit SA
Description
Sub-unit SA1
Parts Of The Environment Yes No Type Comments Last Intervention Maintenance
Flooring X 03.04.200…
Ceiling / false
Walls
Fixtures outdoor
Fixtures indoor
Water plant / health
Washbasin
Showers Diagram 6.7
water
Other ….
Technology present
Electrical Switchgear control
Sockets
Switch (light)
TV
Telephone/ADSL
Treatment air
Fire protection
Light emergency
Other ….
of building units or of systems and technological installations, and regular maintenance is scheduled.
which was lost during normal annual activities, or to improve A preventive maintenance plan for the equipment must include
performance and efficiency. service walkways to enable the operators to work safely from
Opportunity-based maintenance operations in sports facilities above, as well as hooks, fasteners and winches with safety
relate to all the interventions required by the continuous devices, and tracks on which to move the equipment. In this way
sporting events held, during which the technological systems the plan becomes a valid instrument that combines equipment
and components must demonstrate a high level of efficiency. maintenance with safety at work, as well as providing a budget
Based on the events’ schedule, the management can predict and limiting the costs.
which systems and components will require inspection and In the case of facility restoration, a plan must be drawn up
overhaul, and the cost of specialised personnel during events. specifying the necessary devices for regular maintenance and
Suggestions emergency repairs of equipment and components.
Equipment assembly plan Diagram 6.8 shows an equipment assembly plan usually
Sporting events and shows require a lot of equipment which is adopted in sports facilities hosting high-level events.
usually fixed or anchored to the ceiling, such as reflectors, sound Use of skilled labour and assistance services
diffusers, luminescent screens and boards. Such equipment Equipment, flooring, components and elements that make
often generates high maintenance costs unless potential up a sports facility have a high economic and technological
problems due to the weight of the equipment in relation to the value; therefore, as far as maintenance is concerned, it is
structure of the ceiling are tackled early on in the project phase advisable to stipulate an agreement directly with the equipment
diagram 6.8
EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY PLAN
EQUIPMENT ASSUMED
Location of FIXTURES
anchor points
equipment in
the structures
(determination SPEAKER SOUND
of the size and
weight of
equipment) CHANNELS OF AIR DISTRIBUTION
CENTRAL AND SIDE SCREEN

MAINTENANCE PLAN
Estimates use
of footbridges HUNG STRUCTURES
service for
maintenance
equipment MOVABLE DIVIDING WALLS
Diagram 6.8
CAVES, PULLEYS,
CONTROL DEVICES
164
5 1 Tribunes
3 8
2 6 7 9 2 Large column
4
10 3 Smoke and heat extractor
1 4 Sound diffusers
11
5 Mobile tribunes
6 Score board
13 13 7 Service luminescent screen
8 Luminescent screen for events
9 Ceiling
14
10 Smoke detection equipment
12 11 Structure lean to
15 15 12 Concrete structure
Air conditioning channel and
13
Diffusers bowl area
14 Telescopic tribunes
15 Air extractor
diagram 6.8
or flooring manufacturers and specialist companies installing walls must be of a non-slip material that can be cleaned with
the technological systems. In this way, a schedule, costs and disinfectants and detergents.
type of interventions can be established in advance and the The rooms containing the technical installations must be
management can count on skilled labour. spacious enough to allow for easy maintenance. The rooms
Maintenance management must be large enough to accommodate the relevant equipment,
The correct operation of basketball facilities hinges on the and must have good lighting and ventilation to allow operators
proper use and operation of the various parts and components, to move easily and safely.
and must be coordinated by specialised personnel employed For simpler sanitary maintenance, sanitary installations must
by the facility to follow and supervise the different maintenance be fitted with shut-off taps (for each system, or at least for a
operations. group of systems, in order to differentiate them from the taps
Regular inspections can be scheduled using special maintenance used on a daily basis).
logbooks to record the correct management and maintenance Introduction of automated systems
operations to be carried out, thanks to the fact that nowadays Sports facilities can be fitted with a number of more or less
all equipment and components certified by the manufacturer technically automated control devices.
come with instructions on correct use and maintenance. Some of these devices (in particular those designed to monitor
On the basis of the manufacturers’ specifications, facility thermal-humidity conditions, acoustic levels, lighting, fire
managers can plan the operational management and a protection devices, internal CCTV, etc.) can be very useful
maintenance plan including an estimate of the costs. for checking or stabilising parameters which are otherwise
Simple-to-use materials and adequate spaces difficult to monitor. These devices are very sophisticated and
All materials must maintain their properties throughout the maintenance must be carried out by specialised firms and
running time of the facility without requiring costly and frequent personnel.
maintenance. In the service areas and rooms, flooring and
Wukesong Indoor Arena Beijing
SS afety and Security

in ports Facilities
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 7 › Safety and Security in Sports Facilities
168
S
afety is a problem of growing importance in modern men and women, and today’s longer life expectancy.
society. Over the years, accidents of various natures, What is more, sport is no longer elitist; it has become a mass
and a growing need to protect people and preserve phenomenon with growing popularity, engaging people of all
the existing patrimony, have resulted in the demand for ages and all social strata.
a higher level of preventive safety measures. Even in sports This quantitative development and the diversification of sports
facilities, repeated episodes of violence and hooliganism have have contributed to a redefinition of the demand for sports and
led to the need for preventive measures in order to ensure the related services.
safety of players and spectators alike. The increased number of users has led to a growing demand
What do we mean by safety? The protection of persons and for sports facilities, organisational skills and qualified operators,
goods from accidental events, caused by natural calamities or including the managers.
use of machines. Another factor to take into account is the evolution of
What do we mean by protection? The protection of persons technologies, materials and equipment, as well as training
or goods against attacks by third parties aimed at causing techniques.
damages or stealing goods. In other words, quantitative development, qualitative
In terms of facility construction, the safety aspect prompts differentiation and technological advancement have all
specific choices in terms of the dimensions and characteristics contributed to a new definition of safety in sports facilities.
of the building, depending on the type of sport practised. As The issue of facility safety should be aimed at protecting the
spectators are involved, the safety analysis must focus on following groups of people:
collective behaviour which may reveal new aspects and changes
a. The users.
in the social mentality and habits.
b. The public.
Current public behaviour patterns can be used to appropriately
c. Those who practice sport.
define the spectator areas. Yet even if structural interventions
d. Facility personnel.
are carried out, or managerial interventions in the course of
organising sporting events, the information provided by this Considering the problematic nature of sports in general, sports
behavioural model is not always sufficient, because certain activities can be divided into different phases:
behavioural models depend on factors related to education e. The actual sports activity itself.
(family, school, etc.) and society (politics, social differences, f. The various ancillary activities.
etc.). g. Maintenance services.
The study of preventive safety criteria certainly contributes to h. The sporting event in terms of spectators.
the success of a sporting event; if the event is well organised Finally, there are other different safety aspects such as
then it can become a safe and functional activity to be enjoyed functional and static safety, fire and earthquake prevention,
by those who believe in sport. electrical safety, and hygiene safety standards.
Considerations The safety of a basketball facility can be compromised by
To tackle safety in basketball activities certain factors must be inadequate solutions throughout the construction cycle:
taken into account. ·· Programming
The main factor lies in the increasing number of users, both ·· Planning
169 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 7 › Safety and Security in Sports Facilities
·· Construction maintenance or inappropriate functional organisation. For

·· Management example, the control and maintenance of the fire prevention
·· Maintenance system, sound diffusion, the emergency exits, etc. are all
decisive elements in the sudden evacuation of a sports facility.
In other words, safety is now seen as the overall result of
integrated interventions concerning not only the people involved, Appliances and equipment
but also the phases, aspects and moments of the entire sports The practice of sport generally calls for specific equipment and
cycle. appliances. In all sport disciplines there is a specific dynamic
After all, even well-constructed sports facilities can become relation between the equipment, facilities and players that
unsafe due to incorrect maintenance, inadequate organisation determines the safety level of the sports facility.
or insufficient maintenance of their components. Equipment may be removable or fixed. Fixed equipment is
The key groups prone to safety problems and thus requiring an integral part of the sports facility which defines the sports
particular safety supervision are: practised (baskets for basketball, nets for volleyball, etc.)
·· Players whilst practising sport; whereas removable equipment tends to belong directly to the
players (basketball shoes, tennis rackets, skis, bicycles. etc.).
·· Player/spectator relations during games;
Fixed equipment is most important in basketball. From a safety
·· Spectators when they arrive, during the event and when they
point of view, the following factors must be taken into account:
leave;
·· The reaction of equipment to stress;
·· Personnel during the organisation and running of the
activities. ·· The installation of appropriate anchoring and mounting
fixtures;
Even though a great deal of thought and careful planning goes
·· Adequate maintenance, particularly of parts exposed to
into selecting the best geographical position or urban location
dynamic stress.
to ensure that an outdoor complex fits in with the surrounding
environment, safety planning is in fact far more complex for With removable or mobile equipment, it is important to remember
indoor facilities than it is for outdoor facilities. that a good athletic performance relies on equipment which is
The first measures of collective safety, which should be resistant to stress and meets current quality standards.
implemented in the conception and planning phases, are Resistance of structural parts and components
those related to the general environmental impact of the sports With regard to the construction aspect, an adequate level of
facility. safety is required when it comes to the resistance to static and
As far as the technological aspects of safety are concerned, it is dynamic stress of the facility as a whole, and of the individual
worth remembering that the environmental comfort of players components.
can significantly reduce the risk of accidents. A fundamental The load which a building must resist is generally related to the
factor in this sense is adequate natural and artificial lighting size of the building and usually includes permanent loads, wind,
both in quantitative and qualitative terms (uniformity, etc.). In earthquakes, land subsidence, etc.
multifunctional sports facilities, lighting systems should vary The entire fabric of a facility, the walls, doors and windows, the
according to the different areas and operate independently. floors and ceilings, the machinery, equipment and supplies,
The more complex a facility is, the more serious are the all are prone to exposure to dynamic stress, sometimes even
consequences of incoherent management, inadequate violent stress, be it through normal use or accidental. For
170
example, a collision between two people whilst running, or 30-50 kg, and then suspended from ropes. The element or
between light and heavy objects (balls and other equipment) component to be tested must be positioned vertically, exactly
thrown at great speed, can create considerable kinetic energy. as it will be when installed, and then the sack must be allowed
Hence, spaces must be planned appropriately and strategies to swing so as to hit the element or component at a height
adopted to assure the safety of users and the integrity of the suitable to test the dynamic strain foreseen.
structures and components. Heavy collision tests can be carried out using steel spheres
What is more, even under normal conditions, players, staff and weighing between 500 g and 1 kg, dropped vertically onto a
the public can subject the various structural components to horizontal element, or suspended as in the system mentioned
sudden strain and often more so than in other types of buildings, above for vertical elements. These tests are carried out with the
a classic example being through hooliganism, an act which can elements already installed.
really only be prevented through education and the promotion Other tests can be carried out to test the seismic resistance
of public and individual responsibility. (usually with sand-filled balls) and the resistance against the
As far as sports equipment is concerned, such as the baskets, passage of small bodies with a significant kinetic energy (10 cm
testing protocols have been drawn up and, in the case of FIBA, ball filled with sand).
there are specific standards that must be met for a basket to be Equally important in sports facilities is the resistance to eccentric
suitable for international events. The exact standards are laid loads and tearing, with similar tests in place to determine the
down in the section on baskets of the Official Basketball Rules. strength of anchoring elements and load-bearing walls.
Today it is possible to plan and monitor the safety of a sports
Fire Prevention
facility thanks to software based on a finite-element calculation.
A fire in a sports facility is one of the most dangerous occurrences
The present tendency is to include in the structural plan different
that can happen because both people and objects are at risk
levels of safety according to the type of building and customer
at the same time.
requirements. In many cases the costs for the maintenance of
By studying the effects of fires and examining “case” studies,
the safety of the structure also include sensors to signal any
nowadays we can say that fires always develop according to a
variations in the sensitive parts of the structure (roofing, frame
specific model, within foreseeable limits, and that a fire usually
structures, etc) in ordinary operating conditions or following
takes a while before the maximum level of danger is reached.
exceptional atmospheric events (tornados, heavy snow falls,
This observation has allowed planners to shift their attention
etc.).
to fire prevention by adopting an FSE approach (Fire Safety
These devices may seem excessive; however, some events in
Engineering), particularly in the case of complex buildings or
the past few years have demonstrated how solid and sturdy
buildings with leading-edge technology.
sports facilities can be transformed into community shelters,
In the project phase, fire protection engineers identify
offering a safe haven to people hit by exceptional atmospheric
potential risks and design safeguards to aid fire prevention,
events or natural catastrophes (windstorms, flooding, etc).
by hypothesising and studying scenarios (or models) that may
As regards vertical-closing and partitioning elements (walls,
trigger a fire. These elements are then used to evaluate and
windows and frames), a series of tests can be carried out to check
plan the fire prevention systems.
the resistance to light and heavy collisions, reproducing the
Information technology offers an invaluable insight into fire
conditions of use mentioned above. To simulate light collisions,
development and combustion, thanks to specially designed fire
cylindrical or spherical sacks can be filled with sand to weigh
simulation software which allows a thermodynamic analysis of

diagram 7a
the behaviour of buildings from the onset of a fire to structural
collapse. The simulation highlights the critical parts of the
Fire resistance HOURS 1/2 1 2 3
structure and the time it takes for the fire to reach those parts.
Structure S minimum thickness in cm
Prevention measures
FULL BRICKS
Fire prevention is the most important element in safeguarding
1.50
against the risk of fire and is based on two main concepts: S normal 13 13 26 26
plastering
·· Passive fire protection aims to prevent or contain fires, or to 1.50
slow the spread through the use of fire-resistant systems

PERFORATED BRICKS
and elements such as floors, walls and doors, which act as
WALLS
1.50
barriers; S normal 10 20 30 30
plastering
·· Active fire protection is often seen as a supplementary 1.50
protection measure, adopted when a sufficient level of passive

PLAIN CONCRETE
protection cannot be obtained or maintained. It involves the
installation of fire protection systems which are activated S 8 10 12 16
manually or automatically to control or extinguish a fire.

Diagram 7a
Reaction of materials
Passive protection measures are adopted in both the planning
REINFORCED CONCRETE
to fire and the operational phase with a view to reducing the probability upper surface
of flooring
10 14 20 20
of a fire in the following way: S
normal
1.50 plastering
·· Correct position of the buildings;
·· Reduction of fire load; REINFORCED BRICKS upper surface
of flooring
FLOORS
·· Choosing the right furnishing materials (carpeting, wallpaper, S normal 13 13 26 26
etc); 1.50 plastering
·· Adequate occupancy separation of the areas with fire-resistant

METAL MESH FILLED WITH CEMENT
rated floors and walls;
iron net
·· Exit routes and safe areas appropriate for number of people, normal 16 24 30 30
S plastering
location and building characteristics.
When passive protection is not sufficient, despite having
GIRDERS
adopted the criteria above, an active protection system must cement-vermiculite

coating
be put into service to reduce the consequences of a fire. This 1.00* 2.50* 3.70* 4.50*
S
includes:
·· A suitable fire detection/alarm system to protect the substance
PILLARS
and content of the building and compensate for any weak cement-vermiculite
coating
1.06* 2.25* 3.75* 4.75*
points which may arise, for example, due to the escape routes S
or the reaction to fire;
·· A fire extinguishing system, manual or automatic; *thickness of insulation coating in cm
172
·· A smoke extraction system, natural or forced. components that are less sensitive to heat or by increasing the
Reaction of materials to fire thickness of the materials covering the steel in order to increase
The materials used in the construction of sports facilities are the the cross-section of the constructional component.
most widely studied elements in the reaction of materials to fire. The reaction of pre-stressed concrete to fire is usually more
For obvious safety reasons, all the parts of a basketball facility critical than the reaction of ordinary reinforced concrete
must be sufficiently fire-resistant. Fire resistance is rated in because high resistance steel is used which is cold-drawn.
minutes, and corresponds to the length of time during which an To increase fire-resistance, many solutions suggest reinforcing
element may be exposed to fire without impairing its function. concrete structures with appropriate insulation (gypsum,
This duration should comply with the national regulations in vermiculite, etc).
force or with the fire prevention code adopted. Steel structures have better mechanical properties, however,
The materials, apart from being fire-retardant, must not release they are very sensitive to changes in temperature because their
toxic substances or harmful gases in a quantity that may high thermal conductivity favours the transmission of heat.
jeopardise people’s safety. (Table 7a) The critical temperature for mild steel is 550°C while for
Today, the most commonly used materials in the construction hardened steel and hot-rolled bars it is 400°C. Even in this case,
industry, as well as in the finishing and fitting sectors, undergo fire resistance can be improved in different ways, such as the
rigorous fire-resistance testing, and so their reaction to fire is use of protective paint, immersion of construction elements in
known. The materials are supplied with a product certificate that materials with good fire resistance properties, in particular the
specifies the behaviour in case of fire, thus allowing planners to use of heat-resistant steel, and the use of protective coatings to
select the most suitable materials. Nowadays, the regulations protect the construction elements from being in direct contact
in force in many countries prescribe the types of materials to with the flames.
be used in relation to the type of building and the activities to Timber structures have very interesting resistance characteris-
be carried out. tics despite being made of combustible materials. In fact, when
The main characteristics of the most common materials are timber is exposed to rising temperatures, the wood releases
briefly described below. humidity (which can reach values between 10% and 20% of
its weight) through its surface layer, thus maintaining its char-
Even if reinforced concrete structures are built with fire resistant
acteristics up to a temperature of 300°C. Higher temperatures
materials, it is important to remember that the mechanical
cause the combustion and charring of the lower layers (500°C);
and physical characteristics of these materials may change
at this stage, the combustion process slows down because of
as temperatures increase; thus, the reaction of a reinforced
the quality of the oxygen and the speed of transmission of the
concrete structure to fire depends on the reaction of its
heat from the outside to the inside, which, in turn, depends on
component materials.
the thermal conductivity of the material. In fact, char has a very
What is important where steel comes into play is the critical
low thermal conductivity value (approx. 0.03kcal/m2h°C)
temperature at which the elasticity limit coincides with the
tensile strength of steel; the temperature at which steel begins Another characteristic of timber structures is that their resistance
to change its shape is lower than the temperature which causes to fire is proportionate to the dimension of their cross-sections,
concrete to disintegrate. whereas the cross-section of steel is irrelevant to fire protection.
Resistance to fire can therefore be improved by selecting This allows the construction components to be sized according
to their resistance to fire: In fact, assuming that the average
char rate is 0.64mm/min, the dimension of the necessary sudden cooling. In these types of structures, the resistance
section can increase by 0.64 mm/min within the nominal fire of the surface exposed to the fire depends on the type of
resistance duration. The char rate may also reach the highest plastering and the method of construction. In other words, it
value, which, depending on the exposure to the flames and is the combination of two elements that determines the fire
shape of the components could reach 0.84 mm/min in the case resistance of a structure: the plaster and the structure.
pillars and columns, for example. Resistance to fire can also Factors influencing fire resistance
be improved by using fire protection treatments and solutions, The fire resistance of a structure depends on the use of various
such as protective paints, cavity walls or pressure treatments elements and on the degree of danger. The resistance to fire may
with chemical solutions. Measures of this kind are usually taken also vary according to the hierarchy of a structural component.
when the cross-section of the construction components are For this reason, load-bearing structures must have a certain
small and therefore have a low resistance to fire. degree of mechanical resistance and endurance, as well as
Structures made of full bricks that have already been other properties such as thermal insulation, non-deformability
subjected to rather high firing temperatures (800°C -1,000°C) and continuity between elements. A series of factors can
have excellent levels of fire resistance. influence the fire resistance of structures:
As regards plastered walls, plaster made with normal lime Temperature at which the structure is exposed and its variation
mortar acts as a first barrier, delaying the diffusion of heat (a sudden variation may cause a fast change in the mechanical
and thus allowing a gradual increase of temperature inside the properties and compactness of materials).
walls rather than a sudden increase as in the case of bare walls. ·· Exposure time;
Improved levels of fire resistance can be achieved by using a
·· Thermal tensions;
sand and cement mortar for plastering and for the roof layers.
·· Internal thermal conductivity;
Walls and partitions made of hollow bricks are less resistant
·· Thermal expansion;
to fire because, once the plaster gives way, the outer surface is
·· Material degradation with reduced resistance to mechanical
suddenly exposed to a high temperature, the size of the holes
stress and high temperatures;
is reduced and the bricks crumble.
·· Humidity contained in the structures during the fire prevention
Structures made of tiles, perforated tiles, concrete blocks,
tests.
hollow concrete blocks, or ventilated concrete blocks are highly
resistant to fire. The best and most fire-resistant structure is It is important to remember that a decrease in the resistance to
one with mortar that binds the layers of bricks. Resistance to fire and an increase in the deformation of materials do not only
fire can be improved even further by increasing the quantity depend on the temperature, but also on the length of exposure
of ordinary sand and lime mortar, cement and sand plaster, to this temperature.
gypsum and cement plaster, or cement and vermiculite plaster. An increase in temperature inside a structure depends on:
Robust horizontal concrete edge beams in the walls prevent ·· The thermal capacity of the structure’s materials;
high walls from swelling and collapsing outwards in the event of ·· The thermal conductivity;
a fire. Structures made of hollow bricks and, above all, mixed ·· The nature and thickness of the covering material.
floor types and reinforced tile floors are, without a doubt, less Resistance to fire is usually influenced by the following
resistant to fire because they are sensitive to heat and therefore variables:
may react to sudden variations in heat and in particular to
174
·· Water systems;
Handle / Trigger
·· Foam systems;
·· Carbon dioxide systems;
Indicator
·· Powder systems;
·· Semi-fixed systems;
Inspection tag
·· Automatic fire detection systems.
Some of these systems are “fixed”, others are “portable” .

The portable type are the “extinguishers”, special cylindrical Diagram 7.1
Tank
pressure vessels containing extinguishing agents. Extinguishers Extinguisher
must be placed strategically throughout the building, be clearly

Label Hose and/ visible, well signed and easy to handle. (Diagram 7.1)
or nozzle
Water systems
Water is the most well known and widely used substance to fight
fires. It is easily available in most countries and cost-effective if
the supply is easy. Systems that discharge water can be used
directly against a fire, to cool the burnt material and smother
combustion by transforming water into vapour, removing the
diagram 7.1
oxygen and transforming the surface of certain products such
·· The temperature and its variation, exposure time and amount as oil and alcohol (emulsion and dilution). These systems also
of heat developed per time unit; keep the temperature of the materials and facilities at a safe
·· The mechanical and thermal characteristics of the materials level, to prevent explosions or the collapse of structures. In this
that make up the structure, that is to say, the expansion way, a fire can be extinguished under safe conditions.
coefficient and the thermal conductivity coefficient; There are different types of water systems:
·· The thermal capacity of the structure, the actual reaction of The fire sprinkler system is the oldest system but not
the material to high temperatures, the state of degradation necessarily the best one. It consists of a series of sprinklers
and the level of humidity of the materials. connected to a water distribution piping network fixed to
the ceiling. In automatic systems, the nozzles are fitted with
Each structure transfers the heat produced by a fire in different
special sensors to detect when a certain temperature has been
ways. An overheated skeleton of a structure may crumble or
reached; the water pressurised in the pipes is opened and
break, and major damage can be caused if water is used to
water is discharged. The pipes are continuously supplied by a
extinguish the fire. This factor is taken into account in the
system of special valves and pumps. Given the height at which
following descriptions of the most suitable substances to
the sprinklers are installed, temperature measurement is slow
extinguish a fire.
and before a large quantity of water is discharged, the fire has
Fire extinguishing systems probably fully developed.
Different types of fire extinguishing systems (active fire Dry sprinkler systems are used as an alternative if the fluid-
protection) are available: containing pipes have to be mounted outside the building, or
inside but at temperatures liable to reach freezing point. In this a protective layer between the burning surface and the foam,
case, water is not actually present in the piping until the system preventing foam breakdown by alcohols present in the burning
is in operation. Instead the pipes contain pressurised air at a fuel, at the same time trapping and preserving the water they
“maintenance” pressure lower than the water supply pressure. contain.
When the sprinklers are exposed to sufficient heat, they open According to the quality and type of generators used, foams
the maintenance air vents, the air pressure in the piping drops are divided into the following categories according to their
allowing the special dry pipe valves to be opened manually expansion ratio (ER), i.e. the ratio between the concentrated
or automatically, and releasing water into the piping system. mixture (water + foaming liquid) and the foam produced by the
This system is preferable when a large scale intervention is generator:
required because the hazardous nature of the materials must 1. Low expansion foams: ER = 1:5 to 1:20.
be protected.
2. Medium expansion foams: ER =1:20 and 1:200.
The water barrier consists of a series of special sprinklers
3. High expansion foams: ER = greater than 1:200.
connected to one another and to a water supply pipeline. It has
Low and medium expansion foams are low-viscosity and
the function of isolating the adjacent area and creating a barrier
mobile; they are able to quickly cover large areas, superficially
to stop the fire from propagating or to contain the effects of
extinguish a fire and provide isolation by covering burnt material.
radiation.
High expansion foams offer volumetric protection and saturation
Deluge water spray systems use special water-spraying
and are particularly suitable for enclosed spaces where quick
nozzles under relatively high pressure to obtain a spray which
filling is needed.
can cool and smother the fire. This system is suitable for
Foams cannot be used for certain materials, such as peroxides
fighting fires that may develop in tanks and deposits, to protect
which produce oxygen and self-fuel during combustion,
special equipment, transformers or generators, or substances
cancelling the smothering effect.
such as oil.
The use of high expansion foams to obtain the volumetric
Foam systems
saturation required does not pose a hazard to people as it still
Foam contains a multitude of gas bubbles contained in pockets
allows them to breathe; unlike water, it does not have a wet
formed by liquid surface tension. It can be used to progressively
effect and does not contaminate materials, not even the most
extinguish a fire without flashback.
delicate. The high efficiency of these systems considerably
Different types of foams are available with different functions
reduces water consumption and consequently the need for a
according to their intended area of use: protein based, fluoride
water supply.
protein based, synthetic surface type, alcohol-resistant agents
The effectiveness of fire-fighting foam systems depends
and AFFF (aqueous film forming foam). Protein based foams are
exclusively on their compatibility with the product to be protected,
made from organic animal products; they deteriorate quickly
their specific use in relation to the surface and volume to be
and their effectiveness is limited. Synthetic surface foams,
protected and the quality of their foaming agent.
used in special types of extinguishers, can be preserved for
Aqueous film forming foams (AFFF) are used for vapour
a long time. Alcohol-resistant foams are used for particular
suppression, to extinguish fires involving hydrocarbons.
substances such as aqueous solution polar solvents, alcohols,
If these foams are used in devices suitable for the generation
ketones and ethers; these foams contain a polymer that forms
of low expansion mechanical foams, they produce a vapour-
176
resistant foam blanket, with exceptional characteristics dioxide discharge systems: high pressure and low pressure. High
compared to other foaming agents. When the bubbles break, pressure systems utilise pressure cylinders (30 kg-45 kg) to house
the mixture flows gradually and floats on the surface of the the CO2 gas which is kept in a liquid state at room temperature
fuel making it completely resistant to vapour, thus preventing a (20°C) and under a pressure of approximately 57 kg/cm².
rekindling of the fire or continuing combustion on the surface. Low pressure systems (used when large amounts of gas are
Low expansion systems are usually based on the principle of required) utilise a low pressure refrigerated tank to store CO2
proportioning and mixing the foaming liquid with water. These at its typically low storage temperature of -20°C; these systems
systems are made up of a network of pipelines which distribute are connected to cooling systems which require considerable
the mixture, and spraying nozzles which create the foamy servicing.
emulsion. Carbon dioxide systems can be operated manually or
The nozzles must be positioned towards the area to be protected. automatically. They are made up of a series of cylinders, gas
They must be appropriately installed to enable a rapid and manifolds, distribution pipelines and gas distributor. The
uniform distribution of the foam on the area to be protected. cylinders are opened by means of special valves and servo
Medium and low expansion systems require a dosing system controls, allowing the gas to flow into the pipelines and be
and pipelines to take the mixture to the generators. discharged.
The generators are installed on the ceiling or upper part of the The efficiency of carbon dioxide systems depends on two basic
premises to be protected; there must be enough generators elements: with total saturation systems, the gas must not be allowed
to saturate the premises in a relatively short time (3-6 min) to escape when being discharged, so it is essential that all doors
depending on the type of material. and windows are closed and any air conditioning or ventilation
The use of high expansion foams (as for low and medium systems which may remove the gas must be switched off.
expansion foams) is limited to the protection of indoor areas Carbon dioxide is lethal because once it has been discharged it
because this type of foam is very light and can easily drift away rapidly absorbs the oxygen indispensable for human survival.
with the wind or air currents if sprayed outdoors. Alarm and evacuation systems are therefore essential and
Carbon dioxide systems the gas must only be released once the premises have been
Carbon dioxide is an inert gas, heavier than air, dielectric, non- completely evacuated.
corrosive and non-toxic, but with a smothering effect. Because Dry powder systems
of its weight, the discharged gas tends to settle in layers towards Like carbon dioxide systems, powder systems allow for one
the ground. Carbon dioxide extinguishes a fire by displacing single, short discharge (unless reserves are present).
the atmospheric oxygen and reducing its concentration so that Powder systems are undoubtedly very effective, yet they do
combustion stops. This system can be used to fight all types of not eliminate the risk of a fire rekindling. These systems may
fires, in particular to protect materials for which other systems be made of pressurised tanks, discharge devices and powder
are not recommended, due to the high costs and vulnerable distribution pipelines; if the tanks are not pressurised, cylinders
nature of the materials and equipment to be protected. containing propelling gas are used to pressurise the tank when
Carbon dioxide systems are usually operated with one single needed. The valves which control the opening of the tank can
discharge; for this reason, it is important that qualified technicians be operated manually or automatically.
take over the planning of such systems. There are two carbon
Semi-fixed fire suppression systems Those above ground have the advantage of always being
Compared to the fixed systems, these systems offer various visible and accessible, they have numerous nozzles, which can
levels of safety and reliability. Human intervention is necessary be rapidly put into use and allow different interventions to be
to position, activate and handle the equipment. The result is that carried out at the same time. The hydrants should be positioned
an intervention of this kind often takes longer than expected. at intervals of 40m to 60m along the fire prevention network.
A good level of success can be obtained through continued The fire hoses should be fitted with spray nozzles which enable
personnel training, a certain degree of familiarity with fires the water pattern and water pressure to be controlled and
(through practical training) and valid technical equipment for fires to be extinguished with greater success. Special smaller
all types of risk. These systems include water supply networks devices may also be installed (pre-mixers) so that foam can be
with hydrants and fire hose boxes with rolled hoses, because used with both special nozzles and traditional fire hoses.
despite having a fixed water supply, mobile equipment is Fire pumps must be practical and robust, capable of reaching
needed to reach the fire. (Diagram 7.2) full-flow capacity in a short time and without any problems.
The components of the fire fighting supply system (pumps, Electric pumps should have a double supply of energy or use
piping) must be used exclusively for this purpose and be an emergency generator. Motor pumps should have powerful
independent from the components that supply fixed systems diesel engines, preferably water-cooled.
(sprinklers, deluge, foam, etc.). The water supply should be able to supply water to the system
There are two types of hydrants: above-ground and underground. for at least two hours, otherwise there must be systems in place
(Diagram 7.3) which can be activated when water is most needed.
diagram 7.2
Protective
housing
Tube ø2 Glass
Thrower
nozzle with
attachment
Ring UNI 45
support
Diagram 7.2 Hydrant tap

Seal
Hydrant
Hydrant UNI 70
Wall or Hydrant well
column Body of the
hydrant
Connection
trunk
UNI 70 HYDRANT FOR EXTERNAL USE

178
diagram 7.3
Automatic fire detection systems
These systems do not have an actual fire extinguishing function,
Element to take down hat for but merely detect and signalise the presence of a fire. They
approaching to valve lever of dissection
can be connected to fixed fire extinguishing systems to create
Revolving hat for an automatic system or they can be installed independently to
distribution lever
simply detect a fire and raise the alarm.
Fire hose connection
UNI 45 or UNI 70 The right choice of detectors is fundamental to guarantee a fast
and effective warning system to alert people to an impending
fire.
Smoke detectors are the most effective in the case of small
fires. With rapidly propagating fires, smoke detectors, thermal
Connection UNI 100 or UNI 125
for linkage to fire-engime detectors or radiation detectors can be used, however, a
combination of detectors is generally the best solution.
Automatic detection systems have alarm signal delay systems
which allow safety officers to objectively evaluate the situation
Diagram 7.3
before taking any important decision. Unless the alarm system
Hydrant
is faulty or has been tampered with, it starts automatically,
once the delay period is over (during which the detection alarm
is suspended). In this way the following objectives can be
achieved:
·· Cost-effective management (actual balance and fewer false
alarms);
·· Immediate intervention of the internal organisation,
Delivery valve
indispensable when lives are at risk;
·· False alarms can be prevented thus avoiding needless calls
to the fire brigade;
Dissection valve ·· Well trained internal organisation: this is fundamental for a
successful fire fighting operation.
ø according to specific
Public Safety
Introduction
The safety of players has already been studied in detail in
the chapter on the playing area. This chapter is dedicated
specifically to the safety of the public.
In general, all basketball facilities open to the public must be
authorised by special commissions for the control of public
buildings. A certificate confirming the fire prevention measures
adopted by the sports facility must be presented to the facility.

commission for authorisation. The minimum size of the car parks must comply with the town
Most national regulations require both the authorisation and planning regulations in force in the country in which the facility
the fire prevention certificate; these regulations pay particular is located.
attention to the level of crowding caused by the presence of a The spaces required for service vehicles should not be
large number of people, and to the use of modern construction calculated as part of the parking area. Service vehicles should
materials and sophisticated technological installations. be allowed to approach the facility, make the necessary
Particular attention must also be paid to the regulations manoeuvres and quickly reach the adjacent area. Access to
concerning the escape routes from the sports facilities, the layout the spaces reserved service vehicles to manoeuvre must meet
of space and dispersion of people. Concrete precautions must the following specifications:
be identified and a study of the modifications to implemented ·· Clear height of at least 4 m;
in existing facilities must be carried out. ·· Minimum width of 4 m;
Parking areas and external access routes ·· Gradient less than 10%;
The area intended for the construction of a basketball facility ·· Load resistance for vehicles weighing over 20 t.
must be large enough to allow for rapid evacuation in an A service area must be provided next to the sports facilities;
emergency; this area can be used for one or more parking this area must include open-air spaces which are clearly
areas near or adjacent to the facility, calculated according to marked and will not impede the flow of people coming out of
the national regulations in force and the total capacity of the
diagram 7.4
Exit in one direction Exit in two directions

The site of the sports facilities shall allow the The exit roads for the public have a width equal to
circulation and handling of emergency vehicles, as half the width of the total exit doors when leaving
well the possibility of elevation towards the adjacent the facility by both directions.
areas.
Diagram 7.4
Exit
A= Entrance and handling areas for emergency

vehicles.
Leave width > 3.50 m
Incline > 10%
Resistance to load > 20t
180
the hall and vehicles leaving. These spaces must be level and Each sector should be separated from the adjacent one/s using
large enough to guarantee a crowd density of one person per adequate partitions.
square metre, with a minimum distance of 3.50 m from the exit, Each sector must have at least two exits, service areas and
although 4 m are recommended. independent exit routes; these must be easily identifiable and
The boundary of the service area must have openings which marked with signs that conform to the national regulations.
are the same width as the exit of the facility. (Diagram 7.4) Metal access doors should be installed to allow entry to the
It is also advisable to have open-air spaces within 50m from different sectors.
the exits of the facility which should be large enough to A CCTV surveillance system is recommended in high-level
accommodate the public, assuming a crowd density of one facilities to monitor the spectator areas and spectator access
person per square metre. These spaces should be used for to the facility.
people to collect in a safe place until emergency services
Internal access routes
arrive.
The steps leading to the various sectors should be at least
High-level facilities must have an external barrier at least 2.20m 1.20m wide and serve no more than 20 seats per row on each
high, made of inflammable material, capable of resisting a thrust side.
of 80N/m² at the highest point. The barrier openings should be
Above and below every 15 rows of the tribune, there must be
commensurate with the facility’s exit width.
a gangway parallel to the rows, which is at least 1.20m wide.
Each opening must be fitted with gates which must be kept Gangways are not necessary when the access routes to the
open during sports competitions. various sectors lead directly to the exits. (Diagram 7.5)
The aforementioned specifications for external barriers are also The step of each seat row must have tread of at least 60 cm and
valid for barriers inside the service area, if required. a riser-tread ratio of at least 1:2.
Public access and spectator areas The stairway leading spectators to the various sectors must be
The official seating capacity reserved for the public must be straight.
established for all facilities. The steps of each flight must have a constant tread and riser
The number of seating spaces is usually determined by the total value. The riser must not be more than 23cm and the tread
number of seating elements (seats) or by the length in linear must be at least 25cm. Here, too, the riser-tread ratio must be
meters of the steps or benches, divided by 0.45-0.48m. All at least 1:2.
seats must be clearly numbered.
Exits
The spaces reserved for the free flow of people during events The spectator area and the sports area must have separate
must not be taken into account when calculating the total exits. Separation of the two areas must comply with existing
capacity. The capacity of the playing area, on the other hand, regulations, however, access between the two areas should be
depends on the sporting activities and is based on the number made possible via metal access doors.
of users and personnel.
The total width of the exits in indoor facilities must be sized
In high-level facilities, the spectator area should be divided into according to the crowd flow rate of more than 50 people per
sectors. door module.
The capacity of each sector should not exceed 4,000 The width of each exit must be of at least as wide as two
spectators. modules, whereby one door module is 60cm wide.
Two staircases can be combined to form one single one as long

diagram 7.5
as the width of the single staircase is the same as the sum of
min 120 cm min 120 cm
the widths of the two separate staircases.
Note: This example does For staircases wider than 3m, a central handrail may be
Parallel gangway to rows not require a parallel
gangway to the rows required.
The exit routes in the spectators’ area must not be longer than
40-50m if appropriate smoke evacuation systems are installed
and linked to fire detection systems.
There must be at least two exits per sector.
Information
Nowadays mass media play a fundamental role in the psychology
Diagram 7.5
of supporters as they are generally key to discussions on
Gangway sporting events.
Given the growing importance of the mass media in the world
of sports in general, and particularly inside sports facilities too,
closer cooperation with the mass media, and rationalisation in
3
this sense, could undoubtedly help in terms of safety prevention
during events.
Detailed information on the venue, safety routes and services
within the facility could be published in special guides,
magazines or leaflets to familiarise visitors with the facility.
From a safety point of view, it is important to remember here
the importance of the facility’s sound diffusion system. A
satisfactory sound system can be used as a valuable mass
The stairs must be rectangular, with consistent treads and notification tool to alert people throughout the entire facility to
risers, with the riser no higher than 17cm and the tread at least emergencies and coordinate safe evacuation.
30 cm deep. In fact, if used correctly and wisely, a sound system is one of
The stairways must be straight with a minimum of three steps the most effective ways of providing information to prevent and
and a maximum of 15 per flight. reduce incidents.
Intermediate landings must be as wide as the stairs, not wider In some cases, incidents can be managed by transmitting audio
or narrower. messages from safety operators to control panic and the crowd
The walls along the stairs must be smooth up to a height of flow; these operators work from a special room and must be so
2m from the stair floor, and there should be no niches or parts familiar with the facility that they can guide the public safely to
jutting out. All stairways must be fitted with a handrail that must the exits.
not project beyond the tolerance limit allowed; the end of the
handrail must be turned towards the walls.
182
Organisation ·· Extraordinary events require a careful study of the event plan

For safety reasons, the local authorities and event organisers and programme.
must be in contact with one another and their work must be
coordinated. Another important aspect is the collaboration between the
organisers, safety bodies, owner and/or manager of the facility
Particular attention must be paid to defining the roles of those
and, obviously, the local authorities.
responsible for public safety and to emergency intervention
planning. Awareness and knowledge of the local area and the overall
Helicopter surveillance of crowds, in conjunction with first aid coordination of all the parties involved should also be
services and the fire brigade, has often proved to be essential considered.
for spectators leaving the facility en masse. Safety bodies and facility staff must be familiar with the area to
Public safety is synonymous with comfort; therefore, the be monitored and know how to act in case of emergency.
criteria to make the public’s entrance and exit as smooth as The most important aspect of public safety is the control of the
possible should be defined separately from the fire prevention public at the entrance and at the pre-selection barriers where
measures. security officers can check to ensure that no dangerous objects
Access routes, main public transport services, car parks, and are taken into the sports facility.
parking areas for the visiting team’s supporters must be clearly To avoid unpleasant occurrences, some cities chose to provide
marked, for this is the basis of effective public safety. all potential spectators with identity cards before the event.
One difference must, however, be made between ordinary and The spectators must then show their ID card at the information
extraordinary sporting events: points before purchasing their tickets. This precaution has
·· Ordinary events do not require any additional measures proved to be beneficial as it enables unwanted spectators to
compared to those planned at the beginning of the professional be refused entry to events.
sports programme. On the whole, sporting events are there to attract the public,
therefore, the onus is on the organisers to ensure that spectators
diagram 7.6
can enjoy an event in the best possible conditions of comfort
and safety.
Safety Signs
Introduction (Diagram 7.6)
The purpose of safety signs is to draw people’s attention quickly
and easily to objects and situations which can be potentially Diagram 7.6
hazardous. Safety signs are based on simple, straightforward Signs
symbols which are associated with concepts which are easy to
understand. (Diagram 7.6 a, b, c, d)
Safety signs do not, however, replace the necessary safety
measures.
Safety signs should be used exclusively to point out hazards or
provide information quickly and precisely.
Diagram 7.6a-b
Signs
diagram 7.6a diagram 7.6b
diagram 7.6c diagram 7.6d
Diagram 7.6c-d
Signs
184
The colours of safety signs have the following meanings: d. Symbols: these must be as simple as possible with no
(Table 7.7b) detail.
·· Red -prohibition;
·· Yellow - caution, indicates a potential hazard;
·· Green - indication;
·· Blue - information or directions.
The table below contains further specifications: (Table 7.7c)
Combination of colours and shapes
The configuration established by existing regulations is as
follows:
a. Prohibition signs: white background with text or symbols in
black;
b. Information, indications, attention signs: background of the
safety colour and symbol or text in a contrasting colour;
c. Additional signs: white background with black text or safety
colour background and text in a contrasting colour;
diagram 7.7b
SHAPE
COLOUR
RED Diagram 7.7b

Combination of
shapes and colours
YELLOW
SAFE SITUATION
GREEN FIRST AID EQUIPMENT
BLUE
COLOUR EXAMPLE
RED STOP, EMERGENCY STOP DEVICES, PROHIBITION

Diagram 7.7c
DANGER (FIRE, EXPLOSION, RADATION, CHEMICAL SUBSTANCES, THRESH-
Combination of YELLOW
colours and shapes
OLDS, DANGEROUS PASSAGES, OBSTACLES)
PASSAGES AND EMERGENCY EXITS, FIRST AID SHOWERS, FIRST AID AND
GREEN
RESCUE AREAS
OBLIGATION OF WEARING A PERSONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT, LOCATION OF
BLUE
THE TELEPHONE
diagram 7.7c
limination of
Architectural Barriers
E
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 8 › Elimination of Architectural Barriers
188
I
ndoor and outdoor spaces of all buildings, including sports needs can be met by equipping playing areas with special
facilities, should be planned and built to welcome all potential equipment and devices. Particular reference is made to this at
users, both able-bodied persons and persons with physical the end of the chapter.
or sensory disabilities.
Access
To meet these requirements, the people involved in
Every sports facility must provide a series of disabled parking
commissioning, planning and managing buildings must have
bays close to the entrance of the facility. The parking spaces
the necessary competences to identify the principles of good
must be clearly marked, both on the ground and with sign posts
accessibility.
using the international disabled sign.
These requirements should be included in the initial
-- An access road with parking bays reserved for persons with a
specifications, and should be an integral part of the project
disability is essential for those arriving by car or another form
starting from the planning process; they should be taken into
of transport;
account throughout the project phases, construction process
In particular:
and management phase once the project has been completed.
·· The access point for cars must be clearly marked at the
This approach will deliver the following positive results:
entrance of the car park;
·· Coordination of the specific needs into one single general
·· Car spaces must be clearly identified, indicating spaces for
project, consequently reducing the need for separate facilities
drivers or passengers with a disability;
for persons with a disability or the need to adapt buildings
·· Disabled parking bays must be as close to the facility entrance
to accommodate specific needs which were not taken into
as possible. If the pathway to the entrance is uncovered, the
account from the start;
parking bays must be no more than 50 m from the building, or
·· General benefits deriving from a careful and safe project;
a maximum of 100 m if the pathway is covered;
benefits enjoyable by all users, some of which may have
·· In the car parking areas for spectators, a minimum of 3%
similar needs to persons with a disability, such as children,
of the parking spaces should be reserved for people with a
parents with children, or elderly people;
disability;
·· Strategic positioning and optimum use of special areas for
·· The pathway between the parking bays and the route towards
specific needs, or in the case of building restoration ensuring
the entrance must be free of obstacles in order not to impede
that different levels can be connected to make every floor
wheelchair users. The parking spaces must be close to
easily accessible.
pedestrian routes so they can be accessed directly from the
The advice provided in this chapter is in line with what is typically
car, avoiding potential hazards (passing cars) or obstacles
established by good practice. The dimensions, standards and
along the way (steps or steep ramps);
diagrams contained in this chapter are based on the standards
·· Traffic routes must be distinguishable from pedestrian routes
followed in the UK, Italy and Europe in general, although in
through coloured and textured markings.
some cases, different local regulations may have precedence.
Parking spaces reserved for vehicles transporting persons with
This guide specifies the general measures foreseen with regard
a disability must have the following minimum dimensions:
to access to sports facilities, circulation inside the building and
usability of the facilities. The specific needs of athletes with -- Minimum width of 3.20m for herringbone pattern spaces
a disability will vary according to the type of disability; these (Diagram 8.1) or perpendicular to the pavement (Diagram
8.2), divided into two sections; one for the actual car and the
189 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 8 › Elimination of Architectural Barriers
Diagram. 8.1 Full width to suit Shared space Full width to suit
Curb ramp wheelchair user between 2 wheelchair user
Parking is prefered standard bays is prefered
Shared space
between 2 Curb ramp
standard bays
Diagram. 8.2
Parking
diagram 8.3 diagram 8.3a
Diagram. 8.3
Full width to suit
Parking wheelchair user
is prefered
Shared space Curb ramp
between 2 Curb ramp
standard bays
Diagram. 8.3a
Parking
190
other as a transfer bay to allow people with a disability to get Routes and ramps
in and out of the car with ease; At least one route must be foreseen on a level surface, leading
-- At least 6m in length for spaces parallel to pavement, taking from the external areas to the main entrance, to enable persons
into account the space necessary for a wheelchair to pass with low or impaired mobility to benefit from car park facilities
between one vehicle and another (Diagram 8.3). and outdoor services. Where necessary, rest areas with a
The space for the actual car and the space for the transfer bay bench should be provided every 30 metres.
must either be on the same level or on different levels with a External routes must take into account the limited ability of
maximum difference of 2.5cm. many users to cover long distances on foot or in a wheelchair.
These two areas must be clearly identified using different Distances and physical elements that require an additional
colours, i.e. the disabled transfer bay must be marked with effort, such as ramps, should be reduced in order to be practical
yellow diagonal stripes. (Diagram 8. 5).
Loading and unloading zones should be in areas with zero or In general, the routes should be 1.20m-2.00m wide to allow for
low inclination. If low-floor accessible buses are to be used, wheelchairs. In some countries a minimum width of 90cm is
provisions for suitable pavements or temporary ramps should allowed for wheelchairs, however, a minimum width of 1.50m
be made. will allow wheelchair users to pass one another freely. The total
There must therefore be an aisle of at least 2.40m wide and width must not be reduced by obstacles.
7m long, adjacent and parallel to the vehicle pull-up space In particular, the routes must have the following
(Diagram 8.3a). characteristics:
A ramp or dropped kerbs must connect the pedestrian area ·· Maximum 5% gradient. If this is not possible, a gradient of
of the car park with nearby pedestrian routes when there is a up to 8% is allowed as long as the following elements are
height difference of more than 2.5cm. foreseen
Clear signage must be provided at the entry from the public -- A level horizontal surface every 9 linear metres of the
highway indicating the main areas of the facility and their pedestrian route, measuring at least 1.50x1.50m Ramps must
access routes. Maps and signs must be clearly visible and have level landings at the top and bottom, each measuring
easily accessible. at least 2.10x2.10m. Landings must also be foreseen in the
middle if there is a change in direction of the ramp
Tactile information
All routes should provide aural and tactile information, -- A 10cm raised kerb on each side of the pedestrian route
supplemented by Braille tables, to provide orientation for the unless a flat parapet or balustrade is provided
blind and visually impaired, and alert them to vehicle routes, -- A handrail along one side of the route at a height between 80-
pathways and crossings. Tactile surfaces can be used to identify 92cm, and where necessary a second hand rail at the height
crossings, ramps, steps and stairs, as well as other critical of 75cm, each extending 30cm beyond the end of the ramp
points such as entrances and doors. These surfaces must have ·· The handrail must be continuous to allow for an uninterrupted
a minimum width of 30cm (Diagram 8.4). Other elements, such hold; it must be 3.5-5.0cm in diameter and must be nylon-
as handrails, should also be installed to complete the textured coated or covered with PVC-u or similar so it is not cold to
route, making it safe and convenient. the touch
·· All ramps must have a handrail on either side
191
192
0.20 0.20
Warning code Warning code
Diagram. 8.4
Access Tactile
Information
Code of Code of
rectilinear rectilinear
direction direction
0.40 0.40
diagram 8.4
diagram 8.5
Continuous handrails Top

0.30
Ø 45/60
0.80
max 8°
max 8°
Ramp Landing Ramp min.

max 9.00 min. 1.50 max 9.00 1.50
LONGITUDINAL
Diagram. 8.5
SECTION
Ramps
1.50
0.10
Antiskid floor
Cross section
194
·· The maximum transversal gradient allowed is 1% ·· These friction values must not be altered by polishing or
·· Pedestrian routes which are adjacent to unpaved areas must protective layers, which, if applied, must be done so before
be defined with a kerb 10cm from the ground and made of a the tests
different material and colour from the route paving. The kerb ·· The conditions of the floor (wet or dry), as well as low
must not have sharp corners and must incorporate a dropped temperatures, must be taken into account when constructing
kerb every 10m to allow access to the unpaved areas the ramps
·· Any joins and seams in the surface must be level. Any changes ·· The layers supporting the paving must be strong and durable
in level of the route must be connected by slight gradients or enough to support both paving and capacity overload, as well
ramps (with or without steps) and highlighted with a different as ensure a lasting anchorage of the paving components
colour ·· Joints between paving elements must not be greater than
·· The surface material must be resistant to atmospheric 5mm; they must be made from durable materials, and be
conditions and must be selected, maintained and protected applied evenly so that any difference in level is not more than
to avoid difficult and hazardous joints and seams 2mm
·· The paving of the pedestrian route must be slip-resistant, made ·· Grids and gratings set in the paving must have a mesh small
of materials with a friction coefficient, measured according enough to stop a sphere with a diameter of 2cm from falling
to the British Ceramic Research Association Ltd method, of through; grids with parallel elements must be placed with the
more than 0.40 for a leather element on a dry surface and elements perpendicular to the sense of direction.
0.40 for standard hard rubber on a wet surface
diagram 8.6
HANDRAIL: max 3.5/5.0cm Ensure continuity at
in diameter. Must be nylon- return flights
coated or covered with PVC-U or
similar
Above Diagram. 8.6

Tactile warning
edge line
surface to Stairs
suggested profile
Open risers not recommended.

Prosthesis devices or using crutches
should be assisted
LANDING: at the top, intermediate,

bottom level. 180x180cm to guarantee a Distinct edge.
clearance with of 120 cm. Illuminated and Protective strip on the
clear of any swinging door. step must be non-slip
and noticeable.
Diagram. 8.7
Access
DOORS: DIFFERENT TYPOLOGIES

A - Automatic door with ante flowing
B - Door to manual opening with delayed closing
C - Door to double manual opening to ante with delayed closing
diagram 8.7
Steps Entrances
Steps are potentially hazardous and must only be used in areas The entrance to a facility represents the boundary and
where ramps cannot be built (Diagram 8.6). intermediary point between the outdoor area and the indoor
The riser must be solid and the protective metal strip on the area. This area must therefore be protected against atmospheric
step must be non-slip and noticeable when coming down the agents; at the same time, the area connecting the indoor floor
steps. The riser must not be more than 15cm and the tread with the external route must be free of obstacles at all times.
must be at least 28cm. Entrances must be easily distinguishable from the façade as a
Landings whole. The entrance door is fundamental to good accessibility
The areas just before and just after the entrances must be of a building and it is important that the following elements are
correctly sized to allow for wheelchairs to be manoeuvred and taken into account in the project phase (Diagram 8.7):
to allow the doors to open correctly. In particular:
The spaces before the entrances must allow for external doors ·· Access doors must be easy to use, respect the minimum
to be opened correctly. Usually they must all be of the same clearance width for easy passage (85cm but 95cm is
size, minimum 1.80x1.80m, to guarantee a clearance width of recommended) (Diagram 8.8).
1.20m. External routes and access routes must be consistently ·· The door space and the area before and after the door must
and adequately illuminated to ensure a smooth transition from be level; the best solution is to install single-leaf doors no
external to internal lighting levels. Above all, lighting at the wider than 1.20m, preferably with viewing panels. These
entrances and in the entrance lobby must be continuous. should be placed at least 40cm from the floor, and must allow
196
wheelchair users to see into the building. It must be possible wheels.

to open a mobile door leaf exerting a force of no more than Counters and desks must be designed to suit wheelchair users
8 kg. on either side, i.e. both visitors and staff with a disability.
·· The size, position and type of opening of a door must allow Waiting areas must offer an acoustically balanced, quiet
the leaves of the door to open on both sides of use; sliding environment, and also have adequate artificial or natural lighting
doors or folding doors are recommended. Revolving doors, offering good visibility.
automatically controlled doors and doors with glass panels Any type of automated equipment for public use must be
should be avoided if they are not appropriately equipped to accessible to wheelchair users, in terms of position and height.
comply with safety standards. Glass doors must be easily
Routes inside the buildings - including lifts and stairs - must be
distinguishable from their surroundings, with special safety
clearly identified and appropriately signed.
markings and signs.
Safety barriers, machines or control push-buttons must be
·· Lever-type handles, duly rounded and curved, are
accurately identified for use by all visitors without the need for
recommended; they must be positioned at a height of 85-
specific/special devices for persons with a disability. Digital
110cm.
buttons are usually difficult to use for the visually impaired.
·· For safety and access reasons, thresholds must be level or
duly rounded (Diagram 8.9). Horizontal Connection Systems
·· Gates or other openings which lead to other public areas, Passage areas
must comply with the accessibility provisions presented. Corridors and passages must be designed to provide a
Where turnstiles or other ticketing control devices are continuous flow, and changes in direction must be clearly
provided, which are not typically wheelchair-accessible, marked.
an appropriately accessible gate or opening must also be Corridors must be on one level and if this is not possible ramps
provided in immediate proximity. must be provided.
Reception area The width of corridors and passages must allow easy access
The entrance area must have an information point with staff to the areas they serve and should always be at least 1 m wide.
available to provide verbal information. There must be a tactile The corridor width should be increased at regular intervals, not
route for the visually impaired from the entrance door to the too far apart, about every 10 metres, to allow wheelchair users
information point, and a tactile map must be placed near the to pass one another or change direction. Splayed walls and
entrance and close to the amenities inside. corners at corridor junctions and at the end of the corridors
In particular: will also benefit wheelchair users and visually impaired visitors.
The level of lighting in the lobby should be adjustable to provide (Diagram 8.10)
a smooth transition from external to internal lighting levels A corridor that intersects a vertical connection system (stairs,
and vice versa and must be automatically adapted to external ramps, lifts, stair-lifts and platform lifts) must have adequate
conditions. unobstructed floor space in front of the vertical system to allow
The entrance lobby should be finished with a 2 metre-long for convenient access. These spaces must also lead horizontally
recessed cleaning surface to clean the wheels of the wheelchairs. to the various other areas in the building, with the exception of
The cleaning surface must be flush with the floor, firm, smooth the technicians’ rooms.
and obstacle free, and offer minimum resistance to wheelchair Routes inside the building must be obstacle-free, comfortable
0.85/0,95 0.85/0,95
Opening in forward motion.

Opening on the left.
Diagram. 8.8 Opening at counter current.

Opening on the left.
Access door
Opening at counter current.

Opening on the right.
Opening in forward motion.

Opening on the right.
diagram 8.8
diagram 8.9
CLEARANCE OF THE DOOR

THRESHOLD OF THE DOOR
A - Sliding door B - Leaf
Diagram. 8.9
Access door
Height < 2.00 cm

shape of thressold preferably rounded off
198
and safe, and must include information points and meeting

points to help people in difficulty.
Wheelchairs used by basketball players are significantly wider
than the standard wheelchairs habitually used by persons with
a disability. This should be taken into account in all relevant
parts of the building, in particular the areas of circulation, door
openings, toilets, in front of washbasins and wherever space is INCREASE THE SIZE OF THE CORRIDOR IN THE INNER PASSAGES
limited and might restrict manoeuvring.
min.1.00
Furthermore, in particular:
Diagram. 8.10
1.50
ø 1.50 ø 1.50
·· Potential obstructions must be hidden or protected so as not Corridor
to reduce the circulation space.
·· Corridors should have a minimum clear width of at least 1m max10.00
(1.20m is optimal) for a straight passage with limited length.

The minimum width near entrance doors should be 1.5m.
Turning spaces should be 1.4m, and passing points for two
wheelchair users 1.8m (2m is optimal). (Diagram 8.11)
·· Corners must be splayed to limit damage to the building and
to benefit visually impaired people or persons with a disability. diagram 8.10
Splayed corners allow for easier wheelchair movements and

diagram 8.11
easier passage of first aid equipment.
Internal doors
Internal doors are potentially the most common barriers and
obstacles; where possible they should be eliminated or kept to A
a minimum.
A - Wheelchair
In particular:
·· Ideally, internal doors should only be used in the case of a fire
and so should be connected to the fire prevention system and B Diagram. 8.11
only operated when necessary Horizontal

Circulation -
B - Wheelchair in turning space
·· During normal use door closers should be set to the minimum passages
force required to open/close the door and adjusted during

use
C
·· The use of low-energy door operators or remote controls
should be considered instead of keys for heavy doors
C - Passing point for two wheelchair users
·· Changing room doors or doors in similar spaces must be
fitted with push-buttons, latches or levers to allow wheelchair
users or others to close the door behind them
199
200
·· Alternative solutions to hinged doors must be carefully of floors to be served, and the space and budget available.
studied. Power-operated sliding doors must ensure enough Unlike mechanical devices, architectural elements are never
space for a wheelchair to pass through and must have an out of order and do not require a person with a key to activate
easily accessible push-pad fitted on each side to open/close them.
the doors
Stairs
·· Doors must be protected against damage caused by Stairs must be level and uniform throughout their length.
wheelchairs; protection plates or panels must be installed at When this is not possible any variation must be mediated with
a height of 40cm to be effective. adequately sized landings. The steps of a flight of stairs must
Vertical Connection Systems have the same riser and tread. If possible, each flight of stairs
Vertical connection systems are used in sports facilities to must have the same number of steps, with a correct riser/tread
overcome changes in levels; these systems can be categorised ratio. (Diagram 8.12)
in two main groups: Where doors open towards the stairs, there must be sufficient
-- Architectural elements such as stairs and ramps access space in front of the door.
-- Mechanical devices such as lifts, platform lifts and stair-lifts The tread of the steps must be slip-resistant, preferably rectangular
For persons with reduced or impaired mobility, stairs represent and possibly with a continuous profile and rounded nosing.
a physical barrier; therefore alternatives must be found and Stairs must be fitted with a balustrade on the open side and a
evaluated for each individual project. handrail made of durable material which is easy and comfortable
Ramps may be installed as long as the difference in height is to grip.
no more than 3.20m. However, in order to overcome such a The width of the stairs and landings must be sufficient to allow
level change with a 5% gradient, a considerably long ramp will two people to pass at the same time and allow for a stretcher
be required. It is also important to remember that where there to be transported horizontally with a maximum gradient of 15%
is a succession of changes in levels, it would be very tiring lengthwise.
for people with a disability to have to negotiate a number of Short flights of stairs are preferable, however, if this is not
different ramps. possible, there must be intermediate landings or platforms to
Apart from regular passenger lifts, a structured and complex stop the fall of a person.
solution designed to overcome any difference in level, there are Handrails must be installed on both sides.
other solutions suitable for changes in level up to 4 m, such as Where a lot of the users are children, a second handrail should
short rise platform lifts and stair-lifts, which are easier to install be positioned at an appropriate height.
and more cost-effective. Natural side lighting is preferable; the stairs should have artificial
Stair-lifts are not acceptable for every type of disability and can lighting, also lateral; there must be a light control device on
sometimes discriminate users with a certain physical condition. each landing which is visible in the dark.
Therefore, stair-lifts should only be considered as a final option, Staircases must be easy to perceive, also for the visually
once it has been established that a platform lift cannot be impaired through tactile markings.
installed. In particular, the stairs must be safe and obstacle-free. Moreover,
To overcome level changes greater than 4 m, long-rise platform they must meet the following requirements:
lifts or passenger lifts can be installed, depending on the number ·· A flight of steps must have a clear width of at least 1.20m
beyond the first and last step

·· Handrails must be placed at a height of 80-92cm; if a second
handrail is necessary it must be placed at a height of 75cm
·· The handrail on the balustrade or full wall must be positioned
0.30
at a distance of 4.5-6cm
0.80-0.92
Handrail
·· The width of the stairs should be adjusted according to their
0.75
Ø 35/50mm
position and use within the building.

0.30
Ramps
Diagram. 8.12 The gradient of a ramp must be such that a wheelchair user
SECTION
Handrail must be
Vertical Circulation
- Stairs
positioned at a
distance of can use the ramp without tiring; the length of the ramp must
4,5/6cm from
Tactile information Tactile information
of variable danger Warning code background
of variable danger also be taken into consideration. In the case of particularly long
Warning code
ramps, level landings must be provided. The specifications
and precautions described for the stairs, as well as the details
0.30 0.40 0.20 0.30 Handrail
mentioned in the definition of external routes, are also valid for
1.20
PLAN
0.20 0.30 Stairs Landing Stairs 0.30 0.40
indoor ramps.
Lifts
The means in place for accessing different levels in a
diagram 8.12
building must be suitable for all users. Even where there are
complementary systems of access to different levels, such as
·· The gradient of a flight of steps must be limited, and constant stairs and ramps, lifts must be provided throughout to serve all
throughout the length of the staircase levels. (Diagram 8.13)
·· Steps must have an appropriate riser/tread ratio; the sum of The lift car must be at least large enough to accommodate one
double the riser and the tread must be 62-64cm wheelchair. The lift doors and floor doors must be automatic
·· Maximum riser height 18cm and large enough to allow a wheelchair to pass through.
·· Minimum tread depth 28cm The door opening system must be fitted with a suitable
·· The profile of the steps should be continuous with rounded mechanism (photoelectric cell, safety contacts) to stop and
edges, the risers must be closed and the angle of incline open the doors in case of obstruction.
between tread and riser should be 75°-80°, but definitely no The lift must stop at the landings with closed doors.
less than 60° The control buttons inside and outside the lift must be positioned
·· Floor markings (a band of contrasting material that can also at an appropriate height for wheelchair users and must be easy
be perceived by the visually impaired) must be placed at least to use for visually impaired people, preferably with tactile or
30cm from the first and last step to signal the beginning and Braille markings. In front of the lift door there must be a clear
end of a flight of steps space large enough for manoeuvring to ensure convenient
·· The balustrade on the open side must be at least 1m high, entry by wheelchair users.
with vertical supports a maximum of 10cm apart All in all, the layout and detailed project must include the
·· When the handrail is not continuous, it must extend 30cm following specifications:
202
Diagram. 8.13
Vertical Circulation - lift
LIFT: minimum dimension LIFT: minimum dimension (0.85x1.20)

(1.70x1.50m) for new construction to be adapted in existing buildings that need
restoration
diagram 8.13
·· Minimum car size: depth 1.70m, width 1.50m in new buildings; positioned no higher than 1.20m from the floor; the inside
depth 1.20m and width 0.85m in existing buildings to be control buttons should be positioned on a side wall at least
restored 35cm from the car door
·· The lift door, positioned on the short side, must have a ·· Inside the car there must be an alarm as well as an emergency
minimum opening of 95cm in new buildings and 75cm in telephone or intercom positioned at a height no less than
existing buildings to be restored 0.85m from the floor; the emergency lighting system in the lift
·· At each floor level there must be a minimum clear space of must remain operative for 3 hours
1.50x1.50m in front of the lift ·· The control buttons must have raised tactile numbers and
·· Car doors and floor-level doors must be of the “automatic Braille translations of any words; next to the control buttons
sliding” type; in restored buildings, the floor-level door can be outside the lift there must be a Braille panel indicating the
hinged as long as it is fitted with an automatic door-opening floor level
system; in all cases, the doors should remain open for at least ·· Within the car and at each landing there must be audible
8 seconds with closing time of at least 4 seconds announcements and a clear visual display of the floor level
·· Levelling at landings is critical and a tolerance of only + 2cm reached. There must also be a luminous sign to signal an
is allowed; the lift car must stop at floor levels with closed alarm
doors. ·· Consider providing fold-down seats in larger lifts.
·· The control buttons inside and outside the lift must be
Stair-lifts and platform lifts stair-lift is less than 2 metres, then the entire space occupied
Stair-lifts and platform lifts can be used as an alternative to by the moving platform must be protected and closed off by
ramps or lifts where space is limited. They can also be used a balustrade. The stair-lift must have its own separate and
in restored buildings or small facilities where passenger lifts enclosed route with automatic gates at each end of the run
cannot be accommodated. -- An alternative to an enclosed stair-lift is a stair-lift which
These kinds of lifts must be fitted with a protection system to enables another person to accompany the user; these have
guard against falls, crushing or collision; devices must also the same kind of controls as the regular stair-lift, as well
be fitted to guarantee safe movement, as well as mechanical, as acoustic and visual signs to indicate that the stair-lift is
electrical and operational safety. moving
When stair-lifts or platform lifts are not in use, the foot rest Platform lifts (Diagram 8.15)
or platform should be folded towards the wall or fitted into a -- Platform lifts are designed for vertical travel of no more than
recess in the floor. 4 metres and at a maximum speed of 0.1m/s; if compatible,
The space in front of the platform, when departing and landing, platform lifts should comply with the technical provisions
must be large enough to allow convenient access or exit by a described for stair-lifts
person in a wheelchair. -- The platforms and the shaft enclosure must be protected and
Functional and dimension specifications: both accesses fitted with gates or doors
Stair-lifts (Diagram 8.14) -- The minimum load capacity must be 130 kg
-- A stair-lift is intended to transport persons with reduced or -- The shaft enclosure must measure at least 90x120cm
impaired mobility; it is powered by an electric engine and -- If the platforms are installed outside the facilities, they must
runs on a track installed along one side of the stairs (in both be protected against atmospheric agents.
directions) or other inclined surface
Surfaces
-- Types of stair-lifts
General information
a. Perch lift: to transport a person standing up The floor surfaces in a sports facility are of significant importance
b. Chair lift: to transport a person sitting down to visually and/or hearing impaired people, and wheelchair
c. Perch stair-lift with fold up seat: to transport a person sitting users.
down or standing up ·· Hard surfaces cause noisy reverberations than can confuse
d. Platform stair-lift with fold-up platform: to transport a person people with visual impairment
in a wheelchair ·· Shiny or glass surfaces may cause confusion especially if
e. Platform stair-lift with fold-up platform and fold-up seat: to they reflect elements, such as handrails, and lead people to
transport a person in a wheelchair or sitting down see double
Stair-lifts are an alternative to lifts when the change in level is ·· For easy use of wheelchairs, surfaces must not have ridges
not more than 4m. and bumps, and must be firmly fixed
-- In public places, and generally in communal parts of a building, ·· Junctions between different flooring materials must be smooth
stair-lifts must also allow wheelchair users to overcome a to prevent wheelchair obstruction or tripping hazards.
change in level. In this case, if the visibility between a person ·· The floor colour should be different to that of the walls and
on the platform and a person positioned along the route of the that of the ceiling; all additional features, such as emergency
204
Diagram. 8.14
Stair-lift
diagram 8.14
diagram 8.15
Free space to support rail 15cm
Space to move Space to move

Platform lift
Diagram. 8.15
Platform lift
Platform lifts
lights and rubbish bins, must also have a contrasting colour.

The use of colour differentiation, tonal contrast and special
textures makes a significant difference to visually impaired
people navigating a building
·· Textured surfaces provide information to people with reduced
or impaired vision who rely on contact to gain orientation.
Tactile or textured flooring can be used to warn of an
Counter/Table top
approaching hazard, such as a change in elevations, or to Minimum for effective
wheelchair approach
provide directions. Tactile or textured walls provide guidance
Diagram. 8.16a
to those who rely on direct contact to gain orientation
Desk bar
·· Wall coverings should be slip-resistant to provide additional
support elderly people and those who using walking aids
such as sticks or crutches
If the facility has fixed routes, push gates, turnstiles etc.,
these must be sized and adjustable to ensure the passage of
wheelchairs.
Any automatic opening and closing systems must be timed to
allow for the convenient passage of people in wheelchairs. diagram 8.16a
Where required, a suitable waiting area with seats must be
diagram 8.16b
provided.
Furniture - Fixtures and Fittings

Indoor furniture
Social areas must allow unhindered access to people in
wheelchairs and easy accessibility to all the furniture in the
area. Furniture should not have rough edges or sharp corners.
Counter/Table top
In particular:
Minimum for effective
Counters and table tops wheelchair approach
Diagram. 8.16b
Reception ·· Counters and table tops for general public use must be
installed so that at least a section of these is lowered to be
accessible to people in wheelchairs i.e. between 75cm and
80 cm from the ground (Diagram 8.16 a/b)
·· A head-on approach in a wheelchair is preferred; this requires
a clear under-the-counter-knee space of 40cm in height and a
maximum depth of 50cm across the top of the counter. Where
a sideways approach is unavoidable, the counter depth may
be reduced to 30cm. There should be a clear space in front
206
of counters, with a minimum width of 80cm suitable for either group of telephones can offer a range of heights
wheelchair approach ·· Perching seats and incorporated shelves are practical
Seating and tables ·· Telephones should be located sheltered from background
·· Seats should be stable but movable, and tables should have noise.
corner legs or legs which are positioned to enable wheelchairs Spectators’ area
to fit underneath so that wheelchair users can sit together Spectator seating provisions (Diagram. 8.17)
with companions The route to the spectators’ area should be easily identifiable
·· Raised seating areas should be avoided or kept well below with tactile surfaces and an orientation system to help persons
50% of the total provision in order not to restrict choice with a disability to reach their destination. Different coloured
unreasonably, or segregate groups of users from specific walls, floors and ceilings should be used to define different
facilities sectors, and an adequate lighting system should be installed in
Telephones all main areas of the building. At present there is no regulation to
·· Telephones should incorporate features for universal use, stipulate the exact number of spaces to be reserved for people
including couplers in wheelchairs, however, French guides suggest the following
·· Single telephones should be fitted at a convenient height, with minimum specifications:
the top row of operating buttons no higher than 140cm and -- 2 spaces for a seating capacity of 50 people
card or coin slots no higher than 120cm above floor level. A -- 3 spaces for a seating capacity between 51 and 100 people
-- 4 spaces for a seating capacity between 101 and 500 people
diagram 8.17 -- 21 spaces or more for a seating capacity of 1001 or more
people.
The Regulations issued by the Italian National Olympic
Committee state that the ratio of spaces reserved for persons
in wheelchairs should be 1:400 and that these spaces should
0.20
0.40 all be concentrated in the same area. This ratio refers to large
1.25
0.70 facilities with a high number of spectators; in small facilities, a
minimum of 4 spaces should be reserved for wheelchair users.
Provisions for wheelchair-accessible seating should be made
0.70
Diagram. 8.17
at an overall rate of no less than 1% of venue’s net capacity and
0.70 Spectator seating
0.70 in all different categories of ticket prices, to allow for a free and
0.70
0.70 wide choice. In certain competition venues, particularly ones

0.70
0.50
hosting paralympic sports, where a greater number wheelchair
1.20/1.50 visitors is expected, this rates increases to 1.5% of the venue’s
net capacity.
The spaces should be positioned so that spectators in
0.90/1.10 0.90/1.10 0.90/1.10 1.50 0.90/1.10 0.90/1.10 0.90/1.10 0.90/1.10 0.90/1.10 0.90/1.10
wheelchairs can sit together with their seated companions.

Sight lines must enable wheelchair spectators to have a clear
1.50 1.50
0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40
0.05
0.05
0.05 0.15 0.05 0.15
Alarm bell Alarm bell

Tube Ø 3/4 H Tube Ø 3/4 H
0.80
0.80
until ceiling until ceiling Push-button
Push-button
drainage water drainage water
Lever control
Diagram. 8.18
1.80
Tube Ø 3/4 H Tube Ø 3/4 H
1.80
Container
0.30
0.30
Toilets until ceiling until ceiling Container
hygienic Covered steel tube hygienic
paper from Ø 3/4 with paper
Covered steel tube
plastic material
from Ø 3/4 with
plastic material
0.90
2.30
0.90
2.30
diagram 8.18
view of the action over the area of play, and should not be given to the choice of fittings.
obstructed by people in front or by structural features such as Adequate space must be provided in the toilet cubicles to allow
screens or balustrades which should be as low as possible or wheelchair users to manoeuvre and reach the sanitary fittings.
made of transparent material. Wheelchair spaces should meet Particular attention must be paid to the following:
the following specifications: Entrance door
·· Length 120-150cm - width 90-110cm The door should have a minimum clearance of 85cm (though
·· Clear space in front or behind for easy exit; this area must be 90 cm is recommended); the door should be of the sliding type
at least 100cm long and as wide as the actual space for the or one that opens outwards. Sliding doors allow a person in a
wheelchair wheelchair to manoeuvre without the encumbrance of the door,
·· The spaces must be enclosed by a protection system 80cm while an outward opening door enables easy access if help is
from the floor, with a wheelchair stop 20cm from the floor needed.
·· The floor must be horizontal and level. Washbasin
Toilets The washbasin must be accessible from the front; the area
All facilities, installations and fittings should be designed for use below the washbasin must be obstacle-free. The hand basin
by all visitors, including people with impaired mobility, hearing should be large, possibly 60-70cm, with the top edge 80cm
or vision, without having to adopt special measures. Adequate from the floor. There must be a space in front of the basin, at
space must therefore be provided and particular care must be least 80cm from the front edge of the basin.
208
The taps should be single-lever mixer taps, with an extendable Access to the playing area must be obstacle-free and level with
pull-out hand spray. the other areas of the facility; if this is not possible, suitable
Toilet (Diagram 8.18) ramps or routes must be provided as previously described.
If possible, the toilet should be wall-hung or suspended so that The competition area must be made of hard, compact and slip-
wheelchair users can approach it from the front; the axis of proof materials that allow wheelchairs to run smoothly; this
the toilet should be 40cm from the wall. The size of the toilet is particularly important in the case of wheelchair basketball
and its position in the cubicle must favour wheelchair-to-toilet where the floor must be made of wood, artificial flooring or hard
transfer; accessories to aid transfer include a fixed grab-rail on rubber. Soft flooring or surfaces which are semi-stabilised or
the side of the toilet installed 70-80cm from floor level, and a stabilised but non-uniform should be avoided.
wall-mounted fold-away grab-rail on the free side. There must Changing rooms
be a lateral transfer space at least 1m wide (measured from The aforementioned accessibility specifications and general
the axis of the toilet) to allow a wheelchair user to manoeuvre accessibility standards (doors, routes, flooring, etc.) also apply
the chair more or less parallel to the toilet so the user can slide to the changing rooms. More specifically:
from chair to toilet seat (and back). Changing area
Athletes’ area -- Seats for athletes in wheelchairs must be installed at a height
Area and playing surface of 50cm from floor level, with adequate clear space to one
These spaces should not be any different from the other areas side to manoeuvre and position the wheelchair
of the sports facility and therefore be accessible to “everyone”. -- Lockers, hooks, stands and racks for clothes, and similar
equipment, must be easily accessible, and therefore
diagram 8.19
positioned at a height of 120cm from the floor level
-- Hairdryers should be wall-mounted no higher than 140cm
from the floor and should have flexible outlets
-- Mirrors must be full-length and positioned 20cm to 180cm
from the floor
-- Shelves for personal objects must be fixed 90cm from the
floor
Toilet area
Diagram. 8.19
The toilet area must include a toilet and washbasin with the Signs
aforementioned specifications. Specifications for the showers
are listed below:
-- The shower must be flush to the floor slightly sloping towards
the drainage point.
-- A fold-up seat should be foreseen, installed at a height of
50cm from the floor; the seat should be 90x120cm and should
have sufficient space next to it to manoeuvre a wheelchair.
Accessories to aid wheelchair-to-seat transfer (and back)
should be installed. Emergency Management

-- Shower controls must be lever-operated with a mixer installed Emergency - most procedures in place for the emergency
90 cm from the floor at the side of the seat. evacuation of persons with a disability include the following
-- Two showerheads should be foreseen at different heights and rules:
on different walls: one fixed showerhead 190cm from the floor -- Incorporation of refuge areas - relatively safe areas on escape
and one with a flexible tube installed on the wall next to the routes where people with reduced mobility can rest or wait for
seat 80cm from the floor. assistance before they exit the building
Signs -- Use of lifts - facilities with lifts must ensure their safe operation
All sports facilities should have clearly visible signs to provide in the case of an emergency, in cooperation with the fire
information and directions. There should also be signs to indicate brigade.
the location of facilities accessible by people with reduced or -- Emergency protocol - implementation of clear procedures
impaired mobility. These signs should carry the International for the assisted evacuation of persons in refuge spaces and
Symbol of Access (ISA), also known as the wheelchair symbol. evacuation lifts where these are present and working. Alarm
(Diagram 8.19) systems must be able to avert all users, and therefore be both
All signs must be easily legible. Additional signs in Braille audible and visible (flashing beacons).
or audio systems should be provided for visually impaired -- Personnel trained for emergencies - Staff at the facility must
people. Potentially hazardous situations must be immediately be adequately trained to assist persons with a disability in
obvious and signalled by visual and/or acoustic means. More emergencies.
specifically: The success of a facility depends on the maintenance of
·· There must be a strong contrast between the background accessibility devices such as fixtures and fittings, surfaces,
colour of the sign and the colour of the letters, numbers and and control systems. Continuous and regular maintenance
pictograms, and between the sign and the surface behind it. will safeguard or improve the specifications contained in this
Transparent material should not be used for signs as it creates guide and ensure that they are not compromised or rendered
confusion. ineffective and invalid.
·· Bold letters, raised pictograms and direction arrows help
people with reduced vision.
·· Signs should be suitably illuminated by natural or artificial
lighting.
Additional information
Building Diagrams or maps should be clear, possibly raised
and positioned between 90 and 170cm from the floor.
Graphic diagrams can be used in large buildings to help users
identify specific points and the best routes, and to facilitate
evacuation in the case of an emergency.
I
S nstallations and
pecial Technological
Security Systems
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 9 › Special Technological Installations and Security Systems
212
O
ne extremely important factor in today’s management of and humidity);
a sports facility is the continuous monitoring and control ·· Heating of hot sanitary water;
of the entire structure, carried out on a daily basis and ·· Lighting (indoor and outdoor), emergency lighting and
during special events. emergency power supply;
Technological installations which control devices, parts of the ·· Sound diffusion;
facility or building components, represent a large part of the ·· Distribution of electricity and load management;
overall cost of the facility, as previously described, and are
·· Irrigation of green areas;
fundamental for its operation.
·· Operation of opening mechanisms and entrance systems;
Technological installations still tend to be considered separately
·· Management of pre-planned scenarios during events or
from the overall structural and architectural planning of a sports
special situations.
facility; as such, they are often added after a building has been
Management of devices and equipment
completed to correct unforeseen environmental conditions, for
·· Operation of telescopic tribunes, screens, partitioning,
example air conditioning, sound diffusion, lighting, etc.
mobile walls, etc;
With the recent advances in the technology and innovation
·· Automation of refrigerating and computer equipment;
sector, we have seen a shift from manually operated and
·· Automation of water and sanitary equipment, saunas, and
therefore cost-intensive installations to automated systems
whirlpools.
or intelligent systems, which we now increasingly rely on to
manage and monitor technological operations. Management of communication and information
·· Management of the analogue telephone network and
Innovation technology is part of our everyday life, on the
telephone traffic (fax and answering machines);
one hand improving communication processes, simplifying
the management of technological systems and improving ·· Management of the video intercom and intercom system;
the quality of services, and on the other hand increasing the ·· Transmission of data for remote control;
demand for comfort and safety and increasing the desire to live ·· Management of internal communication (audio-video).
in an ecologically clean and safe environment. Technological Security management
convergence has grouped traditional automation and control ·· Access management;
operations together with innovative digital communications; in ·· Operation of security systems: burglary alarms, anti-
this way, new needs for information accessibility and availability intrusion systems, perimeter security systems, anti-theft
can be met alongside the demand for energy optimisation, systems;
safety, and improvement in the quality of services. ·· Operation of fire protection systems and safety systems in
The use of automated systems enables comprehensive control the case of smoke, gas leaks or flooding;
of the installation and system components which is undoubtedly ·· Local and remote video control of internal and external areas
a great advantage for a large basketball facility or large outdoor or specific points:
sports centre. Automated systems can be used to control: ·· Automatic operation of visual and audible warning signals in
Environmental management case of emergency.
(microclimate and energy requirements) It must be remembered, however, that Building Automation
·· Air conditioning (temperature control, control of air speed Systems (BAS) are still very expensive and, in order to achieve
213 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 9 › Special Technological Installations and Security Systems
building automation, there needs to be a change in today’s building cost, and if we add to this the high management cost
concept of a building, from an “ordinary” to an “intelligent” of these structures, it is easy to understand the importance
building. of careful planning if we want to avoid oversized or redundant
An “intelligent building” is one which is controlled by a Building systems and installations, and optimise management costs.
Automation System; it is designed and constructed to allow for Basically there are two automation systems:
the integrated and computerised management of technological ·· A system based on a central elaboration unit that manages all
installations, IT equipment and communication networks. the operations on the basis of the results collected through
Buildings of this kind are equipped to optimise the lifecycles monitoring operations;
of their component systems and their equipment, reduce ·· A system distributed throughout the building where interaction
maintenance staff costs and increase organisational productivity is on a local basis and the results are sent to a central unit for
through correct planning and management. a general coherence check.
“Intelligent” equipment cannot, therefore, be considered as a The second system is the one that mostly meets the requirements
separate system from the building, but must be conceived and of a sports facility; control devices are connected by a fieldbus
planned alongside the installation, construction and structural and central interactive monitoring (Diagram 9.1), allowing a
specifications in terms of organisation of space. Planning horizontal integration of the functions. Fieldbus technology is
must be a joint effort between specialist planners, operators achieved by installing a cable throughout the building which
in the building and the IT sector, all of whom must interact to connects all systems and equipment necessary for the required
combine their knowledge and expertise in order to achieve high operation. A good example of this is automatic temperature
performance levels, not only of individual operating systems
but of the building as a whole. diagram 9.1
A building automation project must therefore include the plan of

the building structure (a traditional building structure planned to
offer maximum performance), integrated with a computerised
system which represents the “intelligence of the building”.
There are three areas to be taken into account when planning
an intelligent building:
Diagram. 9.1
·· System automation;
Fieldbus
technology ·· Information processing;
·· Communication.
These three areas refer to systems which require very detailed
design, right up to defining singular and specific technical
characteristics, yet without disregarding their integration with Infrared
the building structure and the synergies that this integration can
generate.
In fact, if we consider that the cost of integrating these systems
in tertiary sector buildings represents one third of the total
214
regulation in an office to optimise energy consumption. The level of control is defined according to the performances
A smart system can carry out a number of tasks such as: and services required by the facility manager. The smart
·· Automatic operations and/or adjustments of the technological system is configured according to management needs and
installations (heating, water supply, thermal ventilation, etc.); desired results; for example, the level of relative humidity
·· Control automatic functions; and temperature during ordinary facility use or on the basis
of the number of spectators during events, the adjustment
·· Centralise all important information on the monitored
of mechanical operations, control of surface or component
installations (conditions, alarms, volumes);
overheating, etc.
·· Centralise all the necessary information for an adequate
The central monitoring unit must process and collect all the
financial and technological management of the installations
information transmitted by the peripheral controllers, and
(volumes, energy consumption);
record statistical and historical data to optimise maintenance.
·· Remote-control monitoring and function control using energy
The peripheral controllers receive information on the status
saving schemes and optimisation plans;
of the services; they are activated on the basis of precise
·· Tackle critical operational conditions with emergency
system requirements and transmit important commands to
programmes which regulate the installations to minimise
components of operational units. Peripheral controllers are part
inefficiency;
of a distributed information system and consequently also have
·· Display, graphically illustrate and automatically save
specific functions such as controlling, adjusting and resetting
information or retrieve information on request (historical
the functions at local level independently from the central
data);
monitoring system.
·· Create a databank to transfer the information in the overall
This type of system architecture is called a “distributed
memory;
information system” system which generally operates with a
·· Allow the remote transfer of data and remote control of
greater processor speed. Information is distributed across
installations.
the installations to be controlled, providing a higher level of
System architecture protection because the information does not depend on one
The architecture of a smart system is generally structured as single, albeit efficient, central computer.
follows:
This type of system architecture obviously requires compatible
·· Central monitoring unit;
hardware and software to enable it to connect different systems
·· Peripheral controllers;
physically (through the same type of network) and logically
·· Technological installations;
(through a uniform definition of a communication protocol to
·· Regulation of environmental factors; exchange data and messages across all sub-systems).
·· Safety; An effective functional integration between homogeneous
·· Fire detection; sub-systems and other subsystems (those that use software
·· Comprehensive services: applications of different manufacturers) is extremely difficult
-- Monitoring of central units; to achieve and is often limited to a simple integration. Facility
-- Closed-circuit television (CCTV)1. managers wishing to adopt “building automation” tools are
1 Closed-circuit television (CCTV) is the use of video cameras to transmit a signal to a specific place, on a
limited set of monitors.It differs from broadcast television in that the signal is not openly transmitted, though advised to contact specialised firms that can provide all the
it may employ point to point wireless links. CCTV is often used for surveillance in areas that may need
monitoring such as banks, casinos, airports, military installations, and convenience stores. (Wikipedia) necessary tools, hardware and software updating, and system
maintenance. ·· Transport of convector fluids (pumps, ventilators, etc).

If we look at basketball facilities from a technical point of view, Lighting and electrical systems - the main function of these
in particular those designed for large events, they include a systems is to check and control the supply of electricity. More
great number of installations and/or functions that need to precisely, a complete system includes:
be controlled and computerised. In fact, they include all the ·· Low/high voltage transformer rooms;
installations present in a basketball facility: ·· Low voltage distribution boundaries;
·· Air conditioning systems; ·· Local panels;
·· Electrical installations; ·· Electricity supply back-up systems such as generators, UPS;
·· Sound diffusion systems; ·· Lighting;
·· Lighting; ·· Occupancy sensors to automatically controlled lighting in the
·· Mobility connection systems (lifts, elevators, etc.), etc; different rooms (changing rooms, offices, storage areas, toilets).
·· Systems for the production of energy derived from Several software programmes designed specifically for
alternative sources. electrical systems can be used for energy saving. Their main
Furthermore, they include the various security systems in place attributes are:
to safeguard the building, and the people and objects in the ·· Limiting electric power peaks
building: ·· Cyclical stop
·· Fire detection systems; ·· Light control
·· Anti-intrusion systems; ·· Monitoring underlying conditions of lifts or elevators
·· CCTV; Sound diffusion systems - the main functions include:
·· Access control systems, etc. ·· Control of sound according to the type of event
Control Systems for Technological Installations ·· Correction of distortions
The system architecture must therefore include control systems ·· Relay of emergency messages.
specifically for technological installations: one for the electrical Special Safety and Security Systems
installation, one for fire detection, etc.
Components of certain types of systems used for the ordinary
The following provides a brief description of the main functions management of a sports facility or during a sporting event can
that can be controlled by a computerised control system: be used as safety and security devices.
Air conditioning - the main function of this sub-system is to Apart from the technology of the smart control systems
monitor, adjust and automate the building’s air conditioning described above, here is a list of some systems which collect
systems to significantly reduce the amount of energy consumed data though the use of sensors and can be managed by an
through heating, air conditioning and ventilation. automated system to contribute to the implementation of the
The functions to be controlled are usually the following: overall safety and security system.
·· Heat production (boiler, heat pump, etc); Before examining this matter in depth, it is important to stress
·· Production of cold air (refrigeration equipment, etc); the difference between security and safety systems.
·· Heat conversion (hot-cold batteries, converters, etc.); A safety system provides protection of persons and goods
·· Humidification/dehumidification; from accidental events caused by natural calamities or use of
216
machines. The fire detection system is a typical example of a other suitable areas;
safety system. ·· Warning devices, such as:
A security system provides the protection of persons or goods -- Sirens;
against attacks by third parties, aimed at causing damage or -- Alarms;
stealing goods. The anti-intrusion system is a typical example -- Visual warning signs;
of a security system.
-- Visual/acoustic signs;
Most safety systems installed in buildings use sensors to
-- Sound dispersion systems.
protect people and objects; safety sensor devices include:
The input/output module is usually made up of a microprocessor
·· Gas/fire detection;
with a serial output for connecting to the monitoring system.
·· Automatic extinguishers; The exchange is analogue.
·· Flood detection; In this type of system each sensor transmits an analogue value
·· Evacuation and emergency management; to the exchange module, corresponding to its current state
Most security systems include: (temperature according to temperature sensors, degree of
·· Anti-intrusion device; darkness in a room according to optical sensors, etc.).
·· CCTV; The exchange module constantly analyses the value transmitted
·· Access control. by each sensor and compares it with the values set. For example,
These systems are usually interfaced with others, forming part an optical sensor can distinguish between a long-term increase
of one universal system to protect the entire building. in the clouding or darkening of a room (caused by natural factors
Fire detection - the main objective of a fire detection system is or dust accumulation) and a short-term increase in clouding or
to give immediate warning of a fire. darkening (caused by fire). Specific procedures can therefore
be implemented at this point (request for maintenance or alarm),
An efficient fire detection system must function from the initial
enabling the threshold for each sensor to be set individually as
stages of a fire to stop it from spreading, and thus limit damage
well as on a time-basis (e.g. pre-alarm, alarm, fault, etc.), and
to people and objects.
thus reducing the number of false alarms. For instance, a lower
The direction and rate of fire development obviously depends
pre-alarm can be set when the building is not occupied and
on a number of factors, including the materials contained inside
the chances of triggering a false alarm (for example, through
the building and the building’s structural components.
cigarette smoke) are considerably lower.
A fire detection system is typically made up of:
The main advantages of these systems are the following:
·· A field detection device that usually includes:
·· Increased reliability and significant reduction in false alarms;
-- Temperature sensors;
·· Improved flexibility with regard to re-distribution of the indoor
-- Photoelectric sensors;
areas of the building (more or less frequent);
-- Ionisation sensors;
·· Reduced cabling costs which partially counters the system
-- Flame sensors;
costs.
-- Combined sensors;
Gas detection
-- Infrared linear sensors;
The object of this system is to detect and signal the presence
·· Manual alarm devices, such as push buttons in corridors or
of toxic and/or explosive gases such as methane, liquefied
217
218
petroleum gas (LPG), carbon monoxide, etc. ·· Drinking water;

It is made up of detectors, alarms and an input/output module ·· Hot sanitary water;
The module and alarms can be the same as those used for the ·· Waste water.
fire detection system, of which the gas detection system can be It is particularly important to protect areas with raised floors in
considered an integral part. Thus, the above information also computer centres, piping in the under-passages, or with loose-
applies to the gas detection system. stone foundations, etc.
However, whereas a smoke detector is triggered at the start of a Anti-intrusion system
fire, in the case of explosive gas, the alarm should be actuated The main objective of this system is to stop people from
before the gas concentration reaches a critical level that may accessing unauthorised areas, or areas which may only be
cause an explosion. accessed at certain times.
Specific sensors must therefore be used according to the type An anti-intrusion system is used to:
of gas in question.
·· Prevent breaking and entering;
The most common types of sensors include:
·· Check for persons in unauthorised areas;
·· Semiconductors;
·· Check the security patrol services.
·· Electrochemical cells.
The composition of the sub-system varies from building to
The installation of sensors is a fundamental operation and building according to the various parameters. In theory, the
should be based on essential yet simple considerations which, system is made up of three main elements:
unfortunately, cannot always be applied in practice.
Sensors: these devices are based on different physical laws
Explosive gas detectors should be ceiling-mounted when the to accurately and rapidly detect any movement within the
gas to be detected is lighter than air and tends to stratify in the monitored area as well as those typical signs of breaking and
lower parts of a room; if the gas in question is heavier than air, entering;
the gas detectors must be installed at floor-level;
Alarm processing units: these logical units manage the
Toxic gas detectors should be wall-mounted at head height. signals received from a group of sensors and compare them
Flood and water-leakage detection with a set of parameters to establish a genuine alarm situation;
The aim of this system is to detect and signal the presence of Actuators: these devices transform the processing unit’s
water in the protected area of the building. input signal into an operational signal or other types of signals.
This type of system usually includes water detection probes Sensors
which react upon contact with liquids, an in/out module and Peripheral sensors - these are installed along the outer edge
alarms; again, the module and alarms can be the same as those of the area to be protected against intruders breaking and
used for the fire detection system, of which the water-leakage entering.
and flood detection system can be considered an integral part.
Specific types of sensors placed underground detect changes
Thus, the above information also applies to the water-leakage
in pressure in the ground or changes caused by traffic in certain
and flood detection systems.
areas; sensors installed on top of the fencing record changes
This system is generally used to protect those areas of a building caused by electrical and mechanical stress, and other sensors,
which contain pipe networks carrying liquids such as: which are built into the fencing, can detect perforation.
·· Hot and cold water;
Immaterial barriers - these devices are made up of two ·· Reconfiguration of the system with reduced functionality
parts, transmitter and receiver. The transmitter emits beam of when a part of the system is malfunctioning:
radiation, which drops into the receiver, creating a barrier across -- Distinction between genuine and false alarms;
a specific path. If the path is crossed, the optical connection -- Registration of all occurring events;
between transmitter and receiver breaks and triggers an alarm. -- Activation of actuators according to the specific procedures
These barriers can be of the infrared or microwave type, and the adopted;
devices can be installed indoors or outdoors, whereby special -- Interface with remote control unit to exchange information
planning is required for indoor use. on the systems with particular reference to alarms,
Volumetric sensors - these sensors can detect the presence intervention procedures and transmission protection using
of people moving in the area monitored. There are three types sufficient cryptographic methods;
of sensors used in motion detectors: microwave, infrared or -- Adequate autonomous power supply for the entire system;
ultrasonic.
-- Protection against tampering of the logic, connection
Microphones - installed inside the structures, they can be used elements and power supply;
to monitor security armoured rooms by detecting vibrations
-- Independent access keys according to their function.
caused by perforation, through the use of explosives, drilling
machines, or pullers and cutters, for example. Actuators
Depending on the particular specifications of the system,
Contact sensors - a magnetic contact sensor system monitors
actuators may be required to transmit impulses (open or close
doors, windows and their mechanical parts, and signals when
doors, switch lights on and off, start and stop various equipment,
the magnetic circuit broken and entry breached.
etc.) or send out a warning signal (sirens, lights, pre-recorded
Temperature sensors - these sensors use temperature
information, etc.) to the control panel.
gradients to detect the casual distribution of temperature
The appropriate services will then be activated by the processing
typically produced by drills or similar tools in the walls of safes
unit by means of relays.
and armoured rooms or cabinets.
A good security system must always be able to monitor, restrict
Push-buttons - mechanical push-button switches or “panic
and allow the movement of people through entry/exit points of
alarms” must be manually activated to send out an alarm.
a site.
·· Regardless of the type of alarm employed, all sensors must
Usually people are admitted into an area of the building when
not be too complicated to use
their presence is desired or required. Access can be monitored
Central alarm processing unit - the main functions of a
by installing an access control system without having to resort
modern alarm processing unit are:
to surveillance staff.
·· Independent management of the sensors depending on the
The access control system in a basketball facility should have
sensor type, with different timers for different areas;
one or more card-readers installed at the entrances to monitor
·· Connection of alarm signals transmitted by each sensor,
access using personal identification cards, with security chips
identification of signals and protection against programmed
or magnetic stripes. These cards must be inserted into the card
tampering:
reader which will release a device allowing authorised passage
·· System diagnostics, of both structural and electrical after having checked the validity of the card. Some systems
components, diagnostic procedures of test sensors;
220
use contactless smart cards which contain chips that can ·· Image quality: high or low resolution;
be read by just holding the card close to the reader without ·· Camera placement: is the location clean or dirty, damp or
actually inserting or swiping it (proximity readers). Some high- dry, subject to vibrations, etc.?;
level security systems use fingerprint, voice or retina readers. ·· Operation control: automatic or manual;
As a rule, access procedure includes: ·· Image viewing: fixed, sequential, split screens, movement-
a. Checking the correct coding of the card and verifying its activated;
authorisation ·· Recording: real time, time lapse, activated alarm.
b. Checking whether the card is authorised for the respective The television camera must have a clear lens and a change-
entrance coupled device (CCD)2 image sensor to capture the images.
c. Checking whether the validity period is correct Compared with earlier telecamera lenses, the advantages of
d. Checking whether the weekday is correct these lenses are:
If all these conditions are met, the reader releases the locking ·· Reduced dimensions;
mechanism, authorising the cardholder to pass through. ·· Limited consumption (2-3W);
The magnetic card reader will also produce the following in/out ·· No geometric image distortion;
signals throughout the operation: ·· Insensitivity to external magnets;
·· Open/closed status of the monitored entrance (door, sliding ·· Durability;
gate, etc.) detected by mechanical and magnetic contact ·· Reduced warm-up period (0.5s);
·· Control the electronic closing system to open and close the ·· Low maintenance.
entrances using a 24/12Vcc contact
Lens performance can be improved by automatic scanning and
·· Supply power to a push button to enable manual operation automatic lens control devices, such as a zoom lens or focusing
of a monitored door or entrance lens. The use of these systems increases the area covered by
Security can be enhanced by adding a keypad to the card each optical system without manual intervention. If the camera
reader, requiring the cardholder to enter a personal identification is installed outdoors it must be sheltered from bad weather and
number (PIN). A typical example of this is a normal electronic be fitted with a thermostatic heating system.
bank card for use at automated teller machines (ATM). The optical system is a very important part of a video camera.
Closed-Circuit Television (CCTV) The angle of view of a lens depends on the focal length which
The simplest version of a CCTV system comprises a video can vary from 5mm (wide angle lens) to 150mm (telephoto lens).
camera to collect and transmit images. If several video cameras There are two types of lenses:
and monitors are used, an adequate video switcher will be 1. Fixed-focal-length or prime lens;
required. 2. Zoom lens.
The following operational requirements must be taken into Fixed-focal-length lenses are characterised by a variable focal
account when designing a CCTV system: lens (e.g. 50mm): only the focal lens and aperture can vary.
·· Illumination levels: daylight, night light, natural and/or These optical systems can therefore cover only one field of
artificial light, shade, etc; view, without the use of supplemental lenses.
·· Field of view: fixed or adjustable, distant or close, narrow or
wide; 2 Charge-coupled device, an electronic light sensor used in digital cameras (Wikipedia)
Zoom lenses have a focal length that varies within a range Additional equipment
(e.g. 16-160 mm) and can cover all the fields of view included The CCTV system can be integrated with supplementary
within that range. The focal length can be altered manually or devices to improve performance, add information or simply
automatically to alter the field of view. Optical zoom lenses are make cabling easier.
the most commonly used in security systems. The main devices are:
Monitors ·· Video amplifier - used to amplify the distance between the
Monitors are used to display the images generated by the video optical system and the monitor to over 600m;
cameras. Nowadays they are almost all colour monitors. The ·· Distribution amplifier - to transmit the signal of one camera
screen is measured diagonally in inches and can vary between to multiple locations. A typical unit has one input and four
3 and 26 inches; the most common sizes go from 9 to 12 inches. outputs;
Screen resolution is measured in television lines (e.g. 700 TVL). ·· Time and date generator, and camera identification - this
The number of vertical lines defines the quality of the image. A generator is used to superimpose the date and time on the
greater number of lines generally equates to a higher image image displayed on the monitor, and it identifies the camera
resolution. A high-resolution monitor usually has television lines using a code system;
(TVL)3 rating between 800 and 1,000. ·· Screen splitter - to simultaneously display images from
Central control unit different cameras (2, 4 or 16) on one monitor. This is particularly
The central control unit represents the highest number of useful when combined with a second monitor programmed
monitors that can be controlled by one single person and it is for the sequential display of the camera images;
generally estimated to be four. ·· Video recorder - fixed recording time - This system is usually
A more accurate control can be carried out when there are only used with an alarm system: the system automatically switches
two monitors. from time-lapse to real-time mode when an alarm signal is
A central control unit is necessary to display the images from received and records for the length of time set;
several cameras on a limited number of monitors. ·· Motion detector - this device is used to activate one or more
Different types of control units are available: some are very cameras and initiate recording if a movement is detected in a
simple and have a fixed number of inputs and outputs with given part of a camera-projected image;
a manual switch; others are sequential, displaying different ·· Dial-up system (video frame rate reduction) - a general term to
camera scenes simultaneously, in sequence, on a given number describe a system that transmits images using the telephone
of monitors. line. This system is typically applied to monitor areas which
Some systems have configurable automatic alert functions are not controlled by a central security unit, using an intercom
which are activated when a particular event occurs. The system or specially assigned telephone line.
CCTV can be linked to other security systems, such as the
anti-intrusion system, and be automatically activated when an
event such as intrusion occurs, or, if equipped with a detection
system, the CCTV can detect an event and trigger an alert.
3 Television lines - a video camera specification defining image resolution (in lines) (Wikipedia)
P
T A he pproval
rocedure for Basketball
Equipment
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 10 › The Approval Procedure for Basketball Equipment
224
T
he FIBA Research & Study Centre’s approved -- Provide to the extent possible access to the data on existing
basketball related materials and technical equipment and planned basketball facilities in countries affiliated with
are a prerequisite for FIBA competitions and strongly FIBA.
recommended for all sports halls worldwide. -- Provide an opportunity to the Company to make bids to
The text hereunder describes the procedure to be followed in the Local Organizing Committees (LOC) for their officially
order to get the equipment homologated. recognized, approved and recommended products to be
In 1993, in Munich, Germany, the FIBA Research & Study Centre used at the venues of the main official FIBA competitions as
was founded in order to fulfil one mission i.e. to acknowledge listed in the most recent Official Basketball Rules- Basketball
the best possible equipment for the game of basketball. Equipment guide.
The main goal was to equip and increase the number of sports -- Offer advice in connection with the financing and public
facilities throughout the world, encourage the construction of funding for the construction of new and/or the refurbishing of
basic facilities and the refurbishment of older ones. However, existing basketball facilities.
none of this could be done without adhering to high standards -- Give to the extent possible information on the venues and
of quality, safety and technology. dates of the main competitions and other events of FIBA and
The safety of basketball facilities is the duty of all those its affiliated federations.
concerned with the security of the athletes, the public or the Companies (manufactures only) willing to obtain approval
media, and the physical condition of the building. may fill an application to be granted a FIBA Research & Study
Throughout the years the FIBA Research & Study Centre Centre status in accordance with the Regulations Governing
partners and associates, in collaboration with FIBA, have been Partnership.
developing protective safety equipment; aimed at helping The status is also granted in connection with specific and identified
prevent and reduce the severity of injuries. Consequently, the products, divided into different categories such as: Backboard
FIBA Research & Study Centre has the power to recognize and support units; Wooden floorings; Synthetic floorings; Electronic
approve, on behalf of FIBA, basketball-related materials and scoreboards and 24’’ devices; Construction materials; Seating
technical equipment according to FIBA specifications laid down systems; Rotating boards and Video advertising systems;
in the latest edition of the Official Basketball Rules- Basketball Technical equipment; miscellaneous products; Basketballs.
Equipment. The application is then reviewed and submitted to the FIBA
The purpose of this recognition is once again to guarantee a Research & Study Centre for approval.
high level of quality and other standards set by FIBA. Should the Study Centre approve the candidature, the parties
In 1993, the FIBA Research & Study Centre started off with 3 will then sign an agreement which sets forth the rights and
partners. Today, the number of partners and associates stands obligations of the Parties concerned.
at more than 65. Subsequently FIBA will issue and deliver to the company a
Some of our partners have been members of the Study Centre certificate which mentions that the products submitted to
since its inception and others have joined us throughout the approval comply with the standards set out by FIBA in the latest
various Approval Programmes. Every Approval Programme edition of the Equipment Appendix to the FIBA rules.
is a 4 year programme for which FIBA undertakes different Content of an application
responsibilities such as: The main document is the Questionnaire for New Applicants.
225
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 10 › The Approval Procedure for Basketball Equipment
226
Two versions are available. One related to basketball products Partner candidate during its approval term as an Associate.
and one related to all other sports equipment. Visit of applicants
Both questionnaires are slightly different, both request Companies may be visited at all times, before the grant of a
details on the products to be approved as well as supporting FIBA Research & Study Centre status or during the Approval
documentation related e.g. results of tests undertaken on the Programme. The inspection is carried out by an official
products, commercial brochures, technical leaflets, quality representative of the FIBA Research & Study Centre or by an
certifications, etc. official representative of FIBA appointed by the FIBA Research
The company applying for products approval should be a & Study Centre department.
manufacturer and have several years of experience in the field Should the inspector find hazardous elements or other
of sports; this experience should be related to the installation elements interfering with fundamental rights during his/her
of equipment in different International Sportive Venues and visit, the approval of equipment (provided it was granted) may
references linked to different International Distributors. be withdrawn.
Since an agreement with the FIBA Research & Study Centre
Approval of equipment
involves a financial cost which varies from one category
As mentioned earlier in this chapter, the FIBA Research & Study
to another, when applying for homologation of basketball
Centre has the power to recognize and approve basketball
equipment, the company should provide its latest financial
related material and technical equipment according to the
report with a bank statement indicating that the company is
specifications in the latest edition of the Official Basketball
financially sound. As indicated earlier, the Approval Programme
Rules- Basketball Equipment.
is a minimum 4 year programme. The company submitting
All applicants should submit for approval a minimum of 3 models
an application should therefore be able to fulfil its financial
belonging to the same category of products. This minimum is
obligations during this period of time at least. All failure to fulfil
not required for companies submitting basketballs.
this obligation will be considered as a breach in the contract
Along with the Questionnaire for New Applicants which informs
and result in possible sanctions.
you on the documents that need to be addressed to the Study
Partner and Associate Status
Centre, additional details may be found in documents to be
Should the applicant receive homologation for its products, an
downloaded from FIBA’s www.fiba.com website regarding the
“Associate” status, in connection with these products, will be
type of tests that are performed for basketballs or the type of
granted to the applicant.
tests that are requested for other equipment.
Following a 2 to 4 year period, the Associate candidate/
All tests should be carried out by international recognized
company shall have the possibility to apply for a “Partner”
testing institutes, for which an updated list may be found on
status, in accordance with the provisions set out in the then
our website or may be requested from FIBA.
current Regulations Governing Partnership mentioned earlier.
Upon receipt of the application, the FIBA Research & Study
This document may be obtained from FIBA upon request.
Centre, will carefully review it, (such review takes 4 to 5 weeks)
Though the number of years as an Associate is reviewed, the
and revert to the applicant. During this period, between the
obtainment of the Partner status also depends on the number
submission of the application and the FIBA decision, the
of Partners already present in the given category and most of
applicant is not allowed to bid for any competitions organized
all receiving a Partner status depends on the conduct of the
by FIBA.
227 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 10 › The Approval Procedure for Basketball Equipment
The FIBA Research & Study Centre may request at any time the
elected Study Centre Decisional Board Members to overview
the application.
Should an agreement come into force between FIBA and the
candidate, the obligations of FIBA and the candidate, the duration
and the termination will all be stated in the agreement.
For more information please visit our website: www.fiba.com
Inside FIBA/ FIBA Departments/ FIBA Study Centre or write to:
[email protected].
Madrid Arena
Questionnaire for New Applicants

for the FIBA Research and Study Centre
229 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 10 › Questionnaire for New Applicants for the FIBA Research and Study Centre
1. Please mention your company details (corporate name, type 6. Can the company certify to have more than 6 years of
of company, address, contact details, date of incorporation) activity?
and attach a recent excerpt of the register of companies
YES NO
concerning your company:
6a. How many years of activity does the company have?
7. Does the company have at least 4 years of experience in the

sports market, in producing equipment within the segment/
category it is applying for?
2. Please list the products/models for which the company
requests FIBA approval, and attach all relevant product YES NO
information such as test results, catalogue, brochure, technical 7a. How many years of experience in the sports market does
leaflet, sales literature, etc.: the company have? Please provide documentary evidence
of such experience.
8. In order to certify that the products/models comply with the

FIBA Basketball Rules, please attach a copy of the test results
(in English or in original language with a certified English
3. Please mention for which category of products the application
translation), as stated in the FIBA approval programme, (“The
is submitted (the categories are the following: Backboard
FIBA Research & Study Centre receives the appropriate
Support Units; Wooden Floorings; Synthetic Floorings;
Test results as issued by the Test Institute”). Test results
Electronic Scoreboards and 24” Devices; Construction
are necessary for each product. The name and address
Materials; Electronic System; Seating Systems; Rotating
and contact person of the Test Institute should be clearly
Boards & Video Advertising Systems; Technical Equipment;
mentioned.
Miscellaneous Products; Basketballs:
9. Please attach a copy of any ISO certification for your
company (such as ISO 9001 or ISO 9002).
4. Can the company certify to be the manufacturer of
10. Should be provided a list with a minimum of 5 international
the products/models for which the application has been
sportive venues where the products/models have been
submitted? (manufacturing company must prove ownership of
installed, including the date of installation; the 5 venues must
their factories).
be outside of the country where you have your registered
YES NO seat or principal place of business and must be suitable for
High Level Competitions (see Appendix 1):
5. If the company is only the manufacturer of part of the
(Name of the event, city, country, date of installation, contact
products/models, please provide a detailed list of the parts
person with full contact details)
manufactured by the company, as well as of the parts
1. _________________________________________________
manufactured by third parties, including the name, country
and contact details of such third parties. 2. _________________________________________________
3. _________________________________________________
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 10 › Questionnaire for New Applicants for the FIBA Research and Study Centre
230
4. _________________________________________________ The FIBA Research & Study Centre will carefully review your
5. _________________________________________________ application and will endeavour to revert to you within 4 to 5
weeks (from the date of receipt).
11. List minimum 5 international distributors or dealers where
During this period, between the submission of the application
the products/models may be purchased:
and the FIBA decision, the applicant is not allowed to bid for
(Name of the distributor/dealer, city, country, full contact
any FIBA competitions.
details)
Please be aware that the FIBA Research & Study Centre may
1. _________________________________________________
request from its Decisional Board Members1 to overview your
2. _________________________________________________ application.
3. _________________________________________________
a. The company certifies that all information on this form is
4. _________________________________________________
accurate and exact. Furthermore, none of the information
5. _________________________________________________ contained on this form is an exaggeration or a misrepresentation
12. Please attach a copy of the following documents: the of the truth. Should any information on this questionnaire be
company’s warranty policy; the products/models’ user inaccurate or otherwise not abide to the guidelines above,
manual and/or operation and maintenance instructions. the contract between FIBA and the above-mentioned
company will be automatically cancelled, with immediate
13. Please attach a copy of the latest financial report of your effect.
company. Should you not be able to provide this report,
please send us a statement issued by your auditors b. The company accepts that FIBA representatives may come
confirming that that the company is financially healthy (5 and visit the factory of the company and agrees to cooperate
past years included). In the absence of auditors, please in the organization of a site visit.
provide us with a bank guarantee issued by your bank c. The company acknowledges that it has received, read and
stating that the company is financially healthy (5 past years accepted the attached Regulations Governing Partnership.
included).
14. Please attach a document describing the ownership and The company: Date:
management structure of the company.
*This information is strictly confidential and may not be used outside of the FIBA Research and
Study Centre.
15. Please confirm that you have the right to produce and
sell the products/models and that, to the best of your
knowledge, the products/models do not infringe any third
party’s intellectual property rights.
-- YES, we have the right to produce and sell the products/
models and, to the best of our knowledge, the product(s)/
model(s) do not infringe third party’s intellectual property
rights
-- NO
1 Refer to Regulations Governing Partnership
Questionnaire for New Applicants

(Basketball Companies) for the FIBA
Research and Study Centre
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 10 › Questionnaire for New Applicants (BASKETBALLS) For the FIBA Research & Study Centre
232
1. Please mention your company details (corporate name, type 7. Does the company have at least 4 years of experience in the
of company, address, contact details, date of incorporation) sports market, in producing products within the segment/
and attach a recent excerpt of the register of companies category it is applying for?
concerning your company:
YES NO
7a. How many years of experience in the sports market does

the company have? Please provide documentary evidence of
such experience.
2. Please list the product(s)/model(s) for which the company
8. In order to certify that the product(s)/model(s) comply
requests FIBA approval, and attach all relevant product
with the FIBA Basketball Rules, please attach a copy of
information such as test results, catalogue, brochure,
the test results (in English or in original language with a
technical leaflet, sales literature, etc.:
certified English translation), as stated in the FIBA approval
programme, (“The FIBA Research & Study Centre receives
the appropriate Test results as issued by the Test Institute”).
Test results are necessary for each product. The name and
address and contact person of the Test Institute should be
3. Please mention for which category of basketballs the clearly mentioned.
application is submitted:
9. Please attach a copy of any ISO certification for your
6A: Size 6. Leather. 6B: Size 6. Rubber. 7A: Size7. Leather. 7B: company (such as ISO 9001 or ISO 9002).
Size 7. Rubber.
10. Should be provided a list of a minimum of 5 international
sports events where the product(s)/model(s) have been
4. Is the company the manufacturer of the product(s)/ supplied, including the date of supply; the 5 events must be
model(s) for which the application has been submitted? outside of the country where you have your registered seat
(Manufacturing company must prove ownership of their or principal place of business and must be suitable for High
factories) Level Competitions (see Appendix 1):
YES NO (Name of the event, city, country, date of supply, contact person
with full contact details)
5. If the company is not the manufacturer of the product(s)/
1. ________________________________________________
model(s), please provide information and contact details of
the company manufacture. 2. ________________________________________________
3. ________________________________________________
6. Can the company certify to have more than 6 years of
4. ________________________________________________
activity?
5. ________________________________________________
YES NO
6a. How many years of activity does the company have?

233 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 10 › Questionnaire for New Applicants (BASKETBALLS) For the FIBA Research & Study Centre
11. Should be provided a list of a minimum of 5 international weeks (from the date FIBA receives the application). During
distributors or dealers where the product(s)/model(s) may the period between the submission of the application and
be purchased: the FIBA decision, the applicant is not allowed to bid for FIBA
(Name of the distributor/dealer, city, country, full contact competitions. Please be aware that the FIBA Research & Study
details) Centre may request from its Decisional Board Members to
overview your application1
1. ________________________________________________
2. ________________________________________________ a. The company certifies that all information on this form is
3. ________________________________________________ accurate and exact. Furthermore, none of the information
contained on this form is an exaggeration or a misrepresentation
4. ________________________________________________
of the truth. Should any information on this questionnaire be
5. ________________________________________________
inaccurate or otherwise not abide to the guidelines above,
12. Please attach a copy of the following documents: the the contract between FIBA and the above-mentioned
company’s warranty policy; company will automatically be cancelled, with immediate
effect.
13. Please attach a copy of the latest financial report of your
company. b. The company accepts that FIBA representatives may come
Should you not be able to provide this report, please send us and visit the factory of the company and agrees to cooperate
a statement issued by your auditors confirming that that the in the organization of a site visit.
company is financially healthy (including the 5 past years).
c. The company acknowledges that it has received, read and
In the absence of auditors, please provide us with a bank
accepted the attached Regulations Governing Partnership.
guarantee issued by your bank stating that the company is
financially healthy (including the 5 past years).
The company: Date:
14. Please attach a document describing the ownership and
management structure of the company. This information is strictly confidential and may not be used outside FIBA
15. Please confirm that you have the right to produce and
sell the product(s)/model(s) and that, to the best of your
knowledge, the product(s)/model(s) do not infringe any third
party’s intellectual property rights.
-- YES, we have the right to produce and sell the product(s)/
model(s) and, to the best of our knowledge, the product(s)/
model(s) do not infringe third party’s intellectual property
rights
-- NO
The FIBA Research & Study Centre will review carefully your
application and will endeavour to revert to you within 4 to 5
1 Refer to Regulations Governing Partnership
OF utdoor Basketball
acilities
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 11 › Outdoor Basketball Facilities
236
O
utdoor basketball courts are becoming extremely of the town, and now relinquished, uncultivated and unused.
popular in the urban areas of cities all around the world, These settings are ideal for introducing new concepts to urban
where youngsters often have their very first taste of and local planning.
basketball. Basketball facilities of this kind are not intended merely to
This realistic “vision” emphasises the importance of an outdoor attract players and spectators but lend character to the local
basketball facility for the local area, both from a sporting and social and urban environment. Thus, if a facility is set up close
social point of view. Outdoor basketball facilities can be to other sports or recreational facilities, nestled within
considered special places because they promote socialisation surrounding green areas, the return on investments made for
between youngsters, and offer a simple and unconventional the entire operation will be greater in terms of long-term
first approach to sport. benefits.
This ideological concept can also be found in the Olympic On the basis of these principles, the International Basketball
Movement’s Agenda 21 whose overriding principles encourage Federation (FIBA) intends to encourage people from disadvan-
the international community to contribute towards improving taged social environments to become involved in sporting ac-
social and environmental policies: tivities by promoting the diffusion of outdoor basketball facili-
“An environmental policy which aims at efficient ties; these should be located on the outskirts of large cities or
and sustainable management of resources must in densely populated urban areas where there is a strong pres-
take account of those who depend upon those ence of youngsters.
resources and ensure that they can live with the The construction of adequate infrastructures can provide
dignity to which every individual is entitled. This today’s youth with a source of fun and enjoyment through social
is why the Agenda 21, adopted by the United activities.
Nations, proposes that action plans should take The exact location of an outdoor basketball court is very
account of the fight against poverty and important, and ideally lends itself to a site close to an existing
encourages the integration of disadvantaged structure already frequented by young people, such as schools,
social groups”.(Olympic Movement’s Agenda 21) sports centres, green parks in scarcely populated areas, car
“The Olympic Movement has shown by its history parks of underused office blocks or facilities and areas used for
that it has an essential part to play in combating exhibitions or markets.
poverty by enabling individuals and groups to Another interesting location for outdoor basketball courts is in
fight against social exclusion through participation tourist areas, near beaches, campsites and tourist villages; this
in sport”. (Olympic Movement’s Agenda 21) is ideal for occasional or seasonal activities, offering tourists
Small-scale basketball facilities can be integrated into urban and locals a fun alternative in their free-time.
communities more easily.
Project of an Outdoor Basketball Court
Outdoor facilities do not necessarily have to be located on the
General aspects
outskirts of cities where infrastructure is lacking; they can be
The project of an outdoor sports facility includes two fundamental
located down-town, on the inner-city fringe, in former industrial
phases: design and execution.
areas, now abandoned, where all that remains are old decaying
A correct design phase takes into account the intended use of
buildings. Or they could be located on vacant land, once part
the facility at all stages, from planning to the technological
237 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 11 › Outdoor Basketball Facilities
choices. Evaluation of the Effects of Construction on the

When conceiving a facility, it is important to consider the Environment, the General Environmental Impact, and Area
geomorphologic characteristics of the land; the ground should Specifications
be geologically stable and level requiring only minimum AREA SPECIFICATIONS
intervention, and the site should ensure correct orientation of In addition to the above features, the area on which an outdoor
the court, bearing in mind minimum size and future expansion, basketball court is built should have the following
and steer clear of any possible water drainage problems characteristics:
(groundwater sources, lowering of the water table, etc.) or 1. The site should take into account the need for the correct
potential flooding (flood beds, river beds, etc.). and appropriate orientation of the court and any future
The size of the facility will depend on the intended use. It is not extensions.
always necessary to create large facilities; at times it may be 2. The geomorphologic characteristics of the ground should be
wiser and more practical to create several smaller ones. considered; it should be geologically stable and level to limit
The choice of the materials depends on the characteristics of ground movements and support foundations (walls, etc.) as
the facility, on management availability and the budget at much as possible.
hand. 3. The court should not slope towards once side only to
The sports flooring market offers a wide range of outdoor sports eliminate rainwater or be fitted with other systems.
surfaces at varying prices. It is advisable to contact companies
4. The site should be protected from particular climatic
with experience in this sector and, if possible, have the same
conditions such as winds.
company install the sub-floor and the top flooring layer.
5. The site should be linked to a road network and public
Main Features of an Outdoor Court transport infrastructure to enable easy access for spectators
FIBA standards are very precise and stipulate that: and emergency vehicles, as well as orderly and effective crowd
-- The courts should measure 28x15m with a perimeter band of dispersal.
2m for a total surface area of 608m²; 6. The location should allow easy use of energy sources such
-- The court should be level and obstacle-free; as electricity and water, as well as access to primary services
-- The climate is a very important factor for outdoor basketball such as sewerage.
courts. Outdoor courts which are constantly exposed to the 7. The court should be flexible in terms of use so it meets the
sun require very careful planning in order to ensure that the multifunctionality requirement.
sun’s glare does not disturb or distract players during
8. The area should be far from large electromagnetic sources,
competitions (backs to the sun);
acoustic pollution and toxic gas emissions.
-- Changing rooms and artificial lighting should be provided;
9. The area should not be close to any particular type of
-- The specifications for the changing rooms are the same as
vegetation that may damage the playing area or create a
those for indoor facilities; they must be functional and integrate
hazard.
well with the surroundings and any other amenities.
10. The site should undergo a geological survey to ascertain
the type of terrain, and to check for harmful elements
and underground springs. The presence of underground
238
watercourses can amplify electromagnetic pollution. should be reserved for them on the side parallel to the
Study of sunlight longitudinal axis, so the sun is behind them.
Natural lighting is fundamental for outdoor basketball; therefore Below are some indications on the study of sunlight, and on the
the position of the court in relation to the solar path is sun path Diagram and its use.
important. Observing the sky or celestial sphere, it is apparent that:
For this reason, the court should be situated so that the sun is The sun’s path seems to change every day of the year. As one
in a lateral position to the main axis of the court. The latitude at moves across the earth’s latitudes, the path changes.
which the court is built must also be taken into account. The size or elevation of the path also changes in the northern
In order to ensure the most appropriate position of the court, hemisphere; it is at its lowest during the winter solstice and
planners must know at what times of the day the court will be reaches its peak during the summer solstice when it is at its
most used. highest, after which the path gradually lowers again until the
Ideally, the court should have a north/south orientation, with a next winter solstice
tolerance of +/- 15° deviation depending on whether it is used If you place a screen between your observation point and the
in the morning (+) or afternoon (-), but not around midday. If the sun, and if you mark the position of the sun at different times of
court is used around midday, then the ideal orientation is east- the year, the graphic result would be the following
west with a tolerance of +/- 15° deviation as needed. (Diagram 11.1).
If the outdoor facility is intended to attract spectators, an area
diagram 11.1
Diagram 11.1
Sun path diagram
Sun Path Diagram 100 Lux is required with an illuminance uniformity of 0.5 (min/
The cylindrical sun path diagram is a convenient and user- average), while for local competitions average lighting must be
friendly instrument used to predict the position of the sun in the 200 Lux with a uniformity of 0.6.
sky as seen from an observation point placed on earth between Study on the effect of wind velocities
28° and 56° North latitude. The diagram is a vertical projection In the building sector wind velocity is often underestimated,
of the sun path seen from the earth. however it should not be disregarded because, ultimately, it can
We could say that the sun path diagram is a vision from the be a source of pollution. What is more, wind affects the static
earth of the apparent movement of the sun across the skyline. electricity of an area which may result in an increase in risks
The above diagram relates to the latitude of the city of Geneva caused by energy fields.
in Switzerland. The importance of natural windbreaks is examined later in this
The instruments mentioned above can be used to ascertain the guide.
position of the sun at different times of the year and thus gather
Planning and maintenance of green areas
information that can be used to ensure that an outdoor court is
Landscaping is a new element in building planning. Apart from
protected from excessive exposure to the sun or prevent
being aesthetically pleasing, green areas are also very important
irritating contrasts between very shady and intensely bright
as natural barriers for outdoor sports facilities.
areas. Once the position of the sun has been identified,
Evergreen plants will protect north-facing courts from winter
appropriate screening can be provided to add light or create
winds.
shade in the areas concerned.
Deciduous plants will protect south-facing courts in the summer
Studies on outdoor court lighting for evening and night
and allow the light to filter through in winter.
use
Green areas do not have to complement the types of
Outdoor basketball courts which are used in the evening or at
competitions played, but it is important to have the right amount
night will require suitable lighting. The ideal system should
of bushes and shrubs to create a regular vegetation cycle.
include four lamp poles emitting direct light towards the free
Soil testing will be necessary to ensure the soil has enough
throw line; this will avoid any problems of glaring light for free-
nourishment for the plants, and the soil and climate properties
throwing players.
must be studied, along with soil treatment and treatment
When defining the position of the poles and the lamp fixtures, it
methods.
is important to minimise the risk of dazzling as basketball
When planning the landscape around an outdoor sports facility,
players are often forced to look upwards during play.
it is important to incorporate the plants already present, or
With regard to the choice of lamps and lighting fixtures, this
those typical of the area, so that the project is as natural as
depends on the intended use of the facility, the range of products
possible.
offered by local firms and the available budget.
The best type of lighting is without doubt one that distributes Technical and Safety Aspects
light evenly over the entire playing area; the lighting intensity Compliance with local safety laws
should be adjustable according to requirements and the type of In many countries, the planner must provide sports ground
competitions organised. safety certification alongside all other graphic and technical
For training and recreational activities, an average lighting of documentation during the planning phase. The safety certificates
often relate to the planning and construction phase. Safety
240
certification in the planning phase should include a study and These regulations often concern specific hygienic-sanitary
detailed evaluation of the risks related to the construction areas requirements such as lighting, ventilation, waste-water system
and relevant equipment. The planner must also define and sanitary water supply.
procedures in place to eliminate the risks mentioned. It is important to remember that most countries have technical
An expert must cost out the safety requirements and this budget regulations concerning building materials for which, as indicated
must not be reduced. above, certification must be issued testifying that these products
During the construction phase, the planner must affirm that all are not hazardous or toxic.
work carried out complies with the Safety Plan, by conducting Maintenance
on-site inspections and recommending safety improvement
Ordinary maintenance
measures.
Ordinary maintenance includes the work necessary to ensure
Certification and raw materials the continuous functionality of the entire system. Ordinary
In many countries, the materials used to construct a sports maintenance ensures continued use of the facility, thus
facility must be certified; the quality of the raw materials must preserving the facility’s economic value.
also be certified, as well as their conformity with the specifications Maintenance of an outdoor facility requires particular attention
and standards for their specific use. Safety standards bodies to the surface of the playing area and the equipment:
overlooking the procedures must provide certification in -- Maintenance of the floor surface involves repairing flooring
accordance with the standards in force in the respective country elements which become detached or uneven, or treating and
in which the facility is to be located (CEN or ISO certificates in improving areas exposed to heavy impact and abrasions. This
Europe). type of maintenance is necessary regardless of the kind of
Special equipment which is installed directly by the manufacturer floor materials used. Asphalt courts may require special
must be supplied with the manufacturer’s certification. Once maintenance given the surface film;
construction of a site has been correctly completed, the site -- Maintenance of the equipment involves checking for rust,
manager must be in possession of all the certificates supplied deformed metal parts, splintered or rotting wooden parts, broken
by the various suppliers of equipment and materials. (See FIBA baskets, benches and tables. Equipment foundations and
Study Centre Approval). anchorage devices must also be checked for wear and tear.
Compliance with local technical and sanitary regulations The ancillary areas must also be regularly maintained; the
Outdoor basketball facilities and ancillary services (changing structures and partitioning walls of changing rooms must be
rooms, storage areas, first aid rooms, offices, etc.) are subject inspected, and sanitary fittings and facilities kept in good
to an inspection once construction is complete, to check that working order. This type of maintenance may involve the repair
everything has been built in compliance with the local regulations or replacement of fixtures and fittings, lights and other
in force. These regulations often include provisions on the accessories. Finally, fencing and walls must be inspected for
distance between buildings of the same type or of different damage.
types, distance from roads, industrial areas etc.
Extraordinary maintenance
With regard to the construction of ancillary sports services Extraordinary maintenance involves any special intervention
(changing rooms, indoor areas, toilets and bathrooms, etc.) required by the facility. This type of maintenance is necessary
specifications contained in local regulations must be heeded. when, considering the age and prolonged use of a facility,
242
ordinary maintenance no longer guarantees the use and 2. Maintain a closed cycle - comparison with natural materials
availability of the facility. Extraordinary maintenance is required for an overall recycling plan;
in the case of sudden and/or unforeseen occurrences which 3. Use renewable raw materials - guarantee development and
may result in closure of the facility (extraordinary weather continuity;
conditions, exceptional events, etc.). 4. Save energy - during the excavation, production and distri-
Constructing the Playing Area: Technology and Materials bution phases;
GENERAL ASPECTS 5. Save resources - evaluation of raw materials;
Origins of raw materials 6. Opt for various different materials rather than one same type
In compliance with international environmental standards, the - select materials according to function and use;
building sector must adhere to certain regulations and commit 7. Encourage “regionalism” - buy local raw materials;
to: 8. Implement the threshold principle - evaluate needs and
-- Ensure that the raw materials originate from an ethical requirements, eliminate what is superfluous;
source; 9. Use natural energy elements - conformity.
-- Ensure that the raw materials are derived from renewable Some useful elements for the evaluation of the biological
resources; properties of building materials are listed below.
-- Ensure that the environmental damage caused by their use is ·· Heat storage capacity;
minimal. ·· Thermal conductivity: ability of material to transfer heat;
The aim is to protect the environment throughout the entire ·· Temperature: temperature measurable on the surface of the
transformation process. material;
The sustainable nature of a material depends on its environmental ·· Hygroscopic property: ability to absorb and release humidity
impact throughout its lifecycle. The entire lifecycle must be from/into the surrounding atmosphere;
taken into account: extraction of the raw material, intermediate ·· Diffusion: non-convective transfer of liquids and gase;
transformation process, packaging, transport and distribution, ·· Absorption: ability to filter, accumulate and regenerate
use and consumption, disposal, recycling and final removal. volatile elements;
The sustainable nature of a material is evaluated on the basis of ·· Ventilation: circulation of air according to the different
its entire lifecycle through a careful study of its history. The temperatures, pressure and density of the materials.
complex nature of the transformation sector makes it particularly
Properties of constructional materials
difficult to assess the environmental quality of building material
The following list of materials commonly used in the construction
and to plan a correct “ecological balance”.
sector and/or required in the construction of outdoor basketball
Guidelines for the selection of building materials using facilities is based on the above criteria:
sustainability tests Cement
A preliminary list of useful guidelines in the selection of raw The use of pure cement is recommended; only the minimum
materials includes the following: required amount of additives is needed to ensure ample
1. Study what has already been tested - ecological balance of resistance and adequate treatment. Tests should be carried out
the material; by local institutes to verify the absence of radioactivity or other
243
244
harmful components. White cement is preferred to grey the court, an analysis of the construction concepts should be
cement. provided so that the building work can proceed. To do this, we
Iron must consider how the surface will be built with the appropriate
Steel, an iron alloy, is generally recommended because its high sub-grade (binder).
traction coefficient (high resistance to tensile stress) means the The structure of the surface should consist of the following:
amount used can be limited. Even better, however, is stainless Base level;
steel, a steel alloy. Due to its particular micro-structure, stainless Base course;
steel has a low magnetic permeability and therefore a low or Sub-grade;
negligible response to electromagnetic fields. Stainless steel
Surface.
therefore acts as a magnetic shield, eliminating problems
Base level (excavation and filling material)
otherwise caused by the electromagnetic fields typical of metal
This is the base on which the various layers of the surface must
elements, especially reticulated metals.
rest; therefore, it must have the necessary stability and uniform-
Wood
ity requirements.
Wood can be used for ancillary structures, spectator areas or
If the chosen site is level, general excavation will be carried out
storage areas, however it is generally unsuitable for outdoor
to eliminate the top layer by 30 to 40cm.
court flooring due to its high water permeability and absorption
properties, causing it to shrink or break when dry and exposed If the site is on a slope, excavation will include terracing the
to heat. Wood is also prone to damage by insects and higher part, transporting the material to the lower part, and
parasites. containing the material with support work. Adequate
consolidation should be ensured to avoid subsequent
Wood used for indoor facilities, or outdoor facilities which are
differentiated settlement or subsidence.
protected against direct exposure to atmospheric agents,
should be dense, hard and strong, as it is more durable and Drainage
more resistant to decay and insect damage. After the location of a court has been determined, drainage
Stone should be a primary consideration in assessing the elevation of
Stone is not recommended if it has a high radioactive content, the court. The ability of the soil to handle the surface runoff of
which is generally the case with many marble products or an entire basketball court will vary widely from place to place. If
stones of volcanic origin such as tuff. the area surrounding the court is a very porous, granular
material, then drainage sometimes takes care of itself. In most
Materials and Technologies for Outdoor Basketball
cases, special consideration will have to be paid to where the
Facilities
water goes when it rains. A full-sized basketball court (15x28m
Drawing on the experience from courts built in various locations
with a 2-metre safety border = 608m²) will collect a lot of water.
using various materials (earth, asphalt, cement, etc.), this guide
Often local building codes will require the flow of water runoff to
provides practical suggestions with technical and structural
be controlled. This is especially important on hillsides where
concepts and solutions that comply with recent safety standards
there are erosion concerns. One way to handle runoff is to
and recent technology in flooring materials.
create a drainfield capable of absorbing this water. Alternatively,
Surface types rainwater can be collected in drain pipes and moved along
Having determined the location, dimensions and orientation of these pipes to an appropriate outlet.
246
Reinforcement The mixture of components must guarantee a surface which is

Once the court has been located and the forms for the concrete uniform, flexible, resistant to the compression of active loads
are set, the steel reinforcement is put into place. This most and to abrasion, and stable in external temperatures.
commonly comprises steel bars (rebar) or wire mesh. The Concrete surface
purpose of the reinforcement is to control shrinkage during the Sub-grade (concrete base)
curing process, to give the concrete greater strength and to The base should consist of a 9-10cm layer of concrete with a
keep the “plane” of the concrete consistent. Movement of cement mixture of 350 kg/m³, reinforced with electrically welded
concrete occurs during the freeze/thaw cycles or as the concrete mesh, and placed on the underlying layer of fine sand 2 to 3cm
expands and contracts due to the changes in the temperature thick, separated by a polythene sheet (0.2.mm thick). The
or humidity, or if the ground shifts. function of the sand and polythene is to separate the base from
Mesh should be placed approximately 5cm below the surface the aggregate and therefore allow movements of the base due
of the concrete. The rebar or mesh should never extend beyond to shrinkage and variations in temperature.
the outside edge of the concrete or touch the dirt, as deterioration Surface (base finishing layer)
of the bar will be accelerated. The base must have a surface finish with cement screed and
Base course (aggregate) final finishing and smoothing; the court lines should then be
The base course consists of granular material, from a river or painted on.
quarry, stabilised with natural binding material or crushed The choice of one solution over the other will depend on
quarry stones in continuous grading, covered with gravel and availability and therefore the cost of the materials, as well as the
chippings 8-10cm thick, well rolled and compacted. Compaction heat and climatic conditions prevailing in the respective
tests must be carried out on the aggregate, in line with the location.
current regulations at the place of construction. A resin surface may be applied to both an asphalt and a concrete
Two solutions are possible for the type of surface and its sub- surface.
grade: Alternatives
Asphalt surface Asphalt is often used for courts and can be an economical
Sub-grade (binder) alternative to reinforced concrete. Typically, to have the same
The sub-grade should consist of hot bitumen-coated chippings, strength as reinforced concrete, the asphalt has to be applied
spread with a vibratory finisher and rolled with a sufficiently significantly thicker (7.5cm thicker) and placed on top of a
heavy roller, after spraying the aggregate with bitumen emulsion. thicker engineered sub-base. When the thicker sub-base and
The function of this laver is to link the surface subject to wear thicker asphalt are taken into account, the price is often
with the base course; it will therefore not be as resistant to wear comparable to that of reinforced concrete. Asphalt will be a
as the upper layer. little softer than a concrete court, but will not stand up as well
Surface (upper layer) to freeze/thaw cycles over time.
The upper layer should consist of hot bitumen-coated chippings In some climates, freeze/thaw is not an issue and it may be
and sand, spread with a vibratory finisher and rolled with a possible to create a compacted base without the use of asphalt
sufficiently heavy roller, after spraying the binder below with or concrete. Instead, layers of large rock are put down with
bitumen emulsion. layers of smaller and finer rock on top. The final layer of material
should be very fine and have good cohesion properties. Cement track applications.
powder may be added to the final layer to aid cohesion. Rot- Mats are consistent in height, width and finish as they are
resistant lumber is used for the forms and is left in place. Stakes produced in the factory and shipped to site, requiring nothing
are placed both inside and outside the forms and recessed more than installation. They are available in varying textures
slightly below the forms. and degrees of thickness, and are glued directly to the asphalt
Compaction of each layer of rock is critical. Finally, a “landscape or concrete.
blanket” or other type of geotextile fabric is laid over the Suspended synthetic flooring uses loose interlocking tile
compacted rock. Geotextiles act as a filter, allowing water to modules which are laid on top of the asphalt or concrete with
pass down through the fabric but not come back up. The no need for glue. Often perforations in the surface allow water
drawbacks of this type of court are that maintenance is higher, and dust to pass through and run off below the playing surface
ball reaction may not be as good as on asphalt and concrete while still offering enough surface area for good shoe traction
courts, and a prefabricated synthetic playing surface will be and consistent ball bounce.
needed to cover the base. A compacted base court can easily
Basketball Equipment
be converted to a concrete or asphalt court as the compacted
The following equipment will have to be provided:
base becomes the sub-base for the concrete or asphalt.
Baskets
Performance surfaces Two baskets fixed to the ground with one or two poles for each
While FIBA Level 1 championships will always be played indoors basket, placed at a height of 3.05m from the ground. The
on high quality wood surfaces, wood-based courts will never distance of the pole from the end court line must be at least 1m.
be suitable for outdoor or exposed basketball facilities. Asphalt The backboard and net must comply with the dimensions
and concrete are excellent building materials, but they offer stipulated in the regulations while the choice of material must
little in the way of shock absorption for the athlete. There are take into account the problems of wear and tear due to the
currently three types of synthetic sports surfaces for outdoor meteorological and climatic conditions prevailing in the
courts: coatings applied directly to the asphalt or concrete respective location.
surface, rolls or mats glued directly onto the surface, or Backboards on sidelines
suspended synthetic products that lock together and lie on top Where an outdoor court doubles as a playground, additional
of the concrete or asphalt. backboards should be installed on the sidelines. Up to four
Coatings are available in varying degrees of thickness. Some backboards can be installed on each side, thus giving the court
are painted on and contain granules of rubber and other a total of 10 hoops (four on each side and one at each end),
materials. As many as 16 coatings can be applied in this allowing 60 children to “shoot baskets” simultaneously, as
process, resulting in a total thickness ranging from less than opposed to the original number of 10 players in a regular
1mm up to 8mm thick. These products are very popular in game.
outdoor tennis courts. Players’ benches
Poured-in-place (in-situ) surfaces are mixed on site and adhered These must be set out on the same side as the court officials’
directly to the concrete or asphalt court. These can be thicker table. They can be benches or seats, intended for use by coaches
than the coatings, and the finish can be modified from smooth and players when temporarily not on the court. The bench area
to more textured. Outdoors, these are most popular in running- must be marked out in accordance with FIBA rules.
248
Court officials’ table measure these attributes are as follows:

This must be set up alongside the halfway line and positioned Performance characteristics:
at least 1m from the sideline. The length of the table can vary
Ball rebound ASTM 1551
depending on the type of competition. Section 31
Water drainage
Additional options
In addition to the general requirements described above, some Safety:
other items can be provided to make the facility more Shock absorption (HIC/GMAX) ASTM - 1292, F - 355
comfortable. Coefficient of friction ASTME - 303 British Pendulum
Synthetic performance surfaces Durability:

A synthetic performance surface is a perfect addition to a Static load ASTM - D1621
basketball facility, providing comfort and durability. This kind of Cold/roomtemperature/high
ASTMD5420
temperature impact tests
surface has excellent shock absorption and energy return UV durability ASTM - D4798, ASTM D 4329, ISO 4892
properties, improving performance qualities and friction control, Abrasion resistance (taber abrasion) ASTM D - 4060
Expansion issues STM D696, ASTM D 6341
and reducing injuries to players when falling. The high quality Warranty/life expectancy
of the materials now used by manufacturers to produce this
Maintenance:
type of flooring has led FIBA regulations to allow these surfaces
Debris resistant
to be used even in some international competitions.
Maintenance
A safe outdoor basketball court should have consistent ball
bounce and allow for water to drain off without accumulating on Installations:
the surface. The surface should have consistent vertical shock Adhesives - adhesive-free installations
absorption and a consistent level of friction that is neither too Sub-base restriction
high nor too low. Debris should not be able to accumulate on or Product pre-manufactured: no on-site manufacturing
stick to the surface, nor should the surface require costly Quality assurance:
ongoing or annual maintenance, such as recoating or Manufacturer qualification - ample manufacturer experience
repainting. Installer qualification - manufacturer certified
The quality of these outdoor basketball surfaces should be
consistent, and not be dependent on chemical adhesion to Physical properties:
various sub-bases; nor should they be mixed and prepared on High-end materials
site as outdoor installations will vary in climate, in extreme Melt flow ASTM D 1238
Tensile strength ASTM D 638
temperatures and humidity levels. The materials used in
Elongation at yield ASTM D 638
manufacturing the product should be of a high quality and Flexural modulus ASTM D 790
durable enough to withstand extreme climactic elements. The Notched izod impact ASTM D 256
Un-notched izod impact ASTM D 4812
basketball surface should be produced by a company with an Gardner impact ASTM D 5420
extended history in production of this product, which itself has Rockwell hardness ASTM D 785
Head deflection ASTM D 648
proven its longevity in outdoor sporting applications.
The specific characteristics of a FIBA-approved outdoor Fencing
basketball surface and internationally accepted tests used to The court, measuring 32x19m including the outer bands, may
be surrounded by a fence, often made from wire mesh, extending are most common in the building practice, such as unexpected
to a height of at least 1m. This fencing must be large and strong additional costs for future maintenance.
enough to resist any lateral pressure from a load, in accordance Indeed, when building outdoor basketball courts, costs are a
with the local safety standards in force. The choice of the crucial aspect to take into consideration. The same criteria
dimensions and technical features of the fencing will depend on should be applied for the construction of an outdoor court as
the cost and availability of the product, but must comply with for a multi-sport arena, and a multi-sport arena, regardless of
the current safety regulations. The fencing is supported by the different facilities within, must always ensure the highest
posts, possibly galvanised, and fixed along the edging which level of safety for visitors and allow easy monitoring of the sport
should be completely buried under the perimeter around the activities carried out. If the best possible components are used
entire court. Access to the court should be through two gates to construct these facilities, maintenance costs may be
situated at the corners of the fence, each possibly being no less significantly reduced, and damaged components easily repaired
than 1.20m wide. or replaced.
Changing rooms Nevertheless, given the complexity of the building practice and
If there are no changing room facilities in the immediate vicinity, the diverse views associated with it in different countries, we
a structure should be built for this purpose. Ideally, this are unable to analyse every possible element: every sample
construction should be prefabricated in metal or PVC resin or must be integrated and designed to match the needs of the
another suitable material, allowing it to be erected and respective communities.
Note: The FIBA Research and Study Centre department published “The FIBA Outdoor Project” in
dismantled easily and quickly, as required. Alternatively, 2006, which could be an addition to this chapter.
changing rooms could be provided as a fixed structure in
concrete, steel, laminated wood etc, however this would
inevitably involve higher costs, not least because a fixed
structure must also include changing rooms for referees, a first
aid room, and storage room.
Court extensions
in the planning phase, it is advisable to provide for free space
adjacent to the court, where a second court could possibly be
built in the near or distant future.
This would not only reduce the building costs, but also facility
management costs, as well as provide a better service for the
user if an extension were necessary.
Important Reminders for Basketball Court Construction

The aim of this chapter was to discuss project techniques while
integrating them with constructional needs and requirements,
and also to analyse the correct or incorrect usage of some of
the elements constituting outdoors courts.
We believe this will help engineers to avoid the mistakes that
S
ports Facilities and the
Organisation of International
Basketball Events
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 12 › Sports Facilities and the Organisation of International Basketball Events
252
T
he new concept of sport and sports facilities is based facility and terminating with the end of the competition.
on contemporary requirements and characterised by Each sports facility has its own configuration and organisational
many revised and improved factors. logic, however in the case of major international basketball
Basketball, the sporting symbol of dynamicity and events all facilities must have certain common characterising
entertainment, represents the driving force in this transformation, elements. For a better understanding, the facility must be
especially as far as sports facilities are concerned. The simple examined separately, both inside and out.
concept of a facility being built to do nothing more than house During major sporting events, entertainment areas or sites
activities has become outdated and given way to an increasingly for side events outside the facility are becoming increasingly
functional and versatile multipurpose structure, which provides popular; these optional spaces must be located close to the
a home for a multitude of sports lovers, whether actively event areas themselves, such as car parks, ticket offices and
participating on a professional, amateur or recreational level, accredited zones. The same applies to indoor areas which
spectating, or working on and off the court. Special occasions, must include adequate space for the media and VIPs, as well
such as international events, highlight the demand for changes as refreshment areas and attractions for the public, where
which balance and round off a sporting event or show with possible. All these requirements, and others, follow a common
a series of spin-off activities; these side events heighten logical thread which weaves its way along the explanatory tour
awareness and exposure, making the main event even more on the pages that follow. (Table 12.1)
attractive, yet they require increasingly dynamic management The explanatory tour presents the different characteristics of
and organisation of the sports facility. the facility but does not include the particular requirements
Attention to detail, attainment of comfort, and an optimal layout of the playing areas and activities related to the teams and/
of spaces within the facility can make all the difference to a or referees as these have been sufficiently described in earlier
large event where the stakeholders are not only represented by chapters.
the public and the players, but, above all, also by the media and A sports facility generally comprises:
partners who revolve around the event. A. External areas
Television and media exposure of international basketball events B. Indoor areas
has seen a significant increase over the last ten years, thanks These “areas” must then be divided into areas of interest:
to an overabundance of basketball competitions attracting
A. External areas
worldwide interest.
A - 1 Car parks
The management of a sports facility during an event is very
A - 2 Accreditation points/ticket offices
closely linked to the dynamics of marketing and business
A - 3 Entertainment areas
management, in both their essence and their principles. The
A - 4 Outdoor events
reason for this is that the stakeholders are no longer only on the
court, but nowadays also include the public, media and event B. B - Indoor areas
investors, each with his own particular requirements. B - 1 Public
In order to study the organisation of a sports facility during an B - 2 Media
international event, a series of critical factors must be identified, B - 3 Partners and/or sponsors
on which to base a clear and exemplary model. This chapter B - 4 VIPs & guests
follows a precise path, starting from the arrival at the sports B - 5 Hospitality
253
254
Table 12.1
AREAS NEEDED IN A SPORTS FACILITY FOR CONDUCTING AN INTERNATIONAL EVENT AND FUNCTIONS ASSIGNED TO SPACES
A1 Parking
EXTERNAL A2 Accreditation/ticket
A
AREAS A3 Entertainment areas
A4 Outdoor events
B1 Spectatores
B2 Media
INDOOR
B B3 Partner / Sponsor
AREAS
B4 Vip & Guests
B5 Hospitality
FURTHER BREAKDOWN OF SPACES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE INTERNAL
B1 Spectators Ancillary services for spectators

B1.a Commercial areas
B1.b Areas of support/Information
B2 Media Media Area

B2a Press Print
B2a.1 Media revenue area
B2a.2 Press seats Table 12.1
B2a.3 Press room Sports facility
B2a.4 Refreshments area areas
B2b Photo
B2b.1 Press seats
B2b.2 Field edge
B2c TV/radio
INDOOR
B
AREAS B2c.1 Fixed positions for cameras
B2c.2 Range mobile cameras
B2c.3 Positions for radio/tv remarks
B2c.4 Liaison with external area for television production
B2c.5 Lighting necessary
B3 Partner / Sponsor Partner/Sponsor Areas

B3.1 Entertainment and promotion partner area
B3.2 Partner lounge
B3.3 Positioning advertising boards
B4 Vip & Guests Vip Area

B4.1 VIP seats
B4.2 VIP lounge
Refreshement area, marketing space, relax area, private lounges,

B5 Hospitality conference room, space for performance
255 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 12 › Sports Facilities and the Organisation of International Basketball Events
A - External Areas Accreditations for the media and VIPs should be dealt with
Area A1 directly by the event organisers and press office respectively.
Car parks Area A3
Car parks are an essential, decisive and fundamental element Entertainment areas
in the course of an event (which may last one day or more). The importance of a large international event is reflected by
Initially, the size or capacity of the car-park area must be based the external set-up. In fact, in recent years, attention has been
on the regulations in force and local town planning rules of the paid increasingly to the design and layout of a sports facility, in
host country; ultimately, the area must be proportionate to the particular the external area, for an attractive and scenic setting
capacity of the sports facility and adequately equipped. will heighten the overall appeal of the facility. Public amenities
A guideline for the car-parking capacity is based on the overall are now available outside the sports hall and are run by the event
capacity of the facility as follows: organisers and/or other organisations or firms (e.g. partners).
Car Park/Spectator Ratio Area A4
1 m² for each spectator expected. Outdoor events
≤ 5,000 spectators = 5,000 m² Spin-off and support events organised alongside main events
5,000-10,000 spectators = 5,000-10,000 m² have now become standard practice, particularly during
≥ 10,000 spectators = ≥ 10,000 m² basketball events.
This ratio applies to single one-day events, several events in Because it is often difficult to organise basketball exhibitions or
one day, and several events over several days. other sports displays inside a sports facility due to the amount
The parking area should be divided into smaller sections based of space required, entertainment areas are often set up outside
on the distribution and location of the public (VIPs, media, teams, for this purpose. Obviously, any form of entertainment must
partners) inside the building. Each parking zone should have be relative to the main event and coordinated with possible
clearly defined spaces, which meet various requirements, and hospitality and entertainment areas.
should be adequately monitored and controlled. Areas must B - Indoor areas
be reserved for emergency vehicles, technical vehicles for TV There are many factors to be taken into account in the study
broadcasting, and for VIP-related vehicles (catering, security, of indoor spaces so, in order to make the task easier, it is
etc.). recommended the sports facility be divided into four large
Area A2 sections:
Accreditation points/ticket offices Area B1 - Ancillary spaces for the public
Following on from the car park area, we move on to the access Area B2 - Media spaces
area which must ensure the safe arrival, circulation, distribution Area B3 - Spaces for partners and/or sponsors
and departure of the public. A properly equipped area must Area B4 - VIP spaces
be foreseen to deal with any problems related to tickets and Despite the subdivision, these sections are quite definitely
accreditations. interlinked, particularly in the heart of the facility.
We suggest creating two easily accessible ticket office/
accreditation areas in front of the facility; these areas may
possibly incorporate welcome and hospitality areas.
256
Area B1 The media therefore play an important role and any sports facility
Ancillary spaces for the public wishing to host large-scale events must give due consideration
Since the main public area has already been examined in detail to the media and ensure meticulous organisation.
in earlier chapters, in particular in Chapter 2, here we shall There are generally many more press representatives present at
concentrate on the ancillary structures which are available to major events than at weekly competitions. The capacity of the
the public during a large international event: facilities must be assessed, adapted and organised in advance
B1a - Commercial areas to accommodate the media requirements of a large number
B1b - Support/information areas of media representatives. The media area can be divided into
Commercial areas three main parts:
During a large basketball event, these areas are the key points B2a - Press (print media)
for attracting and involving the public, or for promoting new B2b - Photographers
products. They must be easily accessible for everybody, ideally B2c - TV/Radio (broadcast media)
situated in communal assembly and meeting areas. The section B2a must meet certain specifications in terms of
Commercial and refreshment areas/stands are often positioned space and the organisation of this space, based on the event
near the entrances/exits of the sports facility, “obliging” visitors concerned. This area can be divided into four sectors:
to see them as they proceed along the guided route to the Press (2a):
event. The number of these amenities, their distribution and, in 1 – Media Accreditation Area ( B2a)
some cases, their set-up must be follow in consultation with
2 – Press Tribune ( B2a)
FIBA and local organisers.
3 – Press Conference Room ( B2a)
In new sports facilities, to meet new “management requirements”,
4 – Media Workroom ( B2a)
the commercial areas are an integral part of the structure
from the start of the project as they contribute to its “survival” 5 – Communication Centre ( B2a)
throughout the year, particularly during periods when no events 6 – FIBA Press Office ( B2a)
are organised. 7 – Refreshment Area ( B2a)
Support/information areas Access to these sectors of the facility must be separate yet
Support/information areas are ones which help the spectator controlled; a parking area must also be reserved for media
reach all areas of interest, both inside and outside the sports representatives. This car park area must be reserved for all
facility, easily and clearly. three sections, press, photographers and TV representatives,
Area B2 and should be commensurate with the overall capacity of the
Media area facility, the type of event and the number of accreditations.
Sport needs the media just as the media need sport. 1 - Media Accreditation Area: here, the organisers monitor
This relationship is essential, especially on the eve of and during the arrival of the journalists and check their accreditation prior
large sporting events. Over the last few decades, basketball to an event. This area should be positioned next to the Press
has seen a rise in popularity and exposure, attracting interest Tribune. The area does not necessarily have to be large, but it
from an international audience and becoming one of the most must be functional and allow the different media representatives
watched and followed sports in the world. to circulate.
2 - Press Tribune: this must be a prime location inside the In addition, there must be small interview areas in the room or
playing hall to provide accredited journalists with the best nearby, where event backdrops can be hung.
possible view. The criteria to guarantee a clear view for the 4 - Media Workroom: This area must be located close to
media are the same as those described in earlier chapters to the Press Conference Room and include working positions
offer spectators an unobstructed view. reserved for the journalists. The Media Workroom must be
Based on past experience, at major sporting events provision equipped with the following:
should be made in the Press Tribune for a minimum of 50 -- Tables
working positions and up to 150 +. -- Chairs
A guideline for the number of working positions in the Press -- Internet connections for each working position.
Tribune is based on the overall seating capacity of the sports
The size of the Media Workroom should be proportionate to the
facility:
size of the facility and the Press Tribune.
Press Tribune Positions/Spectator Ratio
5 - Communication Centre: An area in which journalists can
< 5,000 spectators = 50 positions follow the event on screens which show images of the game in
5,000-10,000 spectators = 80-100 positions real time. The Communication Centre should be close to the
> 10,000 spectators = 150 + positions Press Tribune with a direct link to the Refreshment Area. The
Each position must measure approximately 1 m² and include centre should be equipped with the following:
the following: -- Chairs
-- A desk; -- Lounge chairs and sofas
-- A chair; -- Screens
-- A power socket; 6 - FIBA Press Office: this area, reserved exclusively for the
-- An ADSL line (if a wi-fi system is not available); FIBA Press Office. It should be the same size as the Media
-- A telephone socket; Workroom and similiary equipped. Furthermore, it should
ensure direct access to the sections B2a, B2b and B2c.
-- A monitor connected to the internal circuit.
7 - Refreshment Area: an area within the sections B2a-B2b-
The Press Tribune must be directly linked to the other media
B2c reserved exclusively for the media. This area should include
sectors B2a-B2b-B2c.
a media lounge where media representatives can rest.
The Press Tribune should also have three workstations for the
Toilets must be included in each media section.
statisticians.
Photographers (2b):
3 - Press Conference Room: an area reserved for press
conferences and media presentations. The section B2b is reserved for photographers during an
event.
This area must be located close to the Press Tribune, allowing
journalists easy access. The room should include the Working positions should be provided in two areas:
following: B2b.1 Press Tribune (B2a.2)
-- A table (for a minimum of 6 people) B2b.2 Court-side
-- Chairs (for a minimum of 50 people) 1 - A minimum number of positions in the Press Tribune (B2a.2)
must be reserved for photographers; the amount of photographer
-- A sound system and microphones.
258
positions should be based on the number of requests received points high up in a tribune. The viewing angle range should
by the organisers in advance, and must be proportionate to the be approximately 6m² per camera.
event organised. -- Mobile cameras (B2c.2): there are usually two to three along
Each working position must measure approximately 1m² and the courtside, or more depending on the type of event. During
include the following: the event, they must be positioned at the corners of the court
-- A desk and/or behind the baskets, maintaining the same distance
-- A chair from the courts as the photographers.
-- Commentary positions (B2c.3) should be similar to mobile
-- A power socket
camera positions (B2a.2). The provision of commentary
-- An ADSL line (if a wi-fi system is not available)
positions will vary according to the importance of the event,
-- A telephone socket however, their number must be proportionate to the number
2 - Court-side photographers should be positioned along the of broadcasters present. For special events (such as World
endlines of the playing court, however away from the bench side. Championships and Olympic Games), the Press Tribune
They must maintain a distance of at least 2.20m (the distance usually has to be adapted to meet special requirements.
from the basket base to the endline) in order not to disturb the Commentary positions are usually located high up in the tribunes
game and/or obstruct the action. and in line with the centre of the court and on the same side as
FIBA provides precise specifications for photographers’ the fixed cameras, to ensure a clear view of the court for the
positions in existing facilities which may have an unconventional commentary team. The positions should be separated from the
layout. spectators, in a secure area which also guarantees acoustic
For details on refreshment areas and related services, please separation. The commentary desks should be 75cm high and
refer to B2, Media Area, above. large enough to accommodate a computer, monitor, etc.
TV/Radio (B2c): Each commentary position should seat two to three people and
The section 2c is reserved for the accredited television and be at least 1.80m long.
radio broadcast media. A guideline for the number of commentary positions is based
Broadcast media requirements include: on the overall seating capacity of the sports facility:
1 – Fixed-camera positions (B2c.1): COMMENTARY POSITIONS/SPECTATOR RATIO
2 – Mobile cameras and viewing angle range (B2c.2): < 5,000 spectators = 5 positions
3 – Commentary positions (B2c.3): 5,000 - 10,000 spectators = 5-10 positions
4 – Television studios (B2c.4): > 10,000 spectators = 10-15 positions
5 – Direct link to an outside broadcasting van (mobile 4 - There must be a room inside the facility which, if required
production unit) (B2c.5): by the TV stations, is suitable for use as a television studio. The
minimum size of the room should be 6.00x4.0x2.50m.
6 – Adequate lighting (B2c.6):
5 - An area must be reserved outside the facility, close to
7 – Radio (B2c.7):
the tribune with the commentary positions, for one or more
-- Fixed cameras (B2c.1): in agreement with the production room,
outside broadcast (OB) vans (B2c.4) necessary for production,
fixed cameras must be centrally positioned at key vantage
transmission and other technical aspects.
Approximately 15m² should be reserved per vehicle (OB van). provisions must be made in the facility to accommodate them
6 - The lighting requirements for television broadcasting for as best as possible.
international events are the same as those stipulated by FIBA. Partner and sponsor areas are restricted to Area 1 (public area)
The average maintained illumination should be no less than 1,800 because these zones are intended to increase the exposure
Lux distributed evenly over the entire court, with approximately and accessibility of an event and its partners. Partner and
1,000 Lux throughout the rest of the arena. For further details, sponsor requirements of this nature are usually limited to main
please refer to the chapter on technological installations. The international basketball competitions or major sports events.
television broadcasters are responsible for meeting their own Technical difficulties are often encountered when trying to
special or additional requirements, such as an increased power organise areas for partners and sponsors in old sports structures,
supply. yet in new facilities these areas often provide a distinguishing
7 - Radio broadcasting positions with the same specifications feature as the partners and sponsors become involved in the
as those under point B2a.2 should be provided next to the construction and life of the facility, sometimes even giving their
television commentary positions. “name” to the building.
Mixed Zone: this area is particularly important because it The sub-sections in this area include:
represents the first true communal zone between the media B3.1 - Partner promotion and entertainment areas
areas and the players’ changing rooms. B3.2 - Partner lounge
This is a restricted area where media representatives can meet B3.3 - Position and size of advertising boards around the
players and team staff who are not otherwise involved in the playing court
press conference with journalists. Partner promotion and entertainment areas (B3.1) are the
The Mixed Zone should be located close to the changing rooms, ancillary areas set up during an event by the event partners
en route to the teams’ stadium exit door. Media representatives and/or sponsors. These areas are assigned by the facility
should have easy access to the Mixed Zone from the Press managers and event organisers but the actual organisation
Tribune. is usually left to the sponsors who apply their own image or
The Mixed Zone should be divided into three areas: corporate identity to the event, and promote their products and
-- For broadcasters with television rights to the event. services.
-- For broadcasters without television rights. As well as a lounge for VIPs (B4.3), partners often need an area
-- For all other journalists where stakeholders can meet and talk. If space is limited but
there is sufficient interest, the two areas can be combined in
For more detailed information regarding television broadcasting,
one room.
please refer to the FIBA TV Manual which be downloaded free
of charge from the FIBA Website (www.fiba.com). The greatest impact that sponsors have on an event results from
sponsor exposure during the game itself. This is achieved by
Area B3
installing advertising boards around the court or, more recently,
Partner and sponsor area
LED screens (B3.3).
Sport has proved to be a good means of investment, and major
Obviously, in order not to interfere with the game, advertising
international basketball events have confirmed its value in this
boards must be positioned at least 2 m from the sidelines and
sense. If investors and partners wish to become involved in
end lines.
an event by setting up stands or organising entertainment,
260
The colours used for animation and graphics are subject to the 30 cars. This area should ensure easy and direct access to the
approval of the organisers, facility managers, team managers inside of the hall.
and referees, to ensure they do not detract from the game. The VIP area is divided into three main sections:
For equipment specifications see Chapter 3. B4.1 - VVIP Tribune of Honour
Area B4 B4.2 - VIP Tribune of Honour
VIP area B4.3 - VIP Lounge
Given the fact that a major basketball event attracts media The Tribune of Honour for VVIPs (high-ranking federation and
attention, it goes without saying that it will also attract the LOC representatives and figures of local authority) should be
attention of celebrities and VIPs from the world of show positioned in the central part of the tribune on the bench side
business, politics and sport itself, thus increasing the overall (parterre). The number of seats must be commensurate with
appeal of the event and generally raising interest. the importance of the event. The Tribune of Honour for VIPs
For this reason, it is important to reserve appropriate VIP (important guests, partners, sponsors) should be on either side
areas. of the Tribune of Honour for VVIPs. Private access and car
General aspects - An adequate number of functional areas parking for these areas should be reserved following the same
should be provided to efficiently accommodate VIPs. The VIP proportions.
areas should reflect the importance of the event, conform to These VIP tribunes should be positioned on the opposite side
particular formal protocols, respect the host town or city and to the officials’ table. The tribunes should be connected to one
be proportionate to the overall size of the sports facility. or more private rooms to be used as VIP lounges (B4.3).
Equipped areas - Provisions must be made in the hall for During international events recognised by FIBA, the seating
suitably equipped areas, directly connected to the reserved arrangements in the VIP tribunes must comply with the
tribunes: provisions of protocol stipulated in the Internal Regulations
·· At least two information and hospitality areas, to adopted by the International Basketball Federation (FIBA).
accommodate;
Area B5
·· 150 people (at international events); Hospitality
·· 500 people (at events organised and/or supervised by FIBA); Hospitality activities are becoming an increasingly important
·· 1,000 people (at World Championships); element in corporate marketing strategies.
·· At least two small private rooms; Sporting events offer a great potential to stimulate working
·· A refreshment area with service to the various lounge areas relationships in an entertaining and informal atmosphere.
(the refreshment lounge must be positioned at a suitable Hospitality refers to the relationship process between guests
distance from telephone points). These lounge areas should and hosts, and the provision of space within a facility or in
be equipped with screens or monitors mounted on the walls conjunction with an event where business relationships can be
and/or ceiling; established; these spaces may offer additional services such
·· A sufficient number of toilet facilities. as catering or hostess services.
At the entrance to the VIP area, there should be a reception In marketing terms, hospitality offers a company the opportunity
area to welcome visitors, check accreditation and provide to welcome and entertain people whom may influence its
information. A VIP parking area should be reserved for at least business future.
Requirements for Hospitality Structures Diagram 1

Practicability: Temporary structures may only be installed
once the necessary licenses and permits have been obtained.
Availability: The hospitality areas must be available for the
Local Organising Committee or persons authorised by the
committee.
Security: The hospitality lounge should be located within the
restricted and secure area. Security staff are responsible for
protecting people from public interference and safeguarding
items in the hospitality area.
Access: Organisers and guests must have free access without
any restrictions. Car parks must be sufficiently close to the
playing hall.
Location: The hospitality area must not be more than 300 m
from the playing hall.
In order to best meet all of these requirements, a number of
variables must be taken into account. Most importantly, there
must be a structured decision-making organisation at hand to
diagram 1
solve problems in a fast and efficient manner. A responsibility
Refreshing Area
chart is recommended, which clearly indicates the areas
assigned to each staff member. The different sections of the
facility should be identified using different colours to provide
visitors with a simple layout to guide them efficiently structure
and allow them to make the most of the amenities available.
Facility layout diagrams should be posted at the entrances/
exits, listing the main activities and areas of interest.
For events where a particularly large number of spectators
is anticipated, first-aid points should be provided in easily
accessible key locations both inside and outside the building,
with qualified personnel trained to deal with emergencies.
Smoking areas may be provided if the regulations in force in
the host country so allow.
Facilities need Events like Events need Facilities
Two elements living and lasting together.
FIBA & NBA

Comparing Basketball
Facilities
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 13 › FIBA & NBA Comparing Basketball Facilities
264
T
his chapter serves to briefly illustrate just some of the league comprises 30 franchise clubs. Although each basketball
main differences which identify the two major basketball club represents a certain city franchise, clubs may relocate,
entities at international level: FIBA and the NBA. particularly if their markets are interesting and lucrative for the
NBA.
FIBA The NBA is not dependent on any sports federation, nor does
The International Basketball Federation was founded in its system of competition entail any form of league relegation. In
1932 by eight nations with the common aim of promoting and 1997, the women’s counterpart to the NBA, the WNBA (Women’s
regulating the game of basketball. Today it unites 213 national National Basketball Association), was founded to govern the
federations representing all five continents. female professional basketball league, and, in 2001, the NBA
The abbreviation ‘FIBA’ derives from the French ‘Fédération set up a minor league, the NBA Development League, with 15
Internationale de Basketball Amateur’. The word ‘Amateur’ was teams linked directly to NBA teams.
dropped in 1986 after the distinction between amateurs and Because of its autonomous status and its independence from
professionals was eliminated. However, the ‘A’ in FIBA was left, any federation, the NBA has been able to nurture and develop
not only for traditional reasons but also because of the ‘BA’ at new ideas over the years. This is particularly evident at regulatory
the beginning of the name of our sport… BASKETBALL! level, where the NBA has its own set of rules aimed at improving
FIBA is recognised as the sole competent authority in basketball the impact of the game and turning it into a spectacular show,
by the International Olympic Committee (IOC). FIBA is a non- rules which have proved to be the precursor for the official rules
profit making organisation and does not pursue any economic of FIBA.
objective for its own gains. The characteristics and origins of FIBA and the NBA elucidate the
FIBA establishes the Official Basketball Rules, the specifications major difference between the two sporting entities, particularly
for equipment and sports facilities, as well as all internal in their respective “mission”.
executive regulations that must be applied to all international There is also a legal-organisational difference between FIBA
and Olympic competitions, for which FIBA also determines the and the NBA. FIBA is an institutional sports body, whilst the
system of competition. NBA is a private sports association. Here we have two very
different organisations which have been travelling parallel on
FIBA controls and governs the appointment of international
the subject of sports facilities for many years but whose paths
referees, regulates the transfer of players from one country
are now beginning to converge.
to another, and controls and governs all international
NBA basketball epitomises professionalism and spectacularism
competitions.
at club level both in terms of the game and organisation. For
FIBA does not have to generate a profit or business via
decades the main features of the NBA system appeared to
basketball; its aim is to guarantee the development of the game
be distant and far removed from the international world of
and carry out its activities throughout the world.
basketball, especially for professional basketball players.
With time, the export of talented international players to the
NBA USA, the continual development and improvement of the
The National Basketball Association is the premier sport of basketball, and the undeniable influence of basketball
professional basketball league in the United States and Canada. throughout the sporting world have led FIBA to steer ever closer
Founded in 1946, and following a sequence of changes, today’s
265
266
to NBA regulations, and obliged the NBA to keep a constant eye same location and, as such, the organisation for each new
on FIBA events. A comparison of the two would be neither just competition must be adapted to suit the host facility selected
nor possible, however, in order to create a better understanding from candidatures submitted by various member countries.
of the two systems (particularly in terms of sports facilities), and As far as sports facilities are concerned, FIBA’s aim is to achieve
with a view to future improvement, it is worth considering some a form of certification which is on a par with a quality mark
of the most striking characteristics. accrediting the standard of the facility and the building, and
Although the two organisations obviously have different ways which follows established and functional criteria. A procedure
of reaching their goals, they do in fact have some elements in of this nature obviously involves those facilities able or hopeful
common, particularly when it comes to playing sites, or rather to host international events, but also those at national and local
sports facilities. level looking to promote and develop basketball.
FIBA and sports facilities It goes without saying that a multifunctional facility with a
The importance and significance of international competitions capacity of 20,000 is quite different from a mono-functional
(world championships, continental championships, youth facility for only 5,000, or indeed one which is not designed to
championships, etc.) held under the aegis of FIBA have steered accommodate any spectators at all. It is for this reason that
not only the sports performances themselves, but also the a quality scale should be introduced to assess parameters
services revolving around them, towards a spectacularly high relating to capacity, functionality and all other attributes which
level and, in many cases, standards of excellence. Obviously, can influence the award of FIBA quality certification.
sports facilities themselves are repeatedly a subject for debate, NBA and sports facilities
and FIBA’s attention is always directed towards establishing The situation is quite different in the USA where a comparison of
common standards for sports facilities wishing to host events the 30 NBA arenas and the kind of events they organise shows
of particular importance. Nevertheless, the extent of FIBA that it is possible to identify common characteristics (facility
competitions at international level makes it impossible to size, exposure, support services, etc.) which all tend to be the
classify and monitor all features of a sports facility and to define same in the various sports facilities designed to host basketball
an “one-for-all” type of facility. events.
All the same, FIBA knows how best to make its competitions a The keystone to the NBA system could well be the
showcase for its championships, at the same time conveying multifunctionality and versatility of their sports facilities, in their
messages of great socio-cultural importance that have a entirety. An NBA arena has to stand out, and showcase the
further-reaching impact than the game itself. space it has, its promotion stands, kiosks, refreshment areas,
Yet FIBA’s interest in international competitions does not and even its less conventionally commercial areas such as
come back chiefly to the need to involve the public (apart changing rooms, training rooms or other service provisions -
from studying the flow of people) or study the market, but is anything and everything that could be in the media spotlight
fundamentally aimed at guaranteeing high-quality “itinerant” where strong visual communication is the answer.
services inside and outside the arena. Of course, such services Any arena in the NBA network becomes a focal point, a gathering
must correspond with the means available and the number of place, not just for basketball but for other kinds of events, and
competitions to be played during the competition season. not necessarily sporting events. These are modern arenas,
Why “itinerant”? FIBA events are not always organised in the built recently in the mid-nineties and constantly undergoing
267 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 13 › FIBA & NBA Comparing Basketball Facilities
reconstruction and modernisation, particularly where public The factors mentioned above highlight the following:
services are concerned. Every NBA arena is planned and equipped with the best
The aim is to entertain the public without dwelling on the actual technological and operating systems available.
outcome of the game. The NBA exploits its fans’ emotions by The arena changes its appearance but not its substance, with
increasing the level of amenities and involving them in secondary ancillary services remaining the same.
activities which add to the suspense before the event. Intense and repeated activities ensure that a facility is long-
In basketball, more than in any other sport, the public is “close” lasting and efficient.
to the players, but not only in a physical sense, for the NBA High-level activities give a facility exposure, not just at national
system guarantees its fans a “psychological” sense of closeness and continental level, but also at international level.
as well, by offering various initiatives inside and outside the Public or private ownership and private management, together
arena. with optimum exposure, allows the arena’s naming rights to be
This is achieved thanks to the strong synergy between the sold to private investors, or shared management of the indoor
commercial activities and support services in the facility, and and outdoor areas of the arena with another tenant.
the message that they carefully and accurately convey to the All these points support the earlier reference to the need for
users. Customer satisfaction in the form of discreet attention absolute professionalism inside an arena to ensure the smooth
is what the public wants and needs; this can be attained by progress of activities.
studying what has stimulated fans in the past and what they
The cost factor is the main problem in the planning and
expect in the future. The ultimate aim is to promote a loyal fan
construction of this kind of facility. Thoughts are immediately
base.
turned to finding a way to reducing costs, containing costs and
Managing an NBA arena is complex and intricate, both finally making a profit. It is interesting to note how high the initial
strategically and operatively. For this reason, in almost all of construction costs are.
the 30 NBA arenas, there is a difference between owner and
Looking at the 2007/2008 basketball season, the average
manager; in most cases the owner can be public or private,
capacity of NBA arenas was close to 20,000, whereby the actual
whereas the manager is always private. Help is often at
figure obviously varied depending on the event scheduled. There
hand from professional facility management companies or
are no arenas with a capacity less than 17,000, all of which
cooperative-like management companies set up by interested
are suitable for and equipped for potential international events.
parties using the facility’s services. This latter aspect is a key
Over the past few years, facility capacity has been increased to
factor in the success of an NBA facility, bearing in mind that
reflect the growth in basketball interest. The 2006/2007 season
on average in every arena there are at least three sports clubs
was the fourth consecutive season in which a record number of
playing different sports (NBA or WNBA basketball, NHL hockey,
tickets were sold with spectator figures reaching approximately
AFL American football, etc.) in home games in the course of the
20,000 for each event.
calendar year, not to mention other side events which attract
Differences and similarities
a big following on the court. This means that the facility and
There is no place for rivalry between FIBA and the NBA; these
all its installations must be in perfect working order, regularly
are two separate movements that can come together, allowing
maintained, and operated by experienced and skilled staff. The
each to profit from the other.
court arena can change its purpose and form as often as four
times a week, at an impressive speed. Nevertheless, the two organisations do have more than one
268
factor in common when it comes to organising events, even

though FIBA generally has to organise several games over
several days in the same facility and many events in different
locations throughout the year, assigning event organisation to
local organising committees set up especially for the occasion,
and each time relying on different facilities, whereas the NBA
has a network of arenas under the continual direct management
of their affiliate basketball clubs.
The greatest common factor is the provision of a well-equipped
media area, given the influence the media can have during an
event, competition, or hospitality activity.
The press tribunes always seem to have the latest equipment,
with leading-edge systems, and strategically positioned with
good, if not optimum, visibility; press lounges which are
welcoming and functional at the same time; interview areas
inside and outside the playing hall, television camera positions,
and increasingly sophisticated recording facilities.
Of course, the most obvious differences pertain to the size of
the NBA playing area and the FIBA court, due mainly to the
difference in metric and traditional measuring systems, the
shape of court zones and certain game management rules:
(Diagram 13.1 - 13.2)
NBA overall court size = 94x50 ft (equivalent to 28.65x15.24m)
FIBA overall court size = 28x15m
NBA three point line = 23’9” (7.24m with an irregular area)
FIBA three point line = 6.25m (6.75m as of 2010)
NBA free-throw area/three-second restricted area=rectangular
FIBA free-throw area/three-second restricted area=trapezoidal
(rectangular as of 2010)
NBA personal fouls (for electronic boards) = 6
FIBA personal fouls (for electronic boards) = 5
NBA playing time: four 12-minute quarters
FIBA playing time: four 10-minute quarters
Diagram 13.1
270
Diagram 13.2
NEW FIBA COURT MARKINGS 2010

V
B asketball and
ariations of the Game
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 14 › Basketball and Variations of the Game
274
T
he game of basketball, known for its dynamic What is most remarkable about this discipline is the fact that it
characteristics, has spread from its birthplace in brings together athletes with different kinds of disabilities and,
America across the globe to become a worldwide more significantly, different levels of physical prowess, who play
sensation, enjoyed by people of all ages and all cultures. on the same court at the same time. Obviously, because a certain
As it has taken root in various countries, the sport has evolved balance needs to be guaranteed on the court, a disability rating
considerably, with the original playing rules having been system was introduced by the Player Classification commission
amended, sometimes out of necessity, sometimes for fun, to which classifies athletes according to their physical ability.
adapt to their prevalent social, cultural, geographical or political Players are given a points’ rating between 1.0 and 4.5 with the
context. lowest value corresponding to the highest disability level.
These changes gave rise to variations of the game, such as The playing rules are almost identical to the official rules for
wheelchair basketball, beach basketball or bankshot basketball, able-bodied athletes, with the main difference being that, on
each with its own following, and games organised independently the basis of the rating classification, the total number of points
in suitable and well-defined environments. of all the players on the court at any one time should not exceed
These related disciplines also have their share of complications 14 points.
when it comes to sports facilities, but their needs and Today, wheelchair basketball is played in more than 90 countries
requirements are quite different from the general casuistic by more than 100,000 men, women and children with a physical
elements inherent in regular basketball. disability that prevents them from playing competitive basketball
With the many facets of basketball too numerous to list, here on their feet.
is an overview of the most popular disciplines, including their Although the essence of the wheelchair game differs very little
defining characteristics and distinctive rules. from the “running” game, there are nevertheless some violations
All based on the fundamental elements of the ball and basket, which are specific to wheelchair basketball, for example:
the various disciplines fall into two categories: FIBA-recognised - Lifting: a player may not lift himself from his wheelchair seat.
disciplines and non-recognised disciplines. - Travelling: a player is only allowed to take two pushes before
Fiba-Recognised Disciplines he dribble shoots or passes the ball.
Wheelchair basketball - Raising: a player may not raise both rear wheels of his chair
The most common and popular variation is undoubtedly from the ground whilst holding the ball.
wheelchair basketball which over the past decade has assumed The form and size of the wheelchair is very important and
international significance. competition chairs must meet the specifications of the
It was first introduced back in 1946 by German-born neurologist International Wheelchair Basketball Federation (IBWF).
Sir Ludwig Guttman, who fled to England in 1939 where he set The chair may have either three or four wheels, with two large
up wheelchair basketball as part of a rehabilitation programme wheels at the back with a maximum diameter of 69 cm, each
for injured war veterans. equipped with a hand rim. The maximum seat height from the
ground is either 58 cm or 63 cm depending on the player’s
Wheelchair basketball is probably one of the most well-
classification.
known sports for the disabled, and ranks as one of the most
popular disciplines in the Paralympic Games organised by the The impact that wheelchair basketball has on sports facilities is
International Paralympic Committee (IPC). easy to recognise.
275 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 14 › Basketball and Variations of the Game
Regardless of their size or importance, facilities should not have The baskets are 2.80 m from the ground.
any architectural barriers, but should allow for easy access to the Streetball
changing rooms, support services and the playing court. These Streetball is an urban form of basketball, played outdoors on
elements are covered in detail in the chapter on “Architectural tarmac or concrete courts and playgrounds all over towns and
Barriers”. cities.
Wheelchair basketball and running basketball share the same Streetball started off mainly as a non-competitive leisure
playing area and equipment specifications, as stipulated in game (as a way of passing time and having fun), although
the current International Wheelchair Basketball Federation streetball players may compete amongst themselves in outdoor
(IBWF) and FIBA. tournaments. Streetball is directly linked to urban culture and is
Beach basketball very popular amongst today’s youth.
beach Basketball is an exciting variation of the game, played The playing rules are essentially the same as the Official
on sand. Basketball Rules, but there are no precise rules about the
The game was developed more than 30 years ago on the physical playing time or playing area. These are decided by the players
education fields of Gulf Shores School in Alabama, USA. This on the court at the time.
modified version of basketball, invented by Philip Bryant, has The playing area, frequently referred to as “playground”, is
grown from a selective skill-improvement game into a popular, often defined and surrounded by metal fencing which keeps
widespread competitive sport. Obviously, the fundamentals of the ball in. The size of the playgrounds often varies, ranging
beach basketball are closely related to regular basketball, yet from regular sized courts with two baskets to just a few square
they bring great diversity to the game. metres with only one basket.
Beach Basketball spread gradually throughout the rest of the The number of players in a game also varies, sometimes
USA and the rest of the world, thanks to the World Beach allowing only one-on-one games and other times games with
Basketball Association which organises world championship two full teams of five each.
tournaments. The federation has divided the continents into More detailed information on streetball playing areas and
Regions, 36 in total, some of which comprise several American facilities are covered in the chapter on “Outdoor Basketball
states, numerous Pacific islands, groups of countries and, in Facilities”.
the case of the Rising Sun Region No. 19, one entire country,
Deaf basketball
Japan.
Basketball for hearing-impaired men and women (completely
Obviously, in beach basketball there is no dribbling because it
or partially unable to hear in one or both ears) was introduced
is almost impossible on sand. Instead, the ball is moved down
around 1920.
the court by passing, with a maximum of 2.5 steps.
Today Deaf Basketball is played according to the same Official
The greatest difference in beach basketball lies in the actual
Basketball Rules of FIBA.
playing court which is circular and on sand. There are no
The Deaf International Basketball Federation (DIBF),
backboards attached to the baskets which are supported
founded in 2002, is the world governing body for international
by a pole system. The European version of the game uses a
deaf basketball which has the support of FIBA and works
rectangular playing area, measuring 20x10 m, and has two
in cooperation with the Deaflympics, and related national
baskets with backboards.
organisations.
Belgrade Indoor Arena
The DIBF endeavours to encourage the growth and development can have anywhere between
of basketball for the hearing-impaired by offering a programme 3 and 24 different stations,
of education, instruction and support, with the ultimate aim of depending on the size of the
conducting international competitions in cooperation with the playing area. (Diagram 14.2)
Deaflympics and its confederations. Because the number of
Diagram. 14.2 The playing area and equipment is the same as that for regular stations and their layout are
Bankshot basketball. determined by the court size
Basketball
Bankshot basketball available, the playing area
Bankshot basketball, invented by American Rabbi Reeve will differ from one facility to
Brenner in 1981, is a “non-exclusionary” form of basketball another, always maintaining a
which allows able-bodied and disabled people to play together degree of originality.
at the same time, with nobody being at a disadvantage. Bankshot courts can be
This game does not involve running, dribbling, jumping, or even installed indoors or outdoors.
physical contact, but relies primarily on shooting skills. The surface is usually a tarmac pad, but synthetic flooring is
The game is open to players of all ages and all abilities, for a better for outdoor facilities.
competitive yet sporting shooting competition. diagram 14.2
diagram 14.1 Variations not Recognised by Fiba

Slamball
Slamball is a recently invented team-based sport which took
1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 its inspiration from basketball, yet at the same time combines
Diagram. 14.1
elements of trampolining, ice-hockey and American football. It
Bankshot
Basketball is a fast-moving game with a very high-entertainment value.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
There are eight (8) players per team. Four (4) players from each
11
PLAYING STATIONS
team are allowed to be on the court at one time. The game
consists of 2 periods of ten (10) minutes, with a 15-second shot
A Bankshot playcourt consists of series of stations with
clock controlling possession of the ball.
uniquely shaped backboards, called Bankboards, supported by
The perimeter of the court is based on an ice-hockey rink,
steel poles and with traditional baskets. The unconventionally
enclosed by a 2.4m high plexi-glass wall. Players wear protective
shaped and brightly coloured backboards are characteristic of
gear at all times, as in American football, and are spurred on
Bankshot playing courts.
by the flexible rules governing physical contact in this hard-
There are three different coloured circles at different distances
hitting game. Slamball is to be played on a court 29.6mx17.4m
on the floor in front of each basket which mark the shooting spots
(Diagram 14.3). The main characteristic distinguishing a
and each carry a different number of points. Before moving on
slamball court from a regular basketball court is the use of
to the next station, the players must bank a shot from each of
trampolines, all rectangular in shape. At each end of the court,
the three circles at each station. (Diagram 14.1) Each basket
underneath the baskets, four trampolines are set into the floor.
is unique to the station it represents, and a Bankshot court
The area between the trampolines is known as the “island”.
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 14 › Basketball and Variations of the Game
278
Diagram. 14.3
Slamball
diagram 14.3
Players can only stay on the island for three (3) seconds. The goal rings have an internal diameter of 38cm.
The playing area extends another 3m behind the basket, Waterbasket
measured from the centre of the basket. Water basketball is a fairly new sport which mixes the rules
Netball of basketball and water polo. It is played by two teams of five
A well-known and popular sport in many Commonwealth players, plus five substitutes.
countries, netball is now the pre-eminent women’s team sport The game is divided into four (4) periods of 9 minutes each, with
as a spectator and participant sport in Australia and New a two minute interval in between each quarter. Baskets must be
Zealand. It is, however, not limited to women and mixed-team fixed at the ends of the pool or attached to the pool wall at a
competitions do indeed take place. height of 1.30m from the water surface. The backboards must
There are seven (7) players on each team. In professional be 1.10x0.72m, and the ring must be 45cm in diameter.
competitions the game lasts 60 minutes and is played over four Pools measuring 20mx15m are ideal for a pool court, but the
(4) 15-minute periods. At the beginning of every quarter or after game can also be played in any expanse of water (sea or lake)
a goal is scored, play starts from the centre of the court with if it is appropriately equipped and marked off for the game.
a “centre pass”. If the ball leaves the court boundaries, play is (Diagram 14.5).
restarted by a player who must stand with both feet behind the
side lines. The court is 30.5mx15.25m, divided into three zones
comprising one centre third and two goal thirds. (Diagram
14.4). The goal posts are 3.05m high and have no backboards.
Diagram. 14.4
Netball
diagram 14.4
diagram 14.5
Diagram 14.5
Waterbasket
AH MP ultifunctional
all roject
FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 15 › A Multifunctional Hall Project
284
A Multifunctional Hall Project best functional and organisational conditions so that the events
By Erminio Ravasio are as spectacular and engaging as possible. (Diagram 1A)
This chapter presents a model project for a basketball facility The illustrations which will be presented in this report depict
designed as a multifunctional hall which is suitable not only for the functional plans and the suggested layout of the hall for
sporting events but also for shows, conventions and different sporting events, shows and conventions.
exhibitions. The building is conceived as a multifunctional structure with a
The planner has chosen a city in northern Italy to simulate his high user-capacity. The multifunctional hall is therefore designed
design, pin-pointing a location close to a new exhibition centre. to host not only high-level sporting events but also everyday
The aim is to position the project in a territory and, in experimental sporting activities, and to include commercial areas,
terms, study its urban inclusion in a setting that would allow a entertainment areas for concerts and shows, cinemas, exhibition
new sports facility to take advantage of the infrastructures of rooms, bars and restaurants, with the ultimate aim of
an existing exhibition centre implementing the concept of large-scale self-supporting
The design proposal is based on studies and research carried facilities in the best way possible. (Diagram OB)
out by FIBA with the aim of presenting a visual idea of how a With a capacity of about 18,000 people, users access the
basketball hall can be conceived on the basis of all the aspects multifunctional hall via a filter area which is large enough to
mentioned in the previous chapters. The project guarantees accommodate the flow of people and acts as a meeting place
the standards necessary for the different activities planned, on arrival, and can also be used as an all-important area for
ensuring that basketball competitions can be played under the open-air events. (Diagram 13A)
diagram 1A
Diagram. 1A
285 FIBA GUIDE TO BASKETBALL FACILITIES › C hapter 15 › A Multifunctional Hall Project
Diagram. 13A
Adriatic Arena Pesaro
BASIC FUNCTION ALTERNATIVE GROUND

FUNCTIONS SHOPPING/
COMMERCIAL AREA
Diagram. OB
SHOWS
CONCERTS
EQUESTRIAN EVENTS SHOPPING AREA
VOLLEYBALL BARS
HOCKEY RESTAURANTS
BASKETBALL BOXING FAST FOOD RESTAURANTS
MOTOR-BIKE TRIAL RUN EXHIBITION AREA
BOXING HOTEL
TENNIS WELNESS CENTRE
ATHLETICS MEETING AREA
CONFERENCES PRIVATE FUNCTION AREA
CONVENTIONS ……….
………..
diagram OB
Transport terminals, car parks and those services which do not any emergency or fire prevention operations, whilst long-term
require natural lighting and ventilation are positioned in the parking is offered in the adjacent parking areas..
internal parts of the multifunctional hall. The service areas and playing areas are distributed on different
Separate access ramps have been planned according to the levels of the hall.
various vehicle categories and user-types to ensure user- The car parks and court are below ground level.
friendly access for all, whether service providers, athletes, The parterre is on the first underground level where there is also
spectators, journalists or emergency services. a large car park that enables suppliers and equipment trucks
Car parks have been appropriately located so that passengers direct access to the building. In this project, the car park and a
arrive on the correct level, for example team coaches arrive and part of the multifunctional hall have been placed underground
park on the same level as the court, thus enabling teams’ direct for two reasons: to reduce the visual impact of an obviously
access to the changing rooms from the car park. Separate large structure and to contain underground those functions
access routes are provided for VIPs, partners and journalists, which are not deemed to be particularly attractive, such as the
which lead them directly to their reserved areas, ensuring that car park which, now under cover, serves as a public square
the different categories remain segregated during a heavy influx above. (Diagrams 6A and 16A)
of visitors. On the second underground level there are two courts for
The spaces are designed to enable service and emergency training and pre-competition warm-ups. As mentioned in
vehicles quick and easy access to the court when setting up previous chapters, it is imperative that during high-level events
equipment for events, carrying out maintenance services or teams are designated an area where they can practise and
288
Diagram. 6A
diagram 6A
diagram 16A
Diagram. 16A
Diagram. 1B
diagram 1B
warm up before a game. The changing room area, large enough to accommodate several
Stairs and lifts can, however, be used by authorised public to teams at the same time, also houses a first-aid room and an
access the additional court area as this area is also suitable for anti-doping room. For security reasons, this area is reserved
small exhibitions, conventions or conferences which may be exclusively for players and coaches, thus averting contact with
organised alongside large events and trade fairs. The second other users or spectators and ensuring a smooth running of the
car-park level is also on this level. event. As the players leave the court at the end of a game, they
All levels are connected by common areas with stairs, lifts or pass through a “mixed zone” in one of the four corners where
escalators. the service sections are located, where journalists may descend
Different accesses are foreseen for different user categories, directly from the press area to meet with the players and their
including a special access route reserved for the players which coaches. (Diagram 1B)
takes them directly into a closed and protected area; this can It is important to highlight that the entire hall, with the exception
be used by players arriving in the team coach as well as those of the playing court, is on different levels.
travelling with their own vehicles for home games. The reserved Stairs, lifts and escalators lead up to the first level. On this floor,
access route leads directly to court level, which corresponds to there is the main entrance to the multifunctional hall and general
the first underground level. En route to the court, players must public facilities, such as the reception area, refreshment area
pass through the changing rooms where they can get ready for and commercial area. (Diagram 2B)
the game. The communal area on the second level can also be reached
290
Diagram. 2B
diagram 2B
diagram 3B
Diagram. 3B
Diagram. 4B
diagram 4B
using stairs and elevators, after access has been authorised by purposes. (Diagram 4B)
means of an electronic pass or showing identification at The dimensions of the service section are fixed and the space
reception. (Diagram 3B) within uninterrupted and pillar-free, thus allowing the space to
The court is generally visible from the commercial area, but be divided and used in different ways. This is a positive aspect
may be closed off from public view by covering the glass which improves the multifunctional hall’s versatility, and thus
partitions to conceal the court or parterre whenever necessary, promotes its use throughout the year. Not only can the space
for example during training or a concert. be redesigned according to the event in question, but enhanced
The stands are accessed from the next level, the third floor, versatility also allows space requirements to change in line with
which is reached using the escalators. On this floor there are no technological evolution. What is more, with the public’s changing
commercial spaces apart from the refreshment areas. Thus, interests, the spaces can easily be adapted to satisfy new
the space on this level is intended solely to accommodate the requirements.(Diagram 7A)
flow of spectators entering and leaving the stands. Next to each Spaces inside the service sections, in the basement, on the
corner section there are two independent staircases which are first floor and sometimes on the second floor, are dedicated
defined by reinforced concrete walls; near the stairs there are exclusively to service operators, whatever the event.
lifts. In general, spectators heading to the stands will use the The corresponding spaces on upper levels, however, can be
escalators to reach the third level and will therefore see the dedicated to permanent ventures which will benefit from a view
commercial area as they pass through the second level. of the court.
Each floor offers restricted and reserved areas for special In the corner sections there is also the wellness centre with a
292
captivating view of the court. (Diagram 4A)

The strategy of this project is to also involve users who would
not usually follow basketball events.
Regarding the structure of the hall, the roofing consists of a
structural part made up of iron beams with a double-T section
or reticulated beams that cover the main lighting system using
the reinforced concrete ducts (near the fire escape stairs
mentioned earlier) as support.
Diagram. 7A
The reinforced concrete ducts are used because they are both
fire-resistant and load-resistant; in fact, they can support the
emergency stairs, lifts, part of the stands and the roofing itself.
The structure of the roofing includes the main beams which
form a grid on which nine secondary squares rest; these are
alternately connected with the upper and lower parts of the
main beams.
With a building of this type, the following elements can be
located indoors: lighting systems, wiring for the fixed lighting
diagram 7A
above the court, wiring for the arena’s audio system, ducts for
diagram 4A
the air treatment system as well as fire-prevention systems and
other safety installations. Frames are placed below the roofing
to fix the spot-light system for the court.
The roofing in the filter area comprises metal elements which
intersect to leave openings between one panel and another.
The part of the same roofing which covers the arena has sealed
infills which insulate the roof and render it waterproof.
The filter area can be accessed from the sides, through different
accesses. The aim of this space is to offer a first welcome point Diagram. 4A
for all visitors as well as an intermediate space where exhibitions
and “street” sports can be offered entertainment during major
events. (Diagram 5A)
The thought behind this area is to increase exposure by
showcasing events on large screens. This is particularly
valuable during any popular world championship as it enables
fans to follow the games on maxi-screens or LED-walls as they
are broadcast live.
The facility offers a central multifunctional assembly room which
Diagram. 5A
diagram 5A
294
can accommodate up to 300 people. This room is necessary the speakers to be brought closer to those seated further away.
for press conferences or meetings. For easy access, and During trade fairs and exhibitions, or whenever the arena is
evacuation in case of an emergency, the room has four divided, each area will be fitted with two or four LED-walls with
entrances; these also allow the room to be divided into four independent controls for advertising, announcements,
smaller areas where up to four conferences or meetings can information and security.
then be held simultaneously. Men’s and women’s toilet areas The project foresees the use of renewable and recyclable
are located nearby, each with 10 cubicles. materials produced without causing damage to the environment,
The section reserved for journalists includes areas equipped and also the use of energy-saving technologies.
with computer workstations, press conference areas and The use of energy saving materials and equipment for the
refreshment areas, all of which are connected by stairs and lifts rational production of energy is important in both environmental
and not accessible to the public. Considering the versatility of and economic terms, once again supporting the concept of a
the multifunctional hall, ample storage space is very important. self-supporting structure.
The building must have a storeroom large enough to hold all the The building shell is one of the main aspects taken into account
equipment necessary for the different sporting activities, for in this project.
example, the mobile floor of the basketball court which, given The shell has three main characteristics:
the total surface area, is particularly large.
-- high level of insulation
The multifunctional hall can be used for the following sporting
-- good breathability and sufficient mass to reach a good level
activities:
of thermal inertia
·· Basketball
-- high capacity to withhold the heat or cold for as long as
·· Boxing possible.
·· Volleyball The imposing size of the facility is considered a unique
·· Hockey architectural feature: the building slopes downwards towards
·· Equestrian events the public access area until it reaches the ground. The zig-zag
·· Athletics roof rises on the opposite side but is still lower than the top of
·· Tennis the arena, leaving space for a second entrance. (Diagrams
·· Shows, conventions, conferences 16AB and 16ABC)
Given the versatility of the hall and the different activities that The outside facades of the sports facility are rendered visible in
can be organised in the arena, it is important that the position the dark through the installation of LED-walls and luminous
of the stands can be altered to cater to the needs of the different projectors that project event-related information and advertising.
activities; for this reason, retractable stands are preferred. (Diagrams 14A and 15A)
(Diagrams 1G, 2G, 3G, 4G, 5G, 6G, 7G and 8G) In the model project proposed, the front of the facility extends
There are eight LED-walls near the four corner sections inside as far as the exhibition centre in the hypothetical location; as
the arena. such, it acts as a giant advertising board to those travelling
LED-walls provide close-up coverage of the game as well as along the arterial roads close to the facility, providing the ideal
replays of televised games. Furthermore, they offer visual opportunity to publicise events being held there.
support during conferences as internal filming allows images of (Diagram 11A)
Diagram. 1G
Volley ball
Diagram. 2G
Tennis
diagram 1G - Volley ball diagram 2G - Tennis
diagram 3G - Shows diagram 4G - Hockey
Diagram. 3G
Shows
Diagram. 4G
Hockey
296
Diagram. 5G
Equestrian events
Diagram. 6G
Boxing
diagram 5G - Equestrian events diagram 6G - Boxing
diagram 7G - Concert diagram 8G - Basketball
Diagram. 7G
Concert
Diagram. 8G
Basketball
Diagram. 16AB
diagram 16AB
diagram 16ABC
Diagram. 16ABC
298
Diagram. 14A
diagram 14A
diagram 15A
Diagram. 15A
Diagram. 11A
diagram 11A

Fiba Guide To Basketball Facilities PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fiba Guide To Basketball Facilities PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fiba Guide To Basketball Facilities PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FIBA GUIDE TO

Subdivision of Sports Floor types and game

A ncillary Services 54 G ame E quipment for Basketball 80

96 140 150 166

186 210 222 234

Elimination of Special technological The approval procedure Outdoor basketball

250 262 272 282

Dear FIBA Family,

Dear Fiends of the FIBA Study Centre,

Dear Basketball Amateurs,

In fact, in terms of quality, demand has been influenced by

diagram 1.2 regarding location, maintenance, energy consumption, safety

avoid major problems in the future. Diagram 5

Over the last few years, the organisers of basketball events

Final Round 12,000 seats

Olympic Qualifying Tournaments for Men and Women

Final Round 10,000 seats

World Championship for Men

Final Round 15,000 seats

World Championship for Women

Final Round 8,000 seats

U-21 World Championships for Men and Women

Final Round 8,000 seats

U-19 World Championship for Men

Final Round 8,000 seats

U-19 World Championship for Women

Final Round 5,000 seats

Final Round 10,000 - 15,000 seats

Diagram 6 ·· Television and radio broadcast technical services;

Classifications of Competitions and Types of Sports

type of event; however, as we will see later in the guide, other

EXTERNAL SAFETY AREA

SAFETY AREA INTENDED

SAFETY AREA AROUND THE PLAYING AREA

SAFETY AREA INTENDED

9.00m 10.00m 9.00m

0.10 m 0.85m Diagram 2.2

Mid-points of 1.575m 1.20m

diagram 2.5 accessible to people with reduced physical or sensory abilities

j. Administrative offices. Officials table

Changing Room 15 -“A”

5.00m 1.80m 1.00m 1.00m

Diagram 2.10 Changing room

Changing Room 20 -“A”

Refrigerator 1.80m 1.00m 1.00m 1.00m

Changing room Changing Room 20 -“B”

1.50m 2.50m 7.00m

Diagram 2.12 diagram 2.13

·· Floors, ceilings, doors and windows shall have the same

-- 1 wall-mounted drinking fountain without pedestal; diagram 2.15

Diagram 2.15 Flooring: Easy to clean waterproof non-slip material

The shower area shall be safe and comfortable; therefore,

SHOWERS walls and ceilings see the access room section.

1.50m 1.50m 2.50m

TOILETS CHANGING ROOMS FOR OFFICIALS

SHOWERS ACCESS ROOM

TOILETS Facilities designed to host international events: the changing

authorised persons. Doping control signs must be hung on the

Sample - Taking Area